0% found this document useful (0 votes)

310 views886 pages

21-Automatic-Transmission 300c

Uploaded by

choco84

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

310 views886 pages

21-Automatic-Transmission 300c

Uploaded by

choco84

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 886

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - SERVICE

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - SHIFTER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 42RLE - SERVICE
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 42RLE -
ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ProCarManuals.com

page page

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH . . . . . . . 61

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS P0735-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 5TH . . . . . . . 63
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING P0742-TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC CHECK OUT . . . . . . 3 STUCK ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
P0219–ENGINE OVERSPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 P0743-TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 68
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW ..........6 P0748-MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID
P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . 12 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
P0602-CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING P0752-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 P0753-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . 81
P0604-INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAM . 18 P0758-2-3 SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
P0605-INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE ROM . 20 P0758-2-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . 89
P0613-INTERNAL TRANSMISSION P0762-3-4 SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 P0763-3-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . 97
P0642-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 P0778-SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
P0643-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 SUPPLY/ WATCHDOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE P1631-TCM INTERNAL- PROCESSOR
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 CLOCK PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
P0710-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE P1632-TCM INTERNAL - TEST INTERNAL
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 110
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE P1633-TCM INTERNAL - TEST EXTERNAL
SENSOR LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 112
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE P1634-TCM INTERNAL- INTERNAL
SENSOR INTERMITTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 114
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT P1636-TCM INTERNAL- EXTERNAL
NO SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 116
P0730-INCORRECT GEAR RATIO . . . . . . . . . 54 P1637-TCM INTERNAL-EEPROM
P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST . . . . . . . 55 PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND . . . . . . . 57 P1638-TCM INTERNAL-CAN 1 RAM
P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD . . . . . . . 59 PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
P1639-TCM INTERNAL-CAN 2 RAM U1119-LOST FCM MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 U1400-IMPLAUSIBLE TPS SIGNAL
P1704-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
OVERSPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 U1401-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE SPEED
P1705-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
OVERSPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 U1402-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE
P1731-INCORRECT GEAR ENGAGED . . . . . 130 TEMPERATURE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . 199
P2638-TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK U1404-IMPLAUSIBLE STATIC ENGINE
SIGNAL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 202
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT U1405-IMPLAUSIBLE MINIMUM ENGINE
NO SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 205
P2783-TORQUE CONVERTER U1406-IMPLAUSIBLE MAXIMUM ENGINE
TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 208
P2784-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 U1407-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE TORQUE
CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 REQUEST SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 211
U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . 146 U1408-IMPLAUSIBLE BRAKE SIGNAL
U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 U1409-IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT FRONT WHEEL
U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE . . . . . . . . 152 U140A-IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT FRONT
U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . 220
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 155 U140B-IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT REAR WHEEL
U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ProCarManuals.com

FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 U140C-IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT REAR WHEEL

U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 U140D-IMPLAUSIBLE WHEEL SPEED
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC SIGNALS RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 U140F-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE VARIANT
U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
FROM ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 U1410-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING FCM
U0404-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED VARIANT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
FROM ESM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 U1507-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE
U0415-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED TEMPERATURE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH
FROM ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED U1509-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE VARIANT
FROM CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED . . . . . 240
U0424-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED U150A-IMPLAUSIBLE FCM VARIANT
FROM HVAC CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 179 MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED . . . . . 243
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA FROM FCM .. . 182 NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST
U110B-LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE . 184 - VER 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
U1118-LOST ENGINE MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . 187 SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . 246

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC CHECK OUT
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Diagnostic Test

1. NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC CHECK OUT

Note: Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. If the fluid level is low, locate and
repair the leak then check and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information.
Note: Always perform diagnostics with a fully charged battery to avoid false symptoms.
With the scan tool, read the engine DTCs. Check and repair all engine DTCs prior to performing transmission symp-
tom diagnostic procedures.
With the scan tool, read and record all Transmission DTCs.
Note: If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under
which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any
stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally
set.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Repair as necessary.
Most DTCs set on start up but some must be set by driving the vehicle such that all diagnostic monitors have run.
ProCarManuals.com

Note: Verify flash level of transmission controller. Some problems are corrected by software upgrades to
the transmission controller. Verify no variant DTCs are present. If variant DTCs are present, perform their
perspective test first.
Note: Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply.

Were there any repairs that fixed the customer’s complaint?

Yes >> Testing complete.
No >> Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS category and perform the appropriate symptom.
P0219–ENGINE OVERSPEED
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors the engine speed over the CAN bus. If the engine speed is
greater than 4100+ 800 RPM, the TCM assumes that either the information from the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) is incorrect or that a major mechanical problem exist. Once the DTC is set, the TCM will position the trans-
mission gear into neutral to protect the engine and transmissin from damage. The transmission will remain in neutral
and will not be revaluated by the TCM until the ignition is cycled.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, with the transmission in gear with a valid Engine RPM mes-
sage received at least once, and the CAN Bus Circuit and Engine CAN Message Missing are not active.
Set Condition:
Engine speed is greater than 4100+ 800 RPM.

Possible Causes

MECHANICAL ENGINE PROBLEM

MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM
ProCarManuals.com

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS

With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs.

Are there any gear ratio and/or speed sensor DTCs present in
addition to P0219?
Yes >> Refer to the Symptom Category and perform the appropri-
ate symptom. If speed sensor DTCs are present, perform
their respective test first.
No >> Go To 2
P0219–ENGINE OVERSPEED (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF ENGINE MECHANICAL PROBLEMS ARE PRESENT
Determine if any Engine mechanical problems are present.

Are there any Engine mechanical problems present?

Yes >> Repair engine as necessary. Refer to 9 - ENGINE-SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate repair
procedures.
No >> Go To 3

3. CHECK IF TRANSMISSION MECHANICAL PROBLEMS ARE PRESENT

Determine if any Transmission mechanical problems are present.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for debris or a plugged Transmission Oil Filter. Refer to 21 - AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service
procedures.

Is there any debris, plugged Transmission Oil Filter, or signs of an internal transmission problem?
Yes >> Repair Transmission as necessary. Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANS-
MISSION-NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedures.
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com

4. TEST DRIVE VEHICLE

Note: The Engine and Transmission must not have mechanical
problems and be operating normally before proceeding with this
test.
Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) per the
Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CON-
TROL MODULES/POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE for the appro-
priate service procedures.
Reassemble any previously disconnected connectors and/or compo-
nents.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs.
Road test the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Did DTC P0219-ENGINE OVERSPEED reset?

Yes >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found,
replace the TCM per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
ProCarManuals.com
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set if the monitored battery voltage
drops below 8.5 volts and a temporary limp in will be activated. If the voltage rises above 9.0 volts, normal oper-
ations is resumed and the TCM will record the DTC as a one trip fault. The DTC will only mature to a full DTC if the
voltage is less than 8.5 volts with a engine speed greater than 2000 RPM for a least 60 seconds.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When monitored battery voltage drops below 8.5 volts.

Possible Causes

ENGINE CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS

LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
(A1) B(+) CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
ProCarManuals.com

(F942) FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

TRANSMISSION RELAY
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR ENGINE CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS

With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.

Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK SYSTEM VOLTAGE
Start the engine.
With the scan tool, under transmission, check system voltage.

Is the transmission system voltage above 9.0 volts?

Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 3

3. CHECK (A1) B(+) CIRCUIT

ProCarManuals.com

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Remove the Transmission Control relay.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A1) B(+) cir-
cuit in the Transmission Relay connector.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (A1) B(+) circuit for high resistance.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (F942) FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Transmission Relay.
Connect a jumper wire between the (A1) B+ circuit and the (F2) Trans-
mission Relay Output circuit in the Transmission Relay connector.
Start the engine.
With the scan tool, under transmission, check system voltage.

Is the transmission system voltage above 9.0 volts?

Yes >> Replace the Transmission Relay.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (F942) FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Reinstall the Transmission Relay.
Disconnect the TCM C1 harness connector.
Start the engine.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F942) Fused
Transmission Relay Output circuit in the TCM C1 harness connector.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (F942) Fused Transmission Relay Output circuit
for high resistance. Pay attention to the Transmission fuse
cavity for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

6. CHECK (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z912)
Ground circuit in the TCM C1 harness connector.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Where there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
ProCarManuals.com
P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set and temporary limp-in will be
activated, if the monitored battery voltage rises above 16.9 volts. If the voltage drops below 16.4 volts, normal oper-
ations is resumed and the TCM will record the DTC as a one trip fault. The DTC will only mature to a full DTC if the
voltage rises above 16.9 volts with a engine speed greater than 2000 RPM for a least 60 seconds.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the monitored battery voltage rises above 16.9 volts.

Possible Causes

CHARGING SYSTEM OVERCHARGE CONDITION

JUMP START OFF A 24 VOLT SYSTEM
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS

With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.
Note: This includes any one trip faults.

Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF VOLTAGE IS GREATER THAN 16.9 VOLTS
Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM.
With the scan tool, monitor the Transmission system voltage for at
least 60 seconds.

Does the Transmission system voltage read above 16.9 volts

for any period of time?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 3

3. VERIFY IF VEHICLE WAS JUMP STARTED WITH 24-VOLT SYSTEM

ProCarManuals.com

Verify if the vehicle was jump started by another vehicle using a 24-volt charging system.

Was the vehicle jump started by another vehicle using a 24-volt charging system?
Yes >> This is the cause of the DTC. Erase the DTC and return the vehicle to the customer.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE
Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM.
With the scan tool, read the Transmission system voltage.
With a voltmeter, measure the battery voltage at the battery.
Compare the readings.

Does the voltage readings match between the Transmission

scan tool reading and the battery voltmeter reading?
Yes >> Repair the charging system for an over charging condition.
Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
and diagnose the appropriate symptom as if the DTC is
current.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and
ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM
per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service proce-
dures.
ProCarManuals.com

Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -

VER 1.

5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0602-CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED
ProCarManuals.com
P0602-CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the
TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present, the controller will enter Limp-in
mode and illuminate the MIL.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present.

Possible Causes
CONTROLLER NOT CODED
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF TCM IS FLASHABLE

Note: Controller is programmed with generic software and will
not allow the correct vehicle Powertrain management.
With the scan tool, record the vehicles controller part number.
Select Use Controller Part Number under the Flash Tab.
Flash the controller with the correct software.

Were you able to update (flash) the controller successfully?

Yes >> Test Complete.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Replace the TCM per the Service Information. Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate
service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0604-INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAM
ProCarManuals.com
P0604-INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAM (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the
TCM detects an error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM), the controller will enter Limp-in mode
and illuminate the MIL.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the TCM detects an error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM).

Possible Causes
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test
ProCarManuals.com

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

Diagnostic Test
ProCarManuals.com

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the TCM detects an error with the controllers processor.

Diagnostic Test

1.
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

Possible Causes

SPEED SENSOR DTCS PRESENT

(T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SHORT TO GROUND
INTERNAL SHORT IN THE ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR DTCS

With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs.

Are there any speed sensor DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELEC-
TRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P0642-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK FOR (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector.
Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T72) Sensor Supply
Voltage circuit in the TCM harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit for a short
to ground
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK FOR A SHORT IN THE ELECTOHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T72) Sensor Supply
Voltage circuit in the TCM harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly for a
short to ground. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-
SION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE
INFORMATION for proper service procedures.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and
ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM
per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service proce-
dures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0643-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
ProCarManuals.com
P0643-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Sensor Supply Voltage circuit supplies a 6 volt power supply for the two input speed sensors. The Sensor
Supply Voltage circuit is constantly monitored for correct voltage between 4.8 to 7.2 volts. If the voltage does not
stay within the 4.8 to 7.2 volt range, the appropriate DTC will set.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and no overvoltage condition exist.
Set Condition:
When the monitored sensor voltage is not within specified limits and rises above 7.2 volts.

Possible Causes

(T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO OTHER CIRCUITS
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR DTCS

With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs.

Are there any speed sensor and/or temperature sensor DTCs

present?
Yes >> Refer to the AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELEC-
TRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P0643-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE ON THE SCAN TOOL
Start the engine.
With the scan tool, check the Transmission Solenoid Supply Voltage.

Is the Transmission Solenoid Supply Voltage above 7.2 volts?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5

3. CHECK (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

ProCarManuals.com

While back probing, measure the voltage of the (T72) Solenoid Supply
Voltage circuit in the TCM harness connector.

Does the measured voltage match the voltage reading on the

scan tool ± 0.2 volts?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and
ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM
per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service proce-
dures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0643-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Disconnect all TCM harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between the (T72) Solenoid Supply Voltage
circuit and all other circuits in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Con-
trol Unit harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T72) Solenoid

Supply Voltage circuit and all other circuits in the Transmission
Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T72) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a
short to another circuit(s).
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and
ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM
ProCarManuals.com

per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/

ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service proce-
dures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.

5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Solenoid Supply Voltage output of the Transmission Control Module (TCM) provides the voltage to the three
shift, two pressure and TCC solenoids. The output is active whenever the system is in normal operation. If a major
system fault is detected, this output is turned off to ensure that no solenoids are active.
When Monitored:
When the output is active and no undervoltage condition exists.
Set Condition:
When the monitored supply voltage and battery voltage differ by 3.6 volts.

Possible Causes

(T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN

(T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs.

Is the DTC P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/WATCH-

DOG also present?
Yes >> When both P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIR-
CUIT and P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/
WATCHDOG DTCs set at the same time indicates that the
(T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit is shorted to voltage.
Repair the Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a short to
voltage. If no short to voltage is present, using the sche-
matics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module
(TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push
out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground cir-
cuits. If no problems are found replace the TCM per the
Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELEC-
TRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CON-
TROL MODULE for the appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors.
Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector.
Measure the resistance of the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit
between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for an
open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

3. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T78) Solenoid Sup-
ply Voltage circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage
circuit and all other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assem-
bly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T78) Solenoid

Supply Voltage circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohy-
draulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a
short to another circuit(s).
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and
ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM
per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com
P0710-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0710-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly of the NAG1 transmission contains a temperature sensor to monitor the
transmission oil temperature. This sensor is wired in series with the transmission Park/Neutral switch. The Trans-
mission Control Module (TCM) expects to see a valid voltage level from the sensor when the shifter is in Reverse
or any forward Drive position. The TCM also expects to see an open circuit condition when the shifter is in the Park
or Neutral position. When the controller detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the
DTC will set. Note: Due to a open circuit condition in Park or Neutral, the TCM substitutes the Transmission Tem-
perature reading with Engine Temperature when in Park or Neutral

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the TCM detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the DTC will set.

Possible Causes

SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY OUT OF ADJUSTMENT

(T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ProCarManuals.com

(T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO OTHER CIRCUITS
(T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S)
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF SPEED SENSOR DTCS ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Are there any speed sensor DTCs present also?

Yes >> Refer to the AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELEC-
TRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P0710-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY SHIFT CABLE IS OUT OF ADJUSTMENT
Check the Shift Lever Assembly shift cable for proper adjustment. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AU-
TOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the proper service procedures.

Is the Shift Lever Assembly shift cable properly adjusted?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Adjust the Shift Lever Assembly shift cable. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the proper service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

3. CHECK IF ENGINE STARTS IN PART OR NEUTRAL

Attempt to start the engine in Park or Neutral.

Does the engine start in either Park or Neutral?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5

4. TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH

ProCarManuals.com

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Place the gear selector in Drive.
Measure the resistance of the Transmission Temperature Sensor
between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit and
the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 500 to 2500 ohms?

Yes >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular
attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems
are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information.
Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the
appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly and Transmission
Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch pins and connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push
out. If no problems are found, replace the Transmission Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch. Refer to 21-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the
proper service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0710-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Reconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.
Note: This procedure may set various DTCs to multiple modules connected to the CAN bus. Disregard and
erase any DTCs that may set after completion of this procedure.
With the Shift Lever in the Park position, attempt to start the engine.

Does the engine start?

Yes >> Replace the Transmission Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the proper service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 6

6. CHECK IF THE (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT IS SHORTED TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector.
ProCarManuals.com

Disconnect the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T54) Temperature
Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal
circuit for a short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
P0710-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
7. CHECK IF (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT IS SHORTED TO ANOTHER
CIRCUIT(S)
Measure the resistance between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N
Switch Signal circuit and all other circuits in the TCM C1 and C2 har-
ness connectors.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T54) Tempera-

ture Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit and any other circuit(s)?
Yes >> Repair the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal
circuit for a short to another circuit(s).
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular
attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems
are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information.
Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the
appropriate service procedure.
ProCarManuals.com

Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -

VER 1.
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW
ProCarManuals.com
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly of the NAG1 transmission contains a temperature sensor to monitor the
transmission oil temperature. This sensor is wired in series with the transmission Park/Neutral switch. The Trans-
mission Control Module (TCM) expects to see a valid voltage level from the sensor when the shifter is in Reverse
or any forward Drive position. The TCM also expects to see an open circuit condition when the shifter is in the Park
or Neutral position. When the controller detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the
DTC will set. Note: The TCM substitutes the Transmission Temperature reading with Engine Temperature due to a
open circuit condition in Park or Neutral.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the TCM detects the Temperature sensor input is below 0.5 volts.

Possible Causes

(T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY DTCS

With the scan tool, check for Shift Lever Assembly DTCs.

Are there any Shift Lever Assembly DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - SHIFTER DIAGNOS-
TICS category and perform the appropriate symptom.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY CABLE FOR PROPER ADJUSTMENT
Check the Shift Lever Assembly Cable for proper adjustment. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure.

Is the Shift Lever Assembly Cable for properly adjusted?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Adjust the Shift Lever Assembly Cable per the Service Information. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANS-
MISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service
procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

3. CHECK THE (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T54) Temperature
Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal
ProCarManuals.com

circuit for a short to ground.

Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER
CIRCUIT
Disconnect the TCM C1 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N
Switch Signal circuit and all other circuits in the TCM C1 and C2 har-
ness connectors.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T54) Tempera-

Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL

MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the
appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT
ProCarManuals.com
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly of the NAG1 transmission contains a temperature sensor to monitor the
transmission oil temperature. This sensor is wired in series with the transmission Park/Neutral switch. The Trans-
mission Control Module (TCM) expects to see a valid voltage level from the sensor when the shifter is in Reverse
or any forward Drive position. The TCM also expects to see an open circuit condition when the shifter is in the Park
or Neutral position. When the controller detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the
DTC will set. Note: The TCM substitutes the Transmission Temperature reading with Engine Temperature due to a
open circuit condition in Park or Neutral.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and the Transmission Temperature below 170 °C (338 °F).
Set Condition:
When the TCM detects the Temperature sensor input changes more than 10 °C (50 °F) between each 20
mSec sensor read.

Possible Causes

WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR - P/N SWITCH

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, monitor the Transmission Temperature.
Apply the parking brake.
With the brakes firmly applied, place the gear selector in Drive.
While monitoring the scan tool, wiggle the wires and connectors from
the TCM to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit.

Did the transmission temperature fluctuate while wiggling the

wires?
Yes >> Repair the wiring and/or connectors as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF DTC RESETS
Replace the Transmission Temperature Sensor - P/N Switch. Refer to
21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for proper service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Did DTC P0714 reset?

Yes >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular
attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems
are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information.
Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the
appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL
ProCarManuals.com
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) is one of two hall effect speed sensors that are used by the Transmission Control
Module (TCM) to calculate the transmissions turbine speed. Since the turbine speed could not be measured directly,
two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors are required because both elements are not
active in all gears.

When Monitored:
Engine speed greater than 450 RPM with none of the following DTCs present: engine speed, TCM undervolt-
age, output speed sensor, and/or rear wheel speed DTCs. Also required are all wheel speeds above 250 RPM
and no wheel slip detected (signal from the ABS system).
Set Condition:
If the Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) signal is equal to 0 RPM.

Possible Causes

(T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN

(T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(T70) SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
(T70) SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2)
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT

Note: The Transmission Control Module stores under Environ-
mental Data the transmission operating conditions when the DTC
was set. Before erasure of any DTC, record all information per-
taining to the DTC, even if there is more than one DTC stored.
With the scan tool, erase transmission DTCs.
Using the Environmental Data previously recorded, drive the vehicle
and try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

Does the DTC reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 10
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit
from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control
Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit for an
open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal
circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit
for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit from the
TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit
Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. CHECK THE (T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER
CIRCUIT(S)
Measure the resistance of the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal
circuit to all the other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit
Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T70) Input Speed
Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Elec-
trohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit
for a short to another circuit(s).
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T70) Input Speed
Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com

7. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S)
Measure the resistance between the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit to all
the other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly har-
ness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T13) Sensor

Ground circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to
another circuit(s)
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
8. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T13) Sensor Ground
circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
9. CHECK THE INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL
Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector.
Using a Lab Scope, backprobe the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2)
Signal circuit at the TCM C2 harness connector.
WARNING: Properly support the vehicle.
Raise all drive wheels off the ground.
Start the engine.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, keep hands and
feet clear of rotating wheels.
Place gear selector in drive and increase vehicle speed to engage 2nd
gear.
Compare the scope pattern on the Lab Scope with a typical 5-volt
square wave pattern.

Is the scope pattern comparable to the typical 5-volt square

wave signal scope pattern?
Yes >> Using the schematics as a guide, check
the Transmission Control Module (TCM)
pins, terminals, and connectors for corro-
ProCarManuals.com

sion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay

particular attention to all power and
ground circuits. If no problems are found,
replace the TCM per the Service Infor-
mation. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELEC-
TRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
for the appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFI-
CATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Replace the Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2).
Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-
SION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the
appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFI-
CATION TEST - VER 1.

10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0730-INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sen-
sor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the
transmission is trying to mechanically shift into a lower gear then the TCM intends.
When Monitored:
Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, output speed greater than 180 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor
errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and all wheel speeds above 450
RPM.
Set Condition:
No shifting operation and detected gear is not the actual gear. No shifting operation - detected (calculated)
gear is less than actual (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual turbine speed - calculated tur-
bine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift -
detected (calculated) gear is less than actual (expected) gear. During Downshift - detected (calculated) gear is
less than actual (expected) gear.

Possible Causes
ProCarManuals.com

INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM

Determine if there are any Transmission mechanical problems present.
Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for excessive debris or a plugged Transmission Oil Filter. Refer to
21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropri-
ate service procedure

Is there any Transmission mechanical problems present?

Yes >> Repair as necessary. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/
SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and
connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate
service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sen-
sor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the
transmission is slipping or an invalid gear ratio is present.
When Monitored:
Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, output speed greater than 180 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor
errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and all wheel speeds above 450
RPM.
Set Condition:
No shifting operation and detected gear is not the actual gear. No shifting operation - detected (calculated)
gear is less than actual (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual turbine speed - calculated tur-
bine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift -
detected (calculated) gear is less than actual (expected) gear. During Downshift - detected (calculated) gear is
less than actual (expected) gear.

Possible Causes
ProCarManuals.com

LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID

OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS PRESENT
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION FAILURE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS

With the scan tool, check transmission DTCS

Are there any solenoid and/or solenoid supply voltage DTCs

present?
Yes >> Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOS-
TICS category and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
Check the transmission fluid level per the Service Information. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure.

Is the fluid level correct?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Properly adjust the fluid level per the Service Information. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

3. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT

With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Trans-
mission DTCs.
Note: If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores
the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally
set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before
erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in
duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle
ProCarManuals.com

while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

Did the DTC P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST reset?

Yes >> Repair internal transmission as necessary. Pay particular
attention to components related to referenced DTC. Refer
to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the
appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4

4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits.
Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sen-
sor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the
transmission is slipping or an invalid gear ratio is present.
When Monitored:
Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, output speed greater than 180 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor
errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and all wheel speeds above 450
RPM.
Set Condition:
No shifting operation and detected gear is not the actual gear. No shifting operation - detected (calculated)
gear is less than actual (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual turbine speed - calculated tur-
bine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift -
detected (calculated) gear is less than actual (expected) gear. During Downshift - detected (calculated) gear is
less than actual (expected) gear.

Possible Causes
ProCarManuals.com

LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS

With the scan tool, check transmission DTCS

Are there any solenoid and/or solenoid supply voltage DTCs

present?
Yes >> Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOS-
TICS category and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
Check the transmission fluid level per the Service Information. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure.

Is the fluid level correct?

3. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT

while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

Did the DTC P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND reset?

Did the DTC P0735-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 5TH reset?

4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0742-TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH STUCK ON
ProCarManuals.com
P0742-TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH STUCK ON (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly monitors the amount of torque converter slippage. When the
torque converter clutch (TCC) is open the slippage is expected to be above a threshold. If the slippage is less then
expected when the TCC is open, the TCM assumes that the TCC is stuck on.
When Monitored:
Ignition on, TCM not in initialization phase, No input speed sensor 1 or 2 (N2–N3) DTCs, No CAN bus or ECM
DTCs, No CAN engine speed signal or engine torque signal not implausible DTCs, Engine speed greater than
450 rpm, No shift in progress, Gear 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 engaged, and the TCM torque converter status is OPEN
Set Condition:
Engine RPM (Turbine Speed) is greater than 30 RPM when engine torque less than 100 N·m (74.0 ft.lbs.) for
period of 1.0 second.

Possible Causes

(T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

LOCKUP CONTROL VALVE STICKING IN ITS BORE

LEAKING TCC SOLENOID
TORQUE CONVERTER
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF ENGINE STALLS OR STUMBLES IN GEAR

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Start the engine.
With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive.

Did the engine stall or stumble?

Yes >> Repair internal transmission. Pay particular attention to the components related to the TCC such as the
Lockup Control Valve sticking in its bore or a leaking TCC Solenoid. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANS-
MISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service
procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0742-TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH STUCK ON (CONTINUED)
2. (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T75) TCC Solenoid
Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short
to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

3. (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control cir-
cuit and all other circuits in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control
Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T75) TCC Sole-
noid Control circuit and all other circuits in the Transmission
Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short
to another circuit(s).
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular
attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems
are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information.
Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the
appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0743-TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0743-TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The TCC Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the Torque Converter
Clutch should be activated. The Torque Converter Clutch is a variable slip torque clutch that allows control of the
slip from 5.5% to 95.5% of lock-up. The Clutch is controlled by the TCC Solenoid which is pulse width modulated
(PWM) to provide the desired amount of slip. The clutch requires both an electrical PWM of 1000Hz and an hydrau-
lic PWM of 100Hz.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, with the transmission in gear, the TCC Solenoid is inactive,
or when the TCC Solenoid is active and controlled above 25% duty cycle, with the Solenoid Supply voltage
active.
Set Condition:
If the TCM detects on the TCC Solenoid control circuit a open, short to ground, short to voltage, internal short
in the TCC Solenoid or open in the TCC Solenoid.

Possible Causes

(T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

ProCarManuals.com

(T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
TCC SOLENOID
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores
the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally
set. This information is located in scan tool under Environmental
Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data
to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally
set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0743 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0743-TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit from
the TCM C2 harness connector to the Transmission Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T75) TCC Solenoid
Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short
to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0743-TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control cir-
cuit and all other circuits in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control
Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T75) TCC Sole-
noid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission
Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short
to another circuit.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. CHECK THE TCC SOLENOID RESISTANCE

ProCarManuals.com

Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the TCC Solenoid between the (T75) TCC
Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Supply circuit in the
TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.0 and 4.0 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0748-MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0748-MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve’s purpose is to control the modulating pressure depending on the
continuously changing operating conditions, such as load and gear change.
The Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve is always active. The solenoid uses pulse width modulation (PWM)
to control the transmissions hydraulic fluid pressure that is determined by the Transmission Control Module (TCM).
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, the Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve is either off,
or active with 25-75% duty cycle, with no Solenoid Supply Voltage DTCs present.
Set Condition:
When the Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve is turned on and the Solenoid driver detects an error
(the measured current is too different then the target current) or when the solenoid is off and a short to ground
is detected.

Possible Causes

(T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
ProCarManuals.com

(T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

MODULATING PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing
any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicat-
ing the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0748 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0748-MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid
Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Trans-
mission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com
P0748-MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T76) Modulation
Pressure Solenoid Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com

4. CHECK THE (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
ANOTHER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (T76) Modulation Pressure Sole-
noid Control circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electro-
hydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control cir-
cuit for a short to another circuit.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
P0748-MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE MODULATING PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (T76) Modulation Pressure Sole-
noid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit in
the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/

SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure.

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0752-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID
ProCarManuals.com
P0752-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The 1-2/4-5 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission
must shift into or out of second or fifth gear. The solenoid is only activated during the actual shift of the transmis-
sion. When the solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission
to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off.

When Monitored:
When both the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active.
Set Condition:
When 1-2/4-5 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid or circuit:
open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM.

Possible Causes

(T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

1-2/4-5 SOLENOID
TRANSMISSSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0752 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0752-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit
between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Elec-
trohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for an
open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Sole-
noid Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0752-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control

circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T76) 1-2/4-5

Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Trans-
mission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector?
Yes >> Repair the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for
another circuit.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. CHECK THE 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID

ProCarManuals.com

Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid between the (T76) 1-2/
4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply cir-
cuit in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0753-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0753-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The 1-2/4-5 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission
must shift into or out of second or fifth gear. The solenoid is only activated during the actual shift of the transmis-
sion. When the solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission
to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off.

When Monitored:
When both the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active.
Set Condition:When 1-2/4-5 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 1-2/4-5
Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM.

Possible Causes

(T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
1-2/4-5 SOLENOID
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSSION CONTROL MODULE

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0753 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0753-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for an
open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Sole-
noid Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0753-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T76) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T76) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control

circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T76) 1-2/4-5

5. CHECK THE 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID

ProCarManuals.com

Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid between the (T76) 1-2/
4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply cir-
cuit in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID
ProCarManuals.com
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The 2-3 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must
shift into or out of 3rd gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When the solenoid
is activated hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift.
Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off.

When Monitored:
When both the 2-3 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active.
Set Condition:
When 2-3 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 2-3 Solenoid or circuit: open,
short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM.

Possible Causes

(T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

2-3 SOLENOID
TRANSMISSSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0757 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit
between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Elec-
trohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid
Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit
and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control
Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T74) 2-3 Sole-
noid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission
Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for another
circuit.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. CHECK THE 2-3 SOLENOID

ProCarManuals.com

Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the 2-3 Solenoid between the (T74) 2-3
Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit
in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The 2-3 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must
shift into or out of 3rd gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When the solenoid
is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift.
Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off.

Possible Causes

(T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0758 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid
Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0758-2-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit
and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control
Unit Assembly harness connector.

5. CHECK THE 2-3 SOLENOID

ProCarManuals.com

Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the 2-3 Solenoid between the (T74) 2-3
Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit
in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0762-3-4 SOLENOID
ProCarManuals.com
P0762-3-4 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The 3-4 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must
shift into or out of 4th gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When the solenoid
is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift.
Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off.

When Monitored:
When both the 3-4 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active.
Set Condition:
When 3-4 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 3-4 Solenoid or circuit: open,
short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM.

Possible Causes

(T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

3-4 SOLENOID
TRANSMISSSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0762 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0762-3-4 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit
between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Elec-
trohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid
Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0762-3-4 SOLENOID (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit
and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control
Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T73) 3-4 Sole-
noid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission
Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for another
circuit.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. CHECK THE 3-4 SOLENOID

ProCarManuals.com

Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the 3-4 Solenoid between the (T73) 3-4
Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit
in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0763-3-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0763-3-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The 3-4 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must
shift into or out of 4th gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When the solenoid
is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift.
Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off.

Possible Causes

(T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0763 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0763-3-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid
Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0763-3-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit
and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control
Unit Assembly harness connector.

5. CHECK THE 3-4 SOLENOID

ProCarManuals.com

Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the 3-4 Solenoid between the (T73) 3-4
Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit
in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0778-SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0778-SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Shift Pressure Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that a transmis-
sion gear shift is required. The Shift Pressure Solenoid is pulse width modulated (PWM) controlled to allow the
proper amount of hydraulic pressure to the shift elements. The Shift Pressure Solenoid is only activated during the
shift of the transmission. When the Shift Pressure Solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper
shift elements through one of the shift solenoids in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is
completed the solenoid is turned off.

When Monitored:
When the Shift Pressure Solenoid is: off, or active with 25-75% duty cycle, and the Solenoid Supply voltage is
active.
Set Condition:
When Shift Pressure Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the Shift Pressure
Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM.

Possible Causes

(T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

ProCarManuals.com

(T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT

Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC P0778 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0778-SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control
circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission
Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for
an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (T77) Shift Pressure
Solenoid Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0778-SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid

Control circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohy-
draulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T77) Shift Pres-
sure Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the
Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness
connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for
another circuit.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. CHECK THE SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID

Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly

ProCarManuals.com

harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the Shift Pressure Solenoid between the
(T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid
Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector.

Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 ohms?

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/ WATCHDOG
ProCarManuals.com
P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/ WATCHDOG (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. During
the power up of the controller, the TCM tests the ability of the TCM to shut down the Solenoid Supply Voltage
circuit. The controller monitors the A/D feedback on the Solenoid Supply driver output to ensure that battery voltage
is no longer present. Note: A short to voltage on the Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit or any one of the solenoids
may set this DTC.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the TCM detects voltage on the Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit when the TCM request the circuit to be off.

Possible Causes
(T78) SOLENOID SUPPY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK THE (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors.
Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly
harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage
circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T78) Solenoid

Supply Voltage circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmis-
sion Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connec-
tor?
Yes >> Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for short
to another circuit.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/ WATCHDOG (CONTINUED)
2. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

Diagnostic Test
ProCarManuals.com

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

Diagnostic Test
ProCarManuals.com

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

Diagnostic Test
ProCarManuals.com

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

Diagnostic Test
ProCarManuals.com

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the TCM watch dog circuitry external to the microprocessor detects an error.

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit.
ProCarManuals.com

Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits.
Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P1705-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 OVERSPEED
ProCarManuals.com
P1705-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 OVERSPEED (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The NAG1 transmission has two input speed sensors 1 and 2 (N2 and N3), both speed sensors are located on the
valve body. The speed sensors are hall effect speed sensors that are used by the Transmission Control Module
(TCM) to calculate the transmissions input speed. Since the input speed could not be measured directly, two of the
drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors were required because both drive elements are not active
in all gears.
The input speed sensors 1 and 2 will report the same input speed in gears 2nd, 3rd or 4th. If the 1 and 2 input
speed sensor signals are not the same in these gears, the TCM will set the DTC P2784-Input Speed Sensor 1/2
Correlation. The input speed sensor 2 is not reported in 1st and 5th gears. The input speed sensor 1 (N2) is not
reported in Reverse. The P01704-Input Speed Sensor 1 Overspeed and P01705-Input Speed Sensor 2 Overspeed
DTCs are rationality checks designed to detect a major transmission failure. If either DTC is detected, the TCM will
place the transmission in Neutral.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, transmission in gear, and Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) greater
than 0 RPM
Set Condition:
If the RPM of the Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) is greater than 7700 RPM.
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT

Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs.
Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
Start the engine.
With the scan tool, monitor the Input Speed Sensor 2 RPM.
Firmly apply the brakes and place the gear selector in Drive.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, keep hands and
feet clear of rotating wheels.
Release the brakes and raise the engine RPM to allow the transmis-
sion to upshift to the 2-3 and 3-4 shift schedule.

Did the Input Speed Sensor 2 display an RPM above 7700?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 3
P1705-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 OVERSPEED (CONTINUED)
2. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
This DTC is an indication of a internal transmission failure.
Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for excessive debris such as clutch friction material or metal con-
tamination.

Is there any indication of an internal transmission failure?

3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit.
ProCarManuals.com

Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits.
Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P1731-INCORRECT GEAR ENGAGED
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The TCM compares the calculated gear with the gear the transmission has actually engaged. The actual gear is
identified by verifying the signals of the two input speed sensors 1 (N2) and 2 (N3) as well as the transmission
output speed (from the ABS system). If the actual gear differs from the gear calculated by the TCM, the TCM value
is adjusted to the engaged gear and a counter is increased by 2 points. If after a shift the engaged gear and the
calculated gear still match, the counter is decreased by 1 point. A DTC is detected as soon as the counter exceeds
a threshold.

When Monitored:
The conditions for gear detection are: engine speed greater than 450 rpm, no input speed sensor failures are
active, no selector lever error active, selector lever is not in intermediate position, selector lever position is not
showing power-up value, no output speed error is active, no transfer case error is active, output speed (ABS
system) greater than 180 rpm, no wheel speed (ABS system) overspeed detected.
Set Condition:
The detected gear calculated by the TCM is not identical to the actual gear. Exception: detected gear is 1st
and actual gear is 2nd. If the problem is present for three consecutive ignition cycles, the TCM places the
transmission into Limp-in mode until the DTC is cleared by the scan tool.
ProCarManuals.com

Possible Causes

TRANSMISSION SOLENOID DTCS PRESENT

ABS DTCS PRESENT
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF TRANSMISSION SOLENOID DTCS ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs.

Are there any Transmission Solenoid DTCS present?

Yes >> Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOS-
TICS category and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P1731-INCORRECT GEAR ENGAGED (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, check for ABS DTCs.

Are there any ABS DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to 5 - BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
category and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 3

3. CHECK FOR INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM

ProCarManuals.com

This DTC is usually set due to an internal transmission problem such as but not limited to: stuck solenoid valve
and/or contamination in the valve body, broken springs, leaking clutch seals, dislodged or broken snap ring.
Inspect the internal transmission, Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/
SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure(s).

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and
connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate
service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P2638-TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL PERFORMANCE
ProCarManuals.com
P2638-TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) requests torque reductions over the CAN bus during a transmission shift to
improve shift quality. The TCM verifies that the PCM / ECM has performed the requested torque reduction by mon-
itoring the response to the request. If the response is not within a specified tolerance, the TCM increments a
counter, and if this counter reaches a threshold, the DTC sets.

When Monitored:
Engine intervention active for at least 20 ms, no engine torque errors, engine torque demand is greater than 0.
Set Condition:
Torque Reduction acknowledge bit - not set, no shift aborts, the error flag Torque Reduction Acknowledge is
not set, Powertrain controller not supporting torque requests.

Possible Causes

CAN BUS CIRCUIT DTC PRESENT

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
POWERTRAIN / ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR ENGINE DTC PRESENT

With the scan tool, check engine DTCs.

Are there any engine DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
and diagnose the appropriate symptom.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P2638-TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS
With the scan tool, check for any CAN bus DTCs or a sign of a CAN
bus failure.

Are there any CAN bus DTCs present in any module other than
the TCM or an overall indication of a CAN bus communication
problem?
Yes >> This is an indication of a CAN bus communication prob-
lem. Depending on the DTC, either refer to the module
reporting the DTC and perform diagnostics for the appro-
priate symptom or refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL - ELEC-
TRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS and perform the appropriate symptom.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. CHECK IF DTC RESETS

ProCarManuals.com

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate
service procedure.
With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Trans-
mission DTCs.
Note: If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores
the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally
set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before
erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in
duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle
while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Did the DTC P2638-TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK SIG-

NAL PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and
connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate
service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL
ProCarManuals.com
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) is one of two hall effect speed sensors that are used by the Transmission Control
Module (TCM) to calculate the transmissions turbine speed. Since the turbine speed could not be measured directly,
two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors are required because both elements are not
active in all gears.

Possible Causes

(T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN

(T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(T71) SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com

(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT
(T71) SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3)
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT

Did the DTC P2767 reset?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 10
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit for an
open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

3. CHECK THE (T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal
circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit
for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit from the
TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit
Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. CHECK THE (T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER
CIRCUIT(S)
Measure the resistance of the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal
circuit to all the other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit
Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T71) Input Speed
Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Elec-
trohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?
Yes >> Repair the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit
for a short to another circuit(s).
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T71) Input Speed
Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms between the (T13) Sensor

Ground circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohydraulic
Control Unit Assembly harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to
another circuit(s)
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
8. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T13) Sensor Ground
circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL (CONTINUED)
9. CHECK THE INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL
Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness con-
nector.
Using a Lab Scope, backprobe the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3)
Signal circuit at the TCM C2 harness connector.
WARNING: Properly support the vehicle.
Raise all drive wheels off the ground.
Start the engine.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, keep hands and
feet clear of rotating wheels.
Place gear selector in drive and increase vehicle speed to engage 2nd
gear.
Compare the scope pattern on the Lab Scope
with a typical 5-volt square wave pattern.

Is the scope pattern comparable to the typ-

ical 5-volt square wave signal scope pat-
tern?
Yes >> Using the schematics as a guide,
check the Transmission Control Mod-
ProCarManuals.com

ule (TCM) pins, terminals, and con-

nectors for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Pay particular
attention to all power and ground cir-
cuits. If no problems are found,
replace the TCM per the Service
Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MOD-
ULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE for the appropriate service
procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION
VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Replace the Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3). Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P2783-TORQUE CONVERTER TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors the friction loss of the torque converter clutch while it is in slip-
ping mode. The TCM calculates friction loss using CAN communication signals such as, engine speed and engine
torque, as well as the torque converter turbine speed computed by the TCM. Depending on the friction loss calcu-
lated in each program cycle, a corresponding value is added to a factor as long as the torque converter clutch is in
slipping mode. The factor is set to 0 when the clutch is opened. If the factor reaches a specified value a DTC is set.
When Monitored:
When the solenoid supply voltage is active. With no reporting Input Speed Sensor 1 or 2 (N2 - N3), CAN Bus,
PCM, CAN Engine, and/or CAN Engine Speed DTCs present. Torque Converter Clutch in slip mode.
Set Condition:
When the friction loss factor reaches threshold.

Possible Causes
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION OR TORQUE CONVER CLUTCH PROBLEM
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM

This DTC is an informational DTC.
Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply.
This is usually a sign of Torque Converter Clutch failure or an internal transmission problem.
Check the Engine and Transmission Cooling Systems for proper operation.

View repair.
Repair
Repair internal Transmission, Torque Converter, and/or Transmission and Engine Cooling systems as
necessary. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/SERVICE
INFORMATION and/or 7 - COOLING for the appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P2784-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION
ProCarManuals.com
P2784-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Input Speed Sensors 1 and 2 (N2 - N3) will report the same speed in 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. If the Input
Speed Sensor 1 and 2 signals are not the same in these gears, the DTC will set.

When Monitored:
Engine speed greater than 450 RPM, no engine speed DTCs, no TCM undervoltage system operation, no
output speed sensor DTCs (CAN signal from the ABS system), all wheel speeds above 250 RPM (CAN signal
from the ABS system), no rear wheel speed DTCs (signal from the ABS system), and no wheel slip detected
(CAN signal from the ABS system), no shifting operation, Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) greater than 800 RPM
and Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) greater than 0 RPM and the TCM not in reset.
Set Condition:
If the speed difference between the Input Speed Sensors 1 and 2 (N2 - N3) is greater than 150 RPM.

Possible Causes
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR OR SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE DTCS

With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs.

Are any Input Speed Sensor and/or Sensor Supply Voltage

DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOS-
TICS category and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
P2784-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF INPUT SENSOR MISMATCH IS CURRENT
Note: If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores
the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally
set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before
erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in
duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Trans-
mission DTCs.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle
while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

Did the DTC P2784-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION

reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

3. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for debris, a plugged Transmission Oil Filter, or any sign of an inter-
nal transmission problem.

Is there any debris, plugged Transmission Oil Filter, or any sign of an internal transmission problem?
Yes >> Repair as necessary. Refer to 21- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1/
SERVICE INFORMATION for the appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and
connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate
service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE
ProCarManuals.com
U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the
Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that
allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means
critical information can be shared between controllers. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN
(-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is man-
ufactured in a twisted pair within the electrical harness.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
The TCM detects an: open, short to ground, short to voltage of the CAN C (+) or CAN C (-) circuits, short
between the CAN C (+) or CAN C (-) circuits.

Possible Causes
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FCM FOR AN OVERALL CAN COMMUNICATION BUS FAILURE

With the scan tool, check for FCM DTCs.

Does the FCM report a CAN C Bus failure, or one or more CAN
C Bus DTCs?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom. Perform the diagnostic
procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS DTC first if it is present.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT
Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE reset?

cedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM
ProCarManuals.com
U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the
Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that
allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means
critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire
bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the
CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness.

When Monitored:
U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE not present. One second after ignition on and not in Park or Neu-
tral, no System Overvoltage or System Undervoltage condition present, or the transmission in Park or Neutral
and engine RPM greater than 850 RPM.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if a CAN ID was not received in the required time from the ECM or PCM.

Possible Causes
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK THE FCM FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS

With the scan tool, check for FCM DTCs.

Does the FCM report the DTC U0001-CAN C BUS or U0100-

LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom. Perform the diagnostic
procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT
Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM

reset?
Yes >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay
particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM per the
Service Information. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service procedure.

Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE
ProCarManuals.com
U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the
Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that
allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means
critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire
bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the
CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the Electronic Gear Shift Mod-
ule.

Possible Causes
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK THE FCM FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS

With the scan tool, check for FCM DTCs.

Does the FCM report the DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0100-
LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom. Perform the diagnostic
procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT
Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

CONTROL MODULE for the appropriate service procedure.

Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
U0424-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM HVAC CONTROL MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF HVAC DTC’S ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs.

Are there any HVAC DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to Section 24 - HVAC - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOS-
TICS category and perform the appropriate symptom.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular
attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems
are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information.
Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the
appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA FROM FCM
ProCarManuals.com
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA FROM FCM (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a
certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of
bytes for each ID.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Per-
formance DTC present.
Set Condition:
When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the FCM.

Possible Causes
FCM CAN BUS DTC’S PRESENT
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR FCM CAN BUS DTCS

With the scan tool, read FCM DTCs.

Are there any FCM CAN BUS DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular
attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems
are found, replace the TCM per the Service Information.
Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE for the
appropriate service procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
U110B-LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE
ProCarManuals.com
U110B-LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the
Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that
allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means
critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire
bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the
CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the ECM/PCM.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK THE FCM FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS

With the scan tool, check for FCM DTCs.

Does the FCM report the DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0100-
LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom. Perform the diagnostic
procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
U110B-LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT
Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC U110B-LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE reset?

Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

No >> Go To 3

3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
U1118-LOST ENGINE MESSAGE
ProCarManuals.com
U1118-LOST ENGINE MESSAGE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the
Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that
allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means
critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire
bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the
CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the ECM/PCM.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK THE FCM FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS

With the scan tool, check for FCM DTCs.

Does the FCM report the DTC U0001-CAN C BUS or U0100-

LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom. Perform the diagnostic
procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
U1118-LOST ENGINE MESSAGE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT
Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC U1118-LOST ENGINE MESSAGE reset?

cedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
U1119-LOST FCM MESSAGE
ProCarManuals.com
U1119-LOST FCM MESSAGE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the
Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that
allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means
critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire
bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the
CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the FCM.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK THE FCM FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS

With the scan tool, check for FCM DTCs.

Does the FCM report the DTC U0001-CAN C BUS or U0101-

LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom. Perform the diagnostic
procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
U1119-LOST FCM MESSAGE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT
Note: When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and
stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating condi-
tions under which the DTC originally set. This information is
located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before eras-
ing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in dupli-
cating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTC’s.
Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the
conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test
drive the vehicle.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Did the DTC U1119-LOST FCM MESSAGE reset?

cedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL - ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS category and
perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 2
U140F-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE VARIANT DATA (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK IF ECM/PCM DTC’S ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, read ECM/PCM DTCs.

Are there any ECM/PCM DTC’s present?

With speeds below 40 km/h (25 MPH), make five to eight wide open throttle kickdowns to 1st gear. Allow at least
5 seconds each in 2nd and 3rd gear between each kickdown.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Were any Diagnostic Trouble Codes set?

Yes >> Repair is not complete, refer to appropriate symptom.
No >> Repair is complete.
ProCarManuals.com

SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS

NAG1 TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

page page

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - SHIFTER P2779–AUTOSTICK DOWNSHIFT SWITCH

DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING U0002–CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . 262
P0562–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . 248 U0100–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
P0563–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . 250 ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
P0607–ECU INTERNAL PERFORMANCE . . . 252 U0121–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
P0930–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW . . . . 253 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 266
P0931–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . 256 U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
P2775–AUTOSTICK UPSHIFT SWITCH FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - SHIFTER DIAGNOSTICS

ProCarManuals.com

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

P0562–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Shift Lever Assembly monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set if the monitored battery voltage drops below
6.0 volts and a temporary limp in will be activated. If the voltage rises above 9.0 volts, normal operations is
resumed.
When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When monitored battery voltage drops below 6.0 volts.

Possible Causes

VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM

(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT
(Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
SHIFT LEVER ASSSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR ENGINE CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS

With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.

Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 3
P0562–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK (F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector.
Turn the ignition on.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F902) Igni-
tion Unlock Run Start circuit in the Shift Lever Assembly harness con-
nector.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for high
resistance.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

3. CHECK (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
ProCarManuals.com

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z911)

Ground circuit in the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 7
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (Z911) Ground circuit for high resistance.

4. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

Reconnect all disconnected harness connectors.
With the scan tool, erase Shift Lever DTC’s.
Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM.
With the scan tool, read Shift Lever DTC’s.

Did the P0562–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW DTC reset?

Yes >> Replace the Shift Lever Assembly per the Service Information
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0563–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Shift Lever Assembly monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set, if the monitored battery voltage rises above
16.0 volts.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the monitored battery voltage rises above 16.0 volts.

Possible Causes

CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS

VEHICLE WAS JUMP STARTED INCORRECTLY
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS

With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.
Note: This includes any one trip faults.

Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
and perform the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 3

2. VEHICLE WAS JUMP STARTED INCORRECTLY

Verify if the vehicle was jump started by another vehicle using a 24-volt charging system or incorrectly jump started
with the 12 volt battery in series.

Was the vehicle jump started by another vehicle?

Yes >> This is the cause of the DTC. Erase the DTC and return the vehicle to the customer.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
P0563–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (CONTINUED)
3. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
Reconnect all disconnected harness connectors.
With the scan tool, erase Shift Lever DTC’s.
Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM.
With the scan tool, read Shift Lever DTC’s.

Did the P0562–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH DTC reset?

Yes >> Replace the Shift Lever Assembly per the Service Information
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0607–ECU INTERNAL PERFORMANCE
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The Shifter Lever Assembly performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates
that there is an issue with the Shifters internal processor.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the Shift Lever Assembly controller detects an error with the optical sensors or internal checksum value is
not correct.

Possible Causes
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test
ProCarManuals.com

1. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

View repair
Repair
Using the schematics as a guide, check the Shifter Lever
Assemby Control Module terminals for corrosion, damage,
or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power
and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the
Shift Lever Assembly per the Service Information. Refer to
the 21 — AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 — Shift
Mechanism for the appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0930–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
ProCarManuals.com
P0930–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The brake switch signal must be active before the shift lever can be moved out of the park position. The Shifter
lever assembly receives two brake switch signals. The first signal is a CAN C Bus message sent to the shift lever
assembly. The second signal is a hardwired brake switch signal to the shift lever assembly. The CAN C Bus mes-
sage is the primary brake switch signal and the hardwired signal serves as the backup brake switch signal.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if the high side driver detects a short to ground for 10 seconds.

Possible Causes

ENGINE BRAKE DTC’S PRESENT

ABS DTC’S PRESENT
(B29) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL SHORT TO GROUND
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. ENGINE DTC’S PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.

Are there any Engine brake DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to 9 — ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and
perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0930–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
2. ABS MODULE DTC’S PRESENT
With the scan tool, read ABS Module DTCs.

Are there any ABS DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to Section 5 - BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAG-
NOSTICS and perform the appropriate diagnostic proce-
dure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. (B29) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL SHORT TO GROUND

ProCarManuals.com

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (B29) Brake Switch
Signal circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (B29) Brake Switch Signal for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 4

4. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention
to all power and ground circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Shift Lever Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0931–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
ProCarManuals.com
P0931–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The brake switch signal must be active before the shift lever can be moved out of the park position. The Shifter
lever assembly receives two brake switch signals. The first signal is a CAN C Bus message sent to the shift lever
assembly. The second signal is a hardwired brake switch signal to the shift lever assembly. The CAN C Bus mes-
sage is the primary brake switch signal and the hardwired signal serves as the backup brake switch signal. These
two brake switch signals are compared against each other to verify proper brake switch operation.
When Monitored:
Continously with the ignition key on.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if the high side driver detects an open load for 10 seconds.

Possible Causes

ENGINE BRAKE DTC’S PRESENT

ABS DTC’S PRESENT
(B29) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL OPEN
ProCarManuals.com

(B29) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL SHORT TO VOLTAGE

SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)

Diagnostic Test

1. ENGINE DTC’S PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.

Are there any Engine brake DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to 9 — ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and
perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0931–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. ABS MODULE DTC’S PRESENT
With the scan tool, read ABS Module DTCs.

Are there any ABS DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to Section 5 - BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAG-
NOSTICS and perform the appropriate diagnostic proce-
dure.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. (B29) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL OPEN

ProCarManuals.com

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the Shift Lever Assmbly harness connector.
Disconnect the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (B29) Brake Switch Signal circuit
between the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector and the Stop
Lamp Switch.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (B29) Brake Switch Signal for an open.
No >> Go To 4
P0931–BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. (B29) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Shift Lever Assmbly harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Turn the ignition on..
Measure the voltage of the (B29) Brake Switch Signal circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (B29) Brake Switch Signal for a short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 5

5. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

ProCarManuals.com

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention
to all power and ground circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Shift Lever Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P2775–AUTOSTICK UPSHIFT SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The AutoStick Switch is integrated into the Shift Lever Assembly. The gear requested by the AutoStick selection in
then sent over the CAN C bus to the TCM to engage the requested gear.

When Monitored:
When in AutoStick mode.
Set Condition:
When the expected switch state is not correctly sensed by the Shift Lever Assembly. If the upshift switch signal
is detected as active in gear position other than drive or both upshift and downshift signals are active at the
same time.

Possible Causes
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
ProCarManuals.com

1. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Using the schematics as a guide, check the Shifter Lever
Assembly Control Module terminals for corrosion, damage,
or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power
and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the
Shift Lever Assembly per the Service Information. Refer to
Shift Mechanism for the appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P2779–AUTOSTICK DOWNSHIFT SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W
Theory of Operation
The AutoStick Switch is integrated into the Shift Lever Assembly. The gear requested by the AutoStick selection in
then sent over the CAN C bus to the TCM to engage the requested gear.

1. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Using the schematics as a guide, check the Shifter Lever
Assembly Control Module terminals for corrosion, damage,
or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power
and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the
Shift Lever Assembly per the Service Information. Refer to
Shift Mechanism for the appropriate service procedures.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
U0002–CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE
ProCarManuals.com
U0002–CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W

Theory of Operation
Some controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The Shifter controller continuously mon-
itors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate transmis-
sion MIL status to the Engine Controller.
Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic pro-
cedures and for further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
U0100–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM
ProCarManuals.com
U0100–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W

Theory of Operation
Some controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The Shifter controller continuously mon-
itors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate transmis-
sion MIL status to the Engine Controller.
Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic pro-
cedures and for further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
U0121–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE
ProCarManuals.com
U0121–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W

Theory of Operation
Some controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The ABS controller continuously monitors
the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate transmission MIL
status to the Engine Controller.
Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic pro-
cedures and for further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com
U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - NAG1 - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W

Theory of Operation
Some controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The FCM controller continuously monitors
the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate transmission MIL
status to the Engine Controller.
Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic pro-
cedures and for further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
page page

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 42RLE - P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 377

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 384
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH
PRE-DIAGNOSTIC CHECK OUT . . . . . . . . . 271 RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
P0122-TPS/APP CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . 272 P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST . . 399
P0123-TPS/APP CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . 275 P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH
P0124-TPS/APP INTERMITTENT . . . . . . . . . 278 RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
P0218-HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATION P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST . 416
ACTIVATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . 283 RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
P0602-CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING P0884-POWER UP AT SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . 433
ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED . . . . . . . . . . . 289 P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY
P0604-INTERNAL CONTROL ALWAYS OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
MODULE RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 P0890-SWITCHED BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
ProCarManuals.com

P0605-INTERNAL CONTROL P0891-TRANSMISSION RELAY

MODULE ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 ALWAYS ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
P0613-INTERNAL TRANSMISSION P0897-TRANSMISSION FLUID
PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 DETERIORATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR P0944-LOSS OF HYDRAULIC
RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 PUMP PRIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
P0711-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE P0992-2/4/OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
SENSOR PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE P1684-BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED . . . 458
SENSOR LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
P0713-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
SENSOR HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE LATCHED IN LR POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
SENSOR INTERMITTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 P1790-FAULT IMMEDIATELY AFTER SHIFT . 478
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT . 326 P1794-SPEED SENSOR GROUND ERROR . 479
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT . 333 P1797-MANUAL SHIFT OVERHEAT . . . . . . . 484
P0725-ENGINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT . 340 U0002 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . 485
P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST . . . . . . 343 U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND . . . . . . 346 ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD . . . . . . 350 U0121 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS . 489
P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH . . . . . . 354 U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FCM . 491
P0736-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN REVERSE . 358 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION
P0740-TCC OUT OF RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 TEST - VER 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 363 SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS ......... . . 494
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 370

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 42RLE - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
PRE-DIAGNOSTIC CHECK OUT
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
Diagnostic Test

1. PRE-DIAGNOSTIC CHECK OUT

Note: Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. If the fluid level is low locate and
repair the leak then check and adjust the fluid level per the Service Information.
Note: Always perform diagnostics with a fully charged battery to avoid false symptoms.
With the scan tool, read Engine DTC’s. Check and repair all Engine DTC’s prior to performing any transmission
symptom diagnostics.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s. Record all DTC’s and 1 Trip Failures.
Note: Diagnose 1 Trip Failures as a fully matured DTC.
Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Repair as necessary.
Perform the Shift Lever Position Test. If the test does not pass, refer to Symptom test for P0706 Check Shifter
Signal.
For Gear Ratio DTC’s, check and record all CVI’s.
Most DTC’s set on start up but some must be set by driving the vehicle such that all diagnostic monitors have run.
Note: Verify flash level of Powertrain Control Module. Some problems are corrected by software upgrades to
ProCarManuals.com

the Transmission and Engine software.

Note: Check for applicable TSB’s related to the problem.

Were any repairs made that fixed the customer’s complaint?

Yes >> Testing complete.
No >> Refer to the diagnostic test procedure related to the DTC.
P0122-TPS/APP CIRCUIT LOW
For the Transmission circuit diagram(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and engine running.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the monitored TPS voltage drops below .078 volts for the period of 0.48 seconds.

Possible Causes
RELATED TPS ENGINE DTC’S PRESENT
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The transmission controller receives the throttle position signal and its ground from the Throttle Position Sensor
(TPS). The TPS has a 5 volt pull up supplied by the engine controller. The throttle signal is checked for out of range
as well as intermittent operation (excessive signal changes). The engine controller transmits the throttle value via
ProCarManuals.com

the Bus. Most engine controllers can synthesize the throttle value if the throttle position sensor signal is lost. If a
throttle error is detected by the transmission controller and the throttle value is available via the Bus, the Bus throttle
value will be used and normal operation will continue, however a throttle fault code will be set. If a throttle error is
detected and the throttle value is not available via the Bus, normal operation will be discontinued, a throttle fault
code will be set, and the MIL will be turned on after 5 min. of substituted operation.

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED ENGINE TPS DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check Engine DTC’s, this includes all one trip fail-
ures.

Are there any Engine TPS DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to the Driveability category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0122-TPS/APP CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, record the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help iden-
tify the conditions in which the DTC was set.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs.
Note: To erase EATX EVENT DATA information, a BATTERY DIS-
CONNECT must be performed. Performing a BATTERY DISCON-
NECT will reset all learned Transmission values to controller
defaults which may lead to erratic shift schedules.
Drive the vehicle and try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC
was reported by the EATX DTC EVENT DATA.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Did the DTC P0122 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR LOW, reset?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

3. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

ProCarManuals.com

Note: Due to the integration of the Powertrain and Transmission

Control Modules, bus communication between the modules is
internal.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.
Verify the flash level of the controller and update the controller if avail-
able.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool PERFORM QUICK
LEARN, then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control
Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0122-TPS/APP CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
Pay particular attention to the TPS signal and sensor ground circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX EVENT DATA to help identify the
conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0123-TPS/APP CIRCUIT HIGH
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and engine running.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the monitored TPS voltage rises above 4.94 volts for the period of 0.48 seconds.

Theory of Operation
The powertrain controller receives the throttle position signal and its ground from the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS).
The TPS has a 5 volt pull up. The throttle signal is checked for out of range as well as intermittent operation (exces-
sive signal changes). The engine controller transmits the throttle value via the Bus. Most engine controllers can
ProCarManuals.com

synthesize the throttle value if the throttle position sensor signal is lost. If a throttle error is detected by the trans-
mission control system and the throttle value is available via the Bus. The Bus throttle value will be used and nor-
mal operation will continue, however a throttle fault code will be set. If a throttle error is detected and the throttle
value is not available via the Bus, normal operation will be discontinued, a throttle fault code will be set, and the MIL
will be turned on after 5 min. of substituted operation.

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED ENGINE TPS DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check Engine DTC’s, this includes all one trip fail-
ures.

Are there any Engine TPS DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the Driveability category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0123-TPS/APP CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, record the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help iden-
tify the conditions in which the DTC was set.
With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs.
Note: To erase EATX EVENT DATA information, a BATTERY DIS-
CONNECT must be performed. Performing a BATTERY DISCON-
NECT will reset all learned Transmission values to controller
defaults which may lead to erratic shift schedules.
Drive the vehicle and try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC
was reported by the EATX DTC EVENT DATA.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Did the DTC P0123 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR HIGH, reset?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

3. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

ProCarManuals.com

Note: Due to the integration of the Powertrain and Transmission

Control Modules, communication between the modules is inter-
nal.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool PERFORM QUICK
LEARN, then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control
Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0123-TPS/APP CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
Pay particular attention to the TPS signal and sensor ground circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0124-TPS/APP INTERMITTENT
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and engine running.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the monitored TPS throttle angle between the angles of 6° and 120° and the degree
change is greater than 5° within a period of less than 7.0 ms.

Possible Causes

RELATED TPS ENGINE DTC’S PRESENT

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

The powertrain controller receives the throttle position signal and its ground from the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS).
The TPS has a 5 volt pull up. The throttle signal is checked for out of range as well as intermittent operation (exces-
sive signal changes). The engine controller transmits the throttle value via the Bus. Most engine controllers can
synthesize the throttle value if the throttle position sensor signal is lost. If a throttle error is detected by the trans-
mission control system and the throttle value is available via the Bus. The Bus throttle value will be used and nor-
mal operation will continue, however a throttle fault code will be set. If a throttle error is detected and the throttle
value is not available via the Bus, normal operation will be discontinued, a throttle fault code will be set, and the MIL
will be turned on after 5 min. of substituted operation.

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED ENGINE TPS DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check Engine DTC’s, this includes all one trip fail-
ures.

Are there any Engine TPS DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the Driveability category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0124-TPS/APP INTERMITTENT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, record the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help iden-
tify the conditions in which the DTC was set.
With the scan tool , erase Transmission DTCs.
Note: To erase EATX EVENT DATA information, a BATTERY DIS-
CONNECT must be performed. Performing a BATTERY DISCON-
NECT will reset all learned Transmission values to controller
defaults which may lead to erratic shift schedules.
Drive the vehicle and try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC
was reported by the EATX EVENT DATA.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Did the DTC P0124 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INTERMIT-

TENT, reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR OPERATION

ProCarManuals.com

Ignition On, Engine Not Running.

With the scan tool, under Transmission Sensors, monitor the TPS volt-
age in the following step.
Slowly open and close the throttle while checking for erratic voltage
changes.

Did the TPS voltage change smooth and consistent?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Replace the Throttle Position Sensor per the Service Infor-
mation.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0124-TPS/APP INTERMITTENT (CONTINUED)
4. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Note: Due to the integration of the Powertrain and Transmission
Control Modules, communication between the modules is inter-
nal.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.
Check for any Service Bulletins for any possible causes that may
apply.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
Pay particular attention to the TPS signal and sensor ground circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0218-HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATION ACTIVATED
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Whenever the engine is running.
Set Condition:
Immediately when a Overheat shift schedule is activated when the Transmission Oil Temperature reaches 155°
C or 240° F.

Possible Causes

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER PLUGGED
HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATIONS ACTIVATED
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

If the transmission oil temperature rises above 115 C (240 F), the overheat shift schedule is activated refer to Trans-
mission Operation as a function of Transmission Oil Temperature and the code is set. The DTC is an informational
code only and is being set to aid the technician in determining root cause of a customer driveability issue. The code
is also intended to alert the technician to determine if a cooling system malfunction has occurred or if an additional
transmission air to oil cooler should be added to the vehicle if the customer regularly drives in a manner that over-
heats the transmission. Extended operation above 115 C (240 F) will reduce the durability of the transmission and
should be avoided. Correcting the cooling system malfunction or installing an additional transmission oil cooler will
improve transmission durability especially for customers who operate in city/construction stop and go traffic, tow
trailers regularly, drive aggressively in low gear or drive regularly in mountainous areas.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Perform Engine Cooling System diagnostics per the Service Information.

Is the Engine Cooling System functioning properly?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Repair the cause of the engine overheating. Refer to the Service Information for the related symptoms
or repair procedures.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

2. TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER RESTRICTED

Check the Transmission Oil Cooler Flow.

Is the transmission oil cooler restricted or plugged?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair or replace the plugged Transmission Oil Cooler per the Service Information. Repair the cause of
the plugged Transmission Oil Cooler as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0218-HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATION ACTIVATED (CONTINUED)
3. HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATION
This DTC is an informational DTC designed to aid the Technician in
diagnosing shift quality complaints.
This DTC indicates that the transmission has been operating in the
Overheat shift schedule which may generate a customer complaint.
The customer driving patterns may indicate the need for an additional
transmission oil cooler.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

View repair options.

Repair
Repair the cause of transmission overheating per the Ser-
vice Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
ProCarManuals.com
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
With the engine running and the PCM has closed the Transmission Control Relay.
Set Condition:
If the battery voltage of the Transmission Control Relay Output Sense circuit(s) to the PCM is less than 10.0
volts for the period of 15 seconds. Note: P0562 generally indicates a gradually falling battery voltage or a
resistive connection(s) to the PCM. The DTC will also set if the battery voltage sensed at the PCM is less than
6.5v for 200ms or where Transmission Control Relay Output circuits is less than 7.2v for 200ms.

Possible Causes

RELATED CHARGING SYSTEM DTC’S

(Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
(INTERNAL) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT TO PCM HIGH RESISTANCE
(T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT TO TCM OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
Transmission damage may occur if there is insufficient supply voltage to properly control the solenoids. To prevent
this possibility, the battery voltage is monitored and the system is placed in logical limp-in if the battery voltage
drops below the limit.

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0602-CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module. With the scan tool
perform QUICK LEARN, then program Pinion Factor in the
Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0613-INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROCESSOR
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
After the ignition key is turned to the run position and 60 seconds thereafter.
Set Condition:
Either of the following conditions occur 3 times in less than 590 milliseconds: The watchdog line remains high
after the watchdog test or the transmission relay coil is energized and remains on after the watchdog delay
expires.

Possible Causes
PCM - INTERNAL ERROR
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The internal watchdog is a separate hardware circuit which continuously monitors the microprocessor. To make sure
the transmission is operating properly, the watchdog must receive a signal from the microprocessor within a specific
ProCarManuals.com

time window. MIL on after 10 seconds of vehicle operation and transmission will be placed in limp-in.

Diagnostic Test

1. PCM - INTERNAL ERROR

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module. With the scan tool
perform QUICK LEARN, then program Pinion Factor in the
Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY
ProCarManuals.com
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition in the run position.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set if an invalid PRNDL code which lasts for more than 100 milliseconds and within 1 second of
power-up or the PRNDL code error does not correct itself before a change in input occurs.

Possible Causes

SHIFTER OUT OF ADJUSTMENT

TRS (T1) SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
TRS (T3) SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
TRS (T41) SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
TRS (T42) SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
TRS (T1) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
TRS (T3) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
TRS (T41) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
ProCarManuals.com

TRS (T42) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

TRS (T1) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRS (T3) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRS (T41) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRS (T42) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The C1 through C4 (T1, T3, T41, and T42) sense circuits communicate the shift lever position to the PCM. Each
circuit is terminated at the transmission with a switch. Each switch can be either open or closed, depending on the
shift lever position. The PCM can decode this information and determine the shift lever position. Each shift lever
position has a certain combination of switches, which will be open and closed, this is called a PRNDL code. There
are 4 switches, therefore: there are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). However,
there are only 9 valid codes (8 for AutoStick), one for each gear position and three recognized between gear codes.
The remainder of the codes should never occur, these are called invalid codes. The following chart shows the nor-
mal switch states for each shift lever position.

TRS SWITCH STATES

SLP T42 T41 T3 T1

P CL CL CL OP
R CL OP OP OP
N CL CL OP CL
OD OP OP OP CL
3 OP OP CL OP
L CL OP CL CL
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK IF THE DTC P0706 IS CURRENT

With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs.
Cycle the ignition off, then start the vehicle.
Firmly apply the brakes and shift into Overdrive.
Note: Vehicle must remain in Overdrive for at least three seconds.
With the brakes firmly applied, shift slowly through all gears (PRNDL)
as least three times, pausing momentarily in each gear.
Note: If all the PRNDL lights box individually then the error was
cleared.
Shift into park and turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

Does the DTC P0706 reset, or do all the PRNDL indicators

remain boxed in park or neutral?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 19
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK SHIFTER OPERATION

With the scan tool, perform the Shift Lever Position Test.

Select the test outcome from the following:

Test passes
Go To 19
Test fails with error code
Go To 3
Test fails without error code
Go To 18
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, perform the Shift Lever Position Test.
When the scan tool instructs you to put the Gear Selector in a partic-
ular position, you must do so using the Transmission Simulator.
The LED for the gear position in question must be illuminated on the
Transmission Simulator, prior to pressing the ENTER key on the scan
tool.
Note: After completion of this procedure, make sure to discon-
nect the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and Electronic
Transmission adaptor cable kit, Miller tool #8333-1A and recon-
nect all connectors.

Did the Shift Lever Position Test pass?

ProCarManuals.com

Yes >> Replace the Transmission Range Sensor per the Service
Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
4. IDENTIFY FAULTY CIRCUIT
Reconnect all disconnected connectors. Turn the ignition on, engine
not running.
With the scan tool, monitor the TRS Sense circuits on the Input/Output
screen - C1 through C4.
Move the shift lever through all gear positions, pausing momentarily in
each gear position and watch for one of the circuits to not change
state.

Pick the one that did not change state.

TRS (T1)sense (C4)
Go To 5
TRS (T3)sense (C3)
Go To 8
TRS (T41)sense (C1)
Go To 11
TRS (T42)sense (C2)
Go To 14

5.
ProCarManuals.com

TRS (T1) SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Tool
#8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the TRS (T1) Sense circuit from the appro-
priate terminal of special tool #8815 to the TRS harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T1) Sense circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
6. TRS (T1) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the TRS (T1) Sense cir-
cuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T1) Sense circuit for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com

7. TRS (T1) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay from the PDC.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the TRS (T1) Sense circuit at the appropriate
terminal of special tool #8815.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T1) Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 17
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
8. TRS (T3) SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Tool
#8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the TRS (T3) Sense circuit from the appro-
priate terminal of special tool #8815 to the TRS harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T3) Sense circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

9. TRS (T3) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T3) Sense circuit for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 10
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
10. TRS (T3) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the TRS (T3) Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T3) Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 17
ProCarManuals.com

11. TRS (T41) SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C3 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Tool
#8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the TRS (T41) Sense circuit from the appro-
priate terminal of special tool #8815 to the TRS harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T41) Sense circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 12
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
12. TRS (T41) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C3 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the TRS (T41) Sense cir-
cuit

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T41) Sense circuit for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 13
ProCarManuals.com

13. TRS (T41) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C3 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the TRS (T41) Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Tool
#8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the TRS (T42) Sense circuit from the appro-
priate terminal of special tool #8815 to the TRS harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T42) Sense circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 15
ProCarManuals.com

15. TRS (T42) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T42) Sense circuit for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 16
P0706-TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
16. TRS (T42) SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the TRS (T42) Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Yes >> Repair the TRS (T42) Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 17
ProCarManuals.com

17. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Adjust the Shift Linkage and/or cable per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

19. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
Check the Shift Linkage and cable for proper operation per the Service
Information.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.
Perform *PRNDL FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURE after completion of
any repairs.
ProCarManuals.com

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0711-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
ProCarManuals.com
P0711-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and engine running.
Set Condition:
is DTC will set when the desired transmission temperature does not reach a normal operating temperature
within a given time frame. Time is variable due to ambient temperature. Approximate DTC set time is 10 to 35
minutes. The following are starting temperature to warm up times to set this DTC: starting temp -40° C (-40°
F) warm up time 35 minuets, starting temp -28° C ( -20° F) 25 min, starting temp -6.6° C (20° F) 20 minuets,
starting temp 15.5 ° C (60° F) 10 minuets. When the fault is set, calculated temperature is substituted for
measured temperature, however the fault code is stored only after three consecutive occurrences of the fault.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE DTC’S PRESENT

TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

Theory of Operation
The temperature sensor is used to sense the temperature of the transmission fluid. Transmission fluid temperature
can affect shift quality, torque converter operation and when or if some diagnostics are run. A failed temperature
sensor could affect the OBD diagnostics. If a problem occurs in the transmission temperature sensor circuit, trans-
mission temperature will be based on a calculated value.

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINE IF RELATED TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check Transmission DTC’s.

Are there any other Transmission Temperature Sensor related

DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0711-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0711.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 6
ProCarManuals.com
P0711-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Input/Output switch to OFF.
With the scan tool, monitor the TRANS TEMP VOLTS while turning the
Thermistor Voltage switch to all three positions on the Transmission
Simulator.
Compare the scan tool readings with the numbers listed on the Trans-
mission Simulator.

Do the readings on the Transmission Simulator match the scan

tool readings ± 0.2 volts?
Yes >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 5

4. TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0711-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
5. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW
ProCarManuals.com
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and engine running.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set when the monitored Temperature Sensor voltage drops below 0.078 volts for the period of
1.45 seconds. When the fault is set, calculated temperature is substituted for measured temperature, however
the fault code is stored only after three consecutive occurrences of the fault.

Possible Causes

RELATED DTC’S PRESENT

(T54) TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINE IF RELATED DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check Transmission DTC’s.

Are there any Speed Sensor DTCs present?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0712.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Input/Output switch to OFF.
With the scan tool, monitor the TRANS TEMP VOLTS while turning the
Thermistor Voltage switch to all three positions on the Transmission
Simulator.
Compare the scan tool readings with the numbers listed on the Trans-
mission Simulator.

Do the readings on the Transmission Simulator match the scan

tool readings ± 0.2 volts?
Yes >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 5

4. TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
5. (T54) TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the TRS harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Tool
#8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T54) Transmission
Temperature Sensor Signal circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T54) Transmission Temperature Sensor Signal
circuit for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
ProCarManuals.com

6. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW (CONTINUED)
7. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0713-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH
ProCarManuals.com
P0713-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and engine running.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set when the monitored Temperature Sensor voltage rises above 4.94 volts for the period of 1.45
seconds. When the fault is set, calculated temperature is substituted for measured temperature, however the
fault code is stored only after three consecutive occurrences of the fault.

Possible Causes

(K900) SENSOR GROUND OPEN

(T54) TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(T54) TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT

With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0713.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 8
P0713-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Input/Output switch to OFF.
With the scan tool, monitor the TRANS TEMP VOLTS while turning the
Thermistor Voltage switch to all three positions on the Transmission
Simulator.
Compare the scan tool readings with the numbers listed on the Trans-
mission Simulator.

Do the readings on the Transmission Simulator match the scan

tool readings ± 0.2 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 4

3. TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace TRS Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0713-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. (T54) TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the TRS harness connector
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Tool
#8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the Transmission Temperature Sensor Sig-
nal circuit from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the
TRS harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the Transmission Temperature Sensor Signal circuit
for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the TRS harness connector
Disconnect the PCM C2 harness connector
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit from the
appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the TRS harness connec-
tor.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0713-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH (CONTINUED)
6. (T54) TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T54) Transmission Temperature Sensor
Signal circuit in the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T54) Transmission Temperature Sensor Signal
circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com

7. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0713-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH (CONTINUED)
8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT
ProCarManuals.com
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and engine running.
Set Condition:
The DTC will set when the monitored Temperature Sensor voltage fluctuates or changes abruptly within a pre-
determined period of time.

Possible Causes
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

mission temperature will be based on a calculated value.

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT

With the scan tool , check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for
P0714.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 5
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT (CONTINUED)
2. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a
Transmission, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Input/Output switch to OFF.
With the scan tool , monitor the TRANS TEMP VOLTS while turning
the Thermistor Voltage switch to all three positions on the Transmis-
sion Simulator.
Compare the scan tool readings with the numbers listed on the Trans-
mission Simulator.

Do the readings on the Transmission Simulator match a non-

fluctuating scan tool reading ± 0.2 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 4

3. TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace TRS Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT (CONTINUED)
4. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool , check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help iden-
tify the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
The transmission gear ratio is monitored continuously while the transmission is in gear.
Set Condition:
If there is an excessive change in the Input RPM in any gear. the vehicle must be in a valid gear R, 1st, 2nd,
3rd, or 4th.

Possible Causes

(T52) INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T13) SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(T52) INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T52) INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(T13) SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The transmission system uses two speed sensors, one to measure input RPM and one to measure output RPM.
These inputs are essential for proper transmission operation. Therefore, the integrity of this data is verified through
system checks.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0715 IS CURRENT

Start the engine.
Place the shifter in park.
With the scan tool , read the Input Speed Sensor RPM.

Is the Input Speed Sensor reading below 400 RPM?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 10
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, set the Input/Output Speed switch
to ON and the rotary switch to the 3000/1250 position.
With the scan tool, read the Input and Output RPM.

Does the Input speed read 3000 RPM and the Output speed
read 1250 RPM ± 50 RPM?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com

3. INPUT SPEED SENSOR

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Input Speed Sensor per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. (T52) INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Input Speed Sensor harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T52) Input Speed Sensor Signal circuit
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Input Speed
Sensor connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T52) Input Speed Sensor Signal circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Input Speed Sensor harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit from the
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Input Speed
Sensor harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
6. (T52) INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Input Speed Sensor harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T52) Input Speed
Sensor Signal circuit.

Is the resistance Below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T52) Input Speed Sensor Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com

7. (T52) INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Output Speed Sensor harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T52) Input Speed Sensor Signal circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Yes >> Repair the (T52) Input Speed Sensor Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
8. (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ and (T16)
Transmission Control Relay Output circuits in the Transmission Control
Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to volt-
age.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

9. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0715-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
With the scan tool , check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help iden-
tify the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
The transmission gear ratio is monitored continuously while the transmission is in gear.
Set Condition:
If there is an excessive change in the Output RPM in any gear.

Possible Causes

(T14) OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(T14) OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T14) OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0720 IS CURRENT

Start the engine in park.
Raise the drive wheels off of the ground.
WARNING: Properly support the vehicle.
Firmly apply the brakes and place the transmission selector in drive.
WARNING: Be sure to keep hands and feet clear of rotating
wheels.
Release the brakes and allow the drive wheels to spin freely.
Note: The drive wheels must be turning at this point.
With the scan tool, read the Output RPM

Is the Output RPM below 100?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 10
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, set the Input/Output Speed switch
to ON and the rotary switch to the 3000/1250 position.
With the scan tool , read the Input and Output RPM.

Does the Input RPM read 3000 and the Output RPM read 1250
(within 50 RPM)?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com

3. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Output Speed Sensor per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. (T14) OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Output Speed Sensor harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T14) Output Speed Sensor Signal cir-
cuit from appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Output
Speed Sensor harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T14) Output Speed Sensor Signal circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Output Speed Sensor harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the Sensor Ground circuit from the appro-
priate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Output Speed Sensor har-
ness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
6. (T14) OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Output Speed Sensor harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T14) Output Speed
Sensor Signal circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T14) Output Speed Sensor Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com

7. (T14) OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Yes >> Repair the (T14) Output Speed Sensor Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
8. (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ and (T16)
Transmission Control Relay Output circuits in the Transmission Control
Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to volt-
age.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

9. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0720-OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
With the scan tool , check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help iden-
tify the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0725-ENGINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Whenever the engine is running.
Set Condition:
The Engine RPM is less than 390 or greater than 8000 for more than 2 seconds while the engine is running.

Possible Causes
ENGINE DTCS PRESENT
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The PCM uses a dual port RAM internal to the controller to send the engine speed signal to the Transmission
Control System. The calculated engine RPM is compared to a minimum and maximum value. If the PCM interprets
this signal to be out of range when the engine is running the code is set. The MIL illuminates after 10 seconds of
ProCarManuals.com

vehicle operation and the transmission system defaults to Limp-in mode.

Diagnostic Test

1. CONDITION P0725 PRESENT

Start the engine.
Note: This DTC is not a Transmission Input Speed Sensor DTC.
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0725.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0725 set at 0?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 4
P0725-ENGINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. ENGINE DTCS PRESENT
With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.

Are there any Engine DTC’s present?

Yes >> Refer to Section 9 – Engine Electrical Diagnostics and
perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

ProCarManuals.com

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.

Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program the Pinion Factor in the Front Control Mod-
ule.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0725-ENGINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
The Transmission gear ratio is monitored continuously while the transmission is in gear.
Set Condition:
If the ratio of the Input RPM to the Output RPM does not match the current gear ratio when compared to the
known gear ratio.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S PRESENT

INTERMITTENT GEAR RATIO ERRORS
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

The transmission system uses two speed sensors, one to measure input RPM and one to measure output RPM.
These inputs are essential for proper transmission operation. Therefore, the integrity of this data is verified through
data checks. When in gear, if the gear ratio does not compare to a known gear ratio, the corresponding gear ratio
error trouble code is set. The transmission will go into Limp-in mode after four gear ratio error events occur in a
given driving cycle.
P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.
If any of these DTC’s are present, perform their respective tests first.

Are there any Loss of Prime, Line Pressure Sensor and/or

Speed Sensor DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to appropriate diagnostic procedure in the Transmis-
sion category. If any of these DTC’s are present, they will
cause a gear ratio error. Perform the test for Loss of Prime
first if it is present.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com
P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0731 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, perform the 1st gear clutch test. Follow the instruc-
tions on the scan tool.
Increase the throttle angle or TPS Degree to 30° for no more than a
few seconds.
CAUTION: Do not overheat the transmission.

Did the Clutch Test pass, Input Speed remain at zero?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

3. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT OPERATION

ProCarManuals.com

The conditions to set this DTC are not current at this time.
Check the gearshift linkage adjustment.
Gear ratio DTC’s can be set by problems in the Input and Output
Speed Sensor circuits. If the vehicle passes the Clutch Test and still
sets Gear Ratio DTC, check the Speed Sensors for proper operation.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Check the wiring and connectors for the Speed Sensors for a good
connection, then perform a wiggle test using the Transmission Simu-
lator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic Transmission Adapter kit
8333-1A.
This DTC can also be set under extreme temperature conditions, this
is usually caused by an internal problem. Verify if the problem is only
experienced under extreme hot or cold conditions.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.

4. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Repair internal Transmission per the Service Information. Check all of the components related to the UD
and LR clutches. Inspect the Oil Pump and repair or replace per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S PRESENT

TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
INTERMITTENT GEAR RATIO ERRORS
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.
If any of these DTC’s are present, perform their respective tests first.

Are there any Loss of Prime, Line Pressure Sensor and/or

Speed Sensor DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to appropriate diagnostic procedure in the Transmis-
sion category. If any of these DTC’s are present, they will
cause a gear ratio error. Perform the test for Loss of Prime
first if it is present.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0732 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, perform the 2nd gear clutch test. Follow the
instructions on the scan tool.
Increase the throttle angle or TPS Degree to 30° for no more than a
few seconds.
CAUTION: Do not overheat the transmission.

Did the Clutch Test pass, Input Speed remain at zero?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT OPERATION
The conditions to set this DTC are not current at this time.
Check the gearshift linkage adjustment.
Gear ratio DTC’s can be set by problems in the Input and Output
Speed Sensor circuits. If the vehicle passes the Clutch Test and still
sets Gear Ratio DTC, check the Speed Sensors for proper operation.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Check the wiring and connectors for the Speed Sensors for a good
connection, then perform a wiggle test using the Transmission Simu-
lator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic Transmission Adapter kit
8333-1A.
This DTC can also be set under extreme temperature conditions, this
is usually caused by an internal problem. Verify if the problem is only
experienced under extreme hot or cold conditions.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

ProCarManuals.com

Yes >> Repair as necessary.

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK FOR RELATED PRESSURE SWITCH DTC’S
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Are the DTC’s P0845 and/or P0846 present also?

Yes >> Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Repair internal Transmission per the Service Information. Check all of the components related to the UD
and 2/4 clutches. Inspect the Oil Pump and repair or replace per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S PRESENT

INTERMITTENT GEAR RATIO ERRORS
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.
If any of these DTC’s are present, perform their respective tests first.

Are there any Loss of Prime, Line Pressure Sensor and/or

Speed Sensor DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to appropriate diagnostic procedure in the Transmis-
sion category. If any of these DTC’s are present, they will
cause a gear ratio error. Perform the test for Loss of Prime
first if it is present.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0733 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, perform the 3rd gear clutch test. Follow the instruc-
tions on the scan tool.
Increase the throttle angle or TPS Degree to 30° for no more than a
few seconds.
CAUTION: Do not overheat the transmission.

Did the Clutch Test pass, Input Speed remain at zero?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT OPERATION
The conditions to set this DTC are not current at this time.
Check the gearshift linkage adjustment.
Gear ratio DTC’s can be set by problems in the Input and Output
Speed Sensor circuits. If the vehicle passes the Clutch Test and still
sets Gear Ratio DTC, check the Speed Sensors for proper operation.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Check the wiring and connectors for the Speed Sensors for a good
connection, then perform a wiggle test using the Transmission Simu-
lator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic Transmission Adapter kit
8333-1A.
This DTC can also be set under extreme temperature conditions, this
is usually caused by an internal problem. Verify if the problem is only
experienced under extreme hot or cold conditions.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

ProCarManuals.com

Yes >> Repair as necessary.

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK FOR RELATED PRESSURE SWITCH DTC’S
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Are the DTC’s P0870 and/or P0871 present also?

Yes >> Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Repair internal Transmission per the Service Information. Check all of the components related to the UD
and O/D clutches. Inspect the Oil Pump and repair or replace per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S PRESENT

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.
If any of these DTC’s are present, perform their respective tests first.

Are there any Loss of Prime, Line Pressure Sensor and/or

Speed Sensor DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to appropriate diagnostic procedure in the Transmis-
sion category. If any of these DTC’s are present, they will
cause a gear ratio error. Perform the test for Loss of Prime
first if it is present.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0733 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, perform the 4th gear clutch test. Follow the instruc-
tions on the scan tool.
Increase the throttle angle or TPS Degree to 30° for no more than a
few seconds.
CAUTION: Do not overheat the transmission.

Did the Clutch Test pass, Input Speed remain at zero?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT OPERATION
The conditions to set this DTC are not current at this time.
Check the gearshift linkage adjustment.
Gear ratio DTC’s can be set by problems in the Input and Output
Speed Sensor circuits. If the vehicle passes the Clutch Test and still
sets Gear Ratio DTC, check the Speed Sensors for proper operation.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Check the wiring and connectors for the Speed Sensors for a good
connection, then perform a wiggle test using the Transmission Simu-
lator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic Transmission Adapter kit
8333-1A.
This DTC can also be set under extreme temperature conditions, this
is usually caused by an internal problem. Verify if the problem is only
experienced under extreme hot or cold conditions.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

ProCarManuals.com

Yes >> Repair as necessary.

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK FOR RELATED PRESSURE SWITCH DTC’S
With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Are the DTC’s P0870 and/or P0871 present also?

Yes >> Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Repair internal Transmission per the Service Information. Check all of the components related to the
O/D and 2/4 clutches. Inspect the Oil Pump and repair or replace per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0736-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN REVERSE
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S PRESENT

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.
If any of these DTC’s are present, perform their respective tests first.

Are there any Loss of Prime, Line Pressure Sensor and/or

Speed Sensor DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to appropriate diagnostic procedure in the Transmis-
sion category. If any of these DTC’s are present, they will
cause a gear ratio error. Perform the test for Loss of Prime
first if it is present.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0736-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN REVERSE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0731 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, perform the Reverse gear clutch test. Follow the
instructions on the scan tool.
Increase the throttle angle or TPS Degree to 30° for no more than a
few seconds.
CAUTION: Do not overheat the transmission.

Did the Clutch Test pass, Input Speed remain at zero?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0736-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN REVERSE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT OPERATION
The conditions to set this DTC are not current at this time.
Check the gearshift linkage adjustment.
Gear ratio DTC’s can be set by problems in the Input and Output
Speed Sensor circuits. If the vehicle passes the Clutch Test and still
sets Gear Ratio DTC, check the Speed Sensors for proper operation.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Check the wiring and connectors for the Speed Sensors for a good
connection, then perform a wiggle test using the Transmission Simu-
lator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic Transmission Adapter kit
8333-1A.
This DTC can also be set under extreme temperature conditions, this
is usually caused by an internal problem. Verify if the problem is only
experienced under extreme hot or cold conditions.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

ProCarManuals.com

Yes >> Repair as necessary.

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.

4. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Repair internal Transmission per the Service Information. Check all of the components related to the
Reverse and LR clutches. Inspect the Oil Pump and repair or replace per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0740-TCC OUT OF RANGE
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) is in FEMCC or PEMCC, Transmission temperature is hot, Engine tem-
perature is greater than 38° C or 100° F, Transmission Input Speed greater than engine speed, Transmission
temperature is hot, TPS less than 30°, and brake not applied.
Set Condition:
The TCC is modulated by controlling the duty cycle of the L/R Solenoid until the difference between the Engine
and the Transmission Input Speed RPM or duty cycle is within a desired range. The DTC is set after the
period of 10 seconds and 3 occurrences of either: FEMCC - with slip greater than 100 RPM or PEMCC - duty
cycle greater than 85%.

Possible Causes
RELATED L/R SOLENOID OR PRESSURE SWITCH DTC’S PRESENT
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

Theory of Operation
When in 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear, the torque converter clutch (TCC) can be locked or partially locked when certain
conditions are met. The TCC piston is electronically modulated by increasing the duty cycle of the LR/TCC solenoid
until the torque converter slip difference (difference between engine and turbine speed) is within 60 RPM. Then the
LR/TCC solenoid is fully energized (FEMCC / 100% duty cycle). Torque converter slip is monitored in FEMCC to
ensure adequate clutch capacity. The transmission will attempt normal EMCC operation (not in Limp-in) even after
the MIL is illuminated. MIL will illuminate after 5 minutes of accumulated slip in FEMCC.

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED L/R SOLENOID OR PRESSURE SWITCH DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are the DTC’s P0750 and/or P0841 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0740-TCC OUT OF RANGE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0740 IS CURRENT
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s.
Drive the vehicle until it is fully warmed up. At least 110 degrees.
Perform the following step 3 times.
Drive the vehicle at 50 MPH and allow 4th gear to engage for at least
10 seconds. Close the throttle, then tip back in until the throttle angle
is between 25 and 29 degrees. Note that if you go over 30 degrees,
you must back off of the throttle and retry.

Did the TCC engage during any of the attempts?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 3

3. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Perform the Hydraulic Pressure test per the Service Information and repair the internal transmission
components and Torque convertor as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
This DTC can also be set under extreme temperature conditions, this
is usually caused by an internal problem. Verify if the problem is only
experienced under extreme hot or cold conditions.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Initially at ignition on, then every 10 seconds thereafter. The solenoids will also be tested immediately after a
gear ratio error or pressure switch error is detected.
Set Condition:
Three consecutive solenoid continuity test failures, or one failure if test is run in response to a gear ratio or
pressure switch error.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S PRESENT

(T20) LR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(T20) LR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T20) LR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
Four solenoids are used to control the friction elements (clutches). The continuity of the solenoids circuits are peri-
odically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be
detected by the PCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In
addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a gear ratio or pressure switch error occurs. In this
case, one failure will result in the appropriate DTC being set. The MIL will illuminate and the transmission goes into
neutral, if the DTC is set above 35 Km/h (22 MPH), Limp-in mode when vehicle speed is below 35 Km/h (22 MPH).

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED RELAY DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are there any Transmission Control Relay DTC’s present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0750 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0750 set at 0?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, actuate the L/R Solenoid.
Monitor the L/R Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator.

Did the L/R Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator blink

on and off during actuation?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. (T20) LR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T20) LR Solenoid Control circuit from
the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Solenoid/Pressure
Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T20) LR Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. (T20) LR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T20) LR Solenoid
Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T20) LR Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
6. (T20) LR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T20) LR Solenoid Control circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T20) LR Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
ProCarManuals.com

7. LR SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0750-LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
8. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

9. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S PRESENT

(T19) 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(T19) 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T19) 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are there any Transmission Control Relay DTC’s present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0755 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0755 set at 0?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, actuate the 2/4 Solenoid.
Monitor the 2/4 Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator.

Did the 2/4 Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator blink

on and off during actuation?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. (T19) 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T19) 2/4 Solenoid Control circuit from
the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Solenoid/Pressure
Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T19) 2/4 Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. (T19) 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T19) 2/4 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
6. (T19) 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T19) 2/4 Solenoid Control circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T19) 2/4 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
ProCarManuals.com

7. 2/4 SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0755-2/4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
8. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

9. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S PRESENT

(T60) OD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(T60) OD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T60) OD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED RELAY DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are there any Transmission Control Relay DTC’s present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0760 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0760 set at 0?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, actuate the OD Solenoid.
Monitor the OD Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator.

Did the OD Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator blink

on and off during actuation?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. (T60) OD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T60) OD Solenoid Control circuit from
the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Solenoid/Pressure
Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T60) OD Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. (T60) OD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T60) OD Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
6. (T60) OD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the voltage of the (T60) OD Solenoid Control circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T60) OD Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
voltage.
ProCarManuals.com

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -

VER 1.
No >> Go To 8

7. OD SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0760-OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
8. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

9. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT
ProCarManuals.com
P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S PRESENT

(T59) UD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(T59) UD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T59) UD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
ProCarManuals.com

SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED RELAY DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are there any Transmission Control Relay DTC’s present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK TO SEE IF P0765 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0765 set at 0?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool, actuate the UD Solenoid.
Monitor the UD Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator.

Did the UD Solenoid LED on the Transmission Simulator blink

on and off during actuation?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
4. (T59) UD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T59) UD Solenoid Control circuit from
the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Solenoid/Pressure
Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T59) UD Solenoid Control circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. (T59) UD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T59) UD Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
6. (T59) UD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T59) UD Solenoid Control circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T59) UD Solenoid Control circuit for a short to
voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
ProCarManuals.com

7. UD SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0765-UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT (CONTINUED)
8. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

9. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY
ProCarManuals.com
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Whenever the engine is running.
Set Condition:
The DTC is set if one of the pressure switches are open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. If the
problem is identified for 3 successive key starts, the transmission will go into Limp-in mode a MIL will turn on
after 10 seconds of vehicle operation.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S PRESENT

LOSS OF PRIME DTC PRESENT
(T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The Transmission system uses three pressure switches to monitor the fluid pressure in the LR, 2/4, and OD ele-
ments. The pressure switches are continuously monitored for the correct states in each gear. If a set condition is
identified, 1st gear and torque converter lock-up (EMCC) will be inhibited. The vehicle will launch in 2nd gear and
shift normally through the gears without allowing EMCC. If during the same key start, the set condition is no longer
valid, the transmission will return to normal operation (1st and EMCC available). Limp-in will not occur unless DTC
P0841 is accompanied by a code P0706 and the MIL will illuminate after 5 minutes of substituted operation.

PRESSURE SWITCH STATES

GEAR L/R 2/4 OD

R OP OP OP
P/N CL OP OP
1st CL OP OP
2nd OP CL OP
D OP OP CL
OD OP CL CL
OP = OPEN
CL = CLOSED
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are there any Transmission Control Relay DTC’s present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK FOR LOSS OF PRIME DTC

With the scan tool, check for other Transmission DTC’s.

Is the DTC P0944 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK TO SEE IF P0841 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0841.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 10
ProCarManuals.com
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
4. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Pressure Switch selector to
L/R.
With the scan tool , monitor the L/R Pressure Switch state while press-
ing the Pressure Switch Test button on the Transmission Simulator.

Did the L/R Pressure Switch state change?

Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
5. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Transmission
Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 6

6. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
7. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (A104)Fused B+ circuit and (T16)
Transmission Control Relay Output circuit.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

8. L/R PRESSURE SWITCH

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0841-LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
9. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST
ProCarManuals.com
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
In any forward gear with engine speed above 1000 RPM, shortly after a shift and every minute thereafter.
Set Condition:
After a shift into a forward gear, with engine speed greater than 1000 RPM, the PCM momentarily turns on
element pressure to the clutch circuits that don’t have pressure to identify the correct pressure switch closes.
If the pressure switch does not close 2 times the DTC sets

Possible Causes

LOSS OF PRIME P0944 PRESENT

(T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
Background: Pressure switches are normally off or open (no pressure applied) and read high (+12 volts). When an
element is applied the corresponding pressure switch closes to ground (0 volts) or turns on. The controller tests the
OD and 24 pressure switches when they are off (ie. when the corresponding friction element is not applied) by
briefly applying the OD and 24 elements which will cause the corresponding pressure switch to close. The test
verifies that the switches are operational and that the switch will close when the corresponding element is applied.
If a switch fails to respond, it is re-tested. The MIL illuminates and the transmission system defaults to Limp-in
mode.

PRESSURE SWITCH STATES

GEAR L/R 2/4 OD

R OP OP OP
P/N CL OP OP
1st CL OP OP
2nd OP CL OP
D OP OP CL
OD OP CL CL
OP = OPEN
CL = CLOSED
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. CHECKING FOR LOSS OF PRIME DTC

With the scan tool, check for other Transmission DTC’s.

Is the DTC P0944 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK FOR RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Are any of the DTCs P0732, P0734 and/or P0846 present also?
Yes >> Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0845 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0845.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 11
ProCarManuals.com
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
4. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Pressure Switch selector
switch to 2/4.
With the scan tool, monitor the UD Pressure Switch state while press-
ing the Pressure Switch Test button on the Transmission Simulator.
Wiggle the wires leading to the PCM while pressing and holding the
Pressure Switch Test button.

Did the 2/4 Pressure Switch state change to closed and remain
closed while wiggling the wires?
Yes >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 6

5. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Disassemble and inspect the Valve Body per the Service Information and repair or replace as neces-
sary. If no problems are found in the Valve Body, replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
6. (T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Transmission
Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 7

7. (T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
8. (T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (A104) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
9. TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check (T16) Transmis-
sion Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission Solenoid/Pres-
sure Switch Assembly harness connector.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the Transmission Control Relay Output circuit for
ProCarManuals.com

an open or high resistance. If the fuse is open make sure

to check for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.

10. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0845-2/4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
11. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY
ProCarManuals.com
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S PRESENT

LOSS OF PRIME DTC PRESENT
(T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The Transmission system uses three pressure switches to monitor the fluid pressure in the LR, 2/4, and OD ele-
ments. The pressure switches are continuously monitored for the correct states in each gear. The 2/4 pressure
switch monitors the fluid pressure to the 2/4 clutch to confirm proper operation of the 2/4 solenoid. If the 2/4 pres-
sure switch is identified as closed in P or N, the code will immediately be set and normal operation will be allowed
for that given key start. If the problem is identified for 3 successive ignition cycles, the transmission will go into
Limp-in mode.

PRESSURE SWITCH STATES

GEAR L/R 2/4 OD

R OP OP OP
P/N CL OP OP
1st CL OP OP
2nd OP CL OP
D OP OP CL
OD OP CL CL
OP = OPEN
CL = CLOSED
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are there any Transmission Control Relay DTC’s present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate symptom.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK FOR LOSS OF PRIME DTC

With the scan tool, check for other Transmission DTC’s.

Is the DTC P0944 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK TO SEE IF P0846 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0846.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 10
ProCarManuals.com
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
4. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Pressure Switch selector to
2/4.
With the scan tool , monitor the 2/4Pressure Switch state while press-
ing the Pressure Switch Test button on the Transmission Simulator.

Did the 2/4 Pressure Switch state change?

Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
5. (T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T47) 2/4Pressure Switch Sense circuit
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Transmission
Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T47) 2/4Pressure Switch Sense circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 6

6. (T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
7. (T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

8. 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0846-2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
9. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST
ProCarManuals.com
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

LOSS OF PRIME P0944 PRESENT

(T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
ProCarManuals.com

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

PRESSURE SWITCH STATES

GEAR L/R 2/4 OD

R OP OP OP
P/N CL OP OP
1st CL OP OP
2nd OP CL OP
D OP OP CL
OD OP CL CL
OP = OPEN
CL = CLOSED

1. CHECKING FOR LOSS OF PRIME DTC

With the scan tool, check for other Transmission DTC’s.

Is the DTC P0944 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK FOR RELATED TRANSMISSION DTC’S

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s.

Are any of the DTCs P0732, P0734 and/or P0846 present also?
Yes >> Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0870 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0870.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 11
ProCarManuals.com
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
4. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Pressure Switch selector
switch to OD.
With the scan tool, monitor the UD Pressure Switch state while press-
ing the Pressure Switch Test button on the Transmission Simulator.
Wiggle the wires leading to the PCM while pressing and holding the
Pressure Switch Test button.

Did the OD Pressure Switch state change to closed and remain

closed while wiggling the wires?
Yes >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 6

5. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Disassemble and inspect the Valve Body per the Service Information and repair or replace as neces-
sary. If no problems are found in the Valve Body, replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
6. (T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T9)OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Transmission
Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 7

7. (T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
8. (T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
9. (T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check (T16) Transmis-
sion Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission Solenoid/Pres-
sure Switch Assembly harness connector.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the (T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit
ProCarManuals.com

for an open. If the fuse is open make sure to check for a

short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.

10. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0870-OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST (CONTINUED)
11. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY
ProCarManuals.com
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes

RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S PRESENT

LOSS OF PRIME DTC PRESENT
(T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The Transmission system uses three pressure switches to monitor the fluid pressure in the LR, 2/4, and OD ele-
ments. The pressure switches are continuously monitored for the correct states in each gear. Normal operation will
be experienced if no other codes are present. Transmission Control System will ignore the code. Limp-in condition
will only occur if DTC P0871 is present with a DTC P0706.

PRESSURE SWITCH STATES

GEAR L/R 2/4 OD

R OP OP OP
P/N CL OP OP
1st CL OP OP
2nd OP CL OP
D OP OP CL
OD OP CL CL
OP = OPEN
CL = CLOSED
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED TRANSMISSION RELAY DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Transmission DTC’s

Are there any Transmission Control Relay DTC’s present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK FOR LOSS OF PRIME DTC

With the scan tool, check for other Transmission DTC’s.

Is the DTC P0944 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK TO SEE IF P0841 IS CURRENT
With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0841.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 10
ProCarManuals.com
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
4. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Pressure Switch selector to
OD.
With the scan tool , monitor the OD Pressure Switch state while press-
ing the Pressure Switch Test button on the Transmission Simulator.

Did the OD Pressure Switch state change?

Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
5. (T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Transmission
Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 6

6. (T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
7. (T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

8. OD PRESSURE SWITCH

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0871-OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY (CONTINUED)
9. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

ProCarManuals.com

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0884-POWER UP AT SPEED
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
One time after each controller reset. Note: the Transmission Control Module is integrated with Powertrain Con-
trol Module. The Transmission Control Module has separate powers and grounds specifically to its portion of
the PCM.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the PCM powers up and senses the vehicle in a valid forward gear (no PRNDL DTCs) with
a output speed above 800 RPM, approximately 32Km/h or 20 MPH.

Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUITS
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
If a vehicle loses power to the PCM, the vehicle will go to the 2nd gear mode since there is no power available to
ProCarManuals.com

control the transmission solenoids. However if power is restored, the PCM will power-up and normal operation will
be restored. This DTC identifies that power to the PCM was restored when the gear selector was in a Drive posi-
tion while the vehicle was moving at speeds above 32 Km/h (20 MPH). If a customer shifts to Neutral and cycles
the ignition key and quickly shifts to Drive while moving before the PCM comes out of its START ROUTINE, the
DTC can be set. Therefore it is critical that this DTC diagnosis repair procedure should only be used if the vehicle
is experiencing intermittent 2nd gear operation and subsequently a return to normal operation during normal driving.
the transmission will not be placed in Limp-in. This is an informational DTC only, when attmepting to diagnosis inter-
mittent 2nd gear operation and subsequently a return to normal transmission operation.
P0884-POWER UP AT SPEED (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUITS

This DTC is set when the PCM is initialized while the vehicle is mov-
ing down the road in a valid forward gear. This is usually a momen-
tarily loss of power to the Transmission portion of the PCM.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Note: Due to the integration of the Powertrain and Transmission
Control Modules, the transmission part of the PCM has its own
specific power and ground circuits.
Check all of the Fused B+, Fused Ignition Switch Output, and Ground
circuits related to the PCM for an intermittent open or short to ground.
Perform a wiggle test on all wiring and connectors pertaining to the
PCM while looking for shorts and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

ProCarManuals.com

Repair
Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS OFF
ProCarManuals.com
P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS OFF (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
This DTC is set when less than 3 volts are present at the Transmission Control Relay output circuits at the
Powertrain Control Module when the PCM is energizing the relay. Note: Due to the integration of the Power-
train and Transmission Control Modules, the transmission part of the PCM has its own specific power and
ground circuits.

Possible Causes

(Internal) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN

(T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(T15) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(Z901) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(T15) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY

TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The transmission control relay is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal
operating mode. When the relay is off, no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in Limp-in
mode. The relay output is fed back to the PCM. It is referred to as the Trans Relay Output circuit or switched
battery. After a controller reset (ignition key turned to the run position or after cranking engine), the controller ener-
gizes the relay. Prior to this, the PCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the trans-
mission control relay outputs (switched battery) terminals. After the relay is energized, the PCM monitors the
terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. The MIL illuminates and the transmission will be placed
in Limp-in.
P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS OFF (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0888 IS CURRENT

With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0888.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter equal to 0?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 12
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK THE (INTERNAL) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (Internal)
Fused B+ circuit in the Transmission Control Relay connector.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9
P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS OFF (CONTINUED)
3. (T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuits.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool in Transmission Sensors, read the Switched Battery
voltage.

Does the Switched Battery voltage read battery voltage?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (T16) Transmission Control Relay Output cir-
cuits for an open or high resistance. Note: There are mul-
tiple Transmission Control Relay Output circuits.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

4. TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Install a substitute Relay in place of the Transmission Control Relay.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the scan tool in Transmission Sensors, read the Switched Battery
voltage.

Does the Switched Battery voltage read battery voltage?

Yes >> Replace the Transmission Control Relay.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS OFF (CONTINUED)
5. (Z901) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z901)
Transmission Control Relay Ground circuit.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (Z901) Transmission Control Relay Ground cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.

6. (T15) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

ProCarManuals.com

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T15) Transmission Control Relay Con-
trol circuit between the Transmission Control Relay connector and the
appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T15) Transmission Control Relay Control cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS OFF (CONTINUED)
7. (T15) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T15) Transmission
Control Relay Control circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T15) Transmission Control Relay Control cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
ProCarManuals.com

8. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connectors.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T16) Transmission
Control Relay Output circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the Fused B+ circuit for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

10. (T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch harness con-
nector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (T16) Transmission
Control Relay Output circuit.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 11
P0888-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS OFF (CONTINUED)
11. TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention
to all power and ground circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

12. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX EVENT DATA to help identify the
conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

ProCarManuals.com

Yes >> Repair as necessary.

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0890-SWITCHED BATTERY
ProCarManuals.com
P0890-SWITCHED BATTERY (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
One time after a reset (ignition key turned to the RUN position or after cranking engine).
Set Condition:
Fault Set If: A voltage is greater than 4.5 volts is detected on any of the pressure switches, before the relay is
energized. Fault Set Time: Less than 7 msec, transmission placed in Limp-In. MIL on after 10 sec. of vehicle
operation).

Possible Causes

(T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

Theory of Operation
The transmission relay is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when in normal operating mode, and to turn off
power to produce transmission limp-in mode. The relay output (which supplies power to the solenoid pack) is fed
back to the controller. It is referred to as SWITCHED BATTERY. After a controller reset (ignition key turned to the
RUN position or after cranking engine), the controller verifies that the relay contacts are open by checking for no
voltage on Switched battery line (ie. transmission control relay output) before the relay is energized. After switched
battery is verified for no voltage, the voltage of each of the solenoid pack pressure switches is also checked. Since
the solenoid pack is not powered up, there should be no voltage on any of the pressure switches.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0890 IS PRESENT

With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0890.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter set at 0?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0890-SWITCHED BATTERY (CONTINUED)
2. (T9) OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly harness connec-
tor.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the voltage of the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Yes >> Repair the (T9) OD Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
ProCarManuals.com

short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. (T47) 2/4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the voltage of the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volt?

Yes >> Repair the (T47) 2/4 Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0890-SWITCHED BATTERY (CONTINUED)
4. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the voltage of the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
ProCarManuals.com

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -

VER 1.
No >> Go To 5

5. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0890-SWITCHED BATTERY (CONTINUED)
6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0891-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS ON
ProCarManuals.com
P0891-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS ON (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
After a reset (ignition key turned to the RUN position) and after a power down.
Set Condition:
Relay output (Switched Battery) is higher than 3 volts when relay is not energized by controller. Fault Set Time:
Less than 100 msec

Possible Causes

TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY STUCK CLOSED

(T15) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUITS SHORT TO VOLTAGE
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
ProCarManuals.com

The transmission relay is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when in normal operating mode, and to turn off
power to produce transmission limp-in mode. The relay output (which supplies power to the solenoid pack) is fed
back to the controller This is referred to as SWITCHED BATTERY. After a controller reset (ignition key turned to the
RUN position or after cranking engine), the controller verifies that the relay contacts are open by checking for no
voltage on Switched battery line (ie. relay output) before the relay is energized. Transmission locked in Limp-In. MIL
on after 10 sec. of vehicle operation.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0891 IS CURRENT

With the scan tool, Check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P0891.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter equal to 0?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
P0891-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS ON (CONTINUED)
2. TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY CONTACTS STUCK CLOSED
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between the Fused B+ circuit and the Transmission Control Relay Output Circuit of the
Transmission Control Relay.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Transmission Control Relay.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

3. (T16) TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage at the (T16) Transmission Control Relay Output
ProCarManuals.com

circuit in the Transmission Control Relay connector.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit
for a short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P0891-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS ON (CONTINUED)
4. (T15) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Note: The Transmission Controller will power up the Transmis-
sion Control Relay Control circuit for approximately 3.0 seconds
after initial ignition on. Wait at least 3.0 seconds before perform-
ing the following voltage check.
Note: A One-trip fault may set for P0888 Relay Always Off, disre-
gard the DTC.
Measure the voltage at the (T15) Transmission Control Relay Control
circuit after a 3.0 second wait period.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T15) Transmission Control Relay Control cir-
cuit for a short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

5. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0891-TRANSMISSION RELAY ALWAYS ON (CONTINUED)
6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open
circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P0897-TRANSMISSION FLUID DETERIORATED
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Each transition from full EMCC to partial EMCC for A/C bump prevention.
Set Condition:
DTC set if 20 occurrences of a turbine acceleration sum. Fault Set Time: 20 transitions from full EMCC to
partial EMCC. transmission will not use partial EMCC established for A/C bump prevention.

Possible Causes
WORN OUT/ BURNT TRANSAXLE FLUID
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
To prevent an objectionable bump due to A/C clutch engagement, a temporary torque converter partial EMCC con-
dition is established prior to A/C clutch engagement. A message is received over the vehciles bus indicating that A/C
clutch engagement is imminent. Partial EMCC is then established and a reply message, ok to engage A/C clutch
ProCarManuals.com

is sent via the vehicles bus. Partial EMCC will be held for 450 ms before returning to full EMCC. During the tran-
sition from full to partial EMCC a turbine acceleration sum is calculated, if this value exceeds a threshold value for
several transitions, degraded transmission fluid is indicated.

Diagnostic Test

1. WORN OUT/ BURNT TRANSMISSION FLUID

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Flush the Transmission Oil Cooler and lines, replace the Transmission
Oil Filter, refill with new Transmission Fluid, start the engine, and
adjust the fluid per the Service Information.
Note: The Transmission Cooler must be flushed before prodceed-
ing.
Allow the engine to idle for 10 minutes, in Park.
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Again, flush the Transmission Oil Cooler and lines, replace the Trans-
mission Oil Filter, refill with new Transmission Fluid, start the engine,
and adjust the fluid per the Service Information.
With the scan tool, perform a Battery Disconnect.
Note: The Battery Disconnect must be done to re-enable EMCC
during an A/C Clutch engagement.
Note: The vehicle may exhibit intermittent shudder during the
first few hundred miles. The new Transmission Fluid will gradu-
ally penetrate the Torque Convertor Clutch friction material and the shudder should disappear.
Erase the DTC and return the vehicle to the customer.

Did the DTC reset and/or does the vehicle still shudder after a few thousand miles?
Yes >> Replace the Torque Converter per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
P0944-LOSS OF HYDRAULIC PUMP PRIME
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagramRefer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Every 350 msec
Set Condition:
If the transmission begins to slip in any forward gear, and the pressure switch or switches that should be
closed for a given gear are open, a loss of prime test begins. All available elements (in 1st gear LR, 2/4 and
OD, in 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear 2/4 and OD) are turned on by the PCM to see if pump prime exists. The code
is set if none of the pressure switches respond. The PCM will continue to run the loss of prime test until pump
pressure returns. The vehicle will not move or transmission slips. Normal operation will continue if pump prime
returns.

Possible Causes

LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL

SHIFT LEVER POSITION
PLUGGED TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER
TRANSMISSION OIL PUMP
ProCarManuals.com

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The Loss of prime test is used to prevent transmission defaults and erroneous fault codes during temporary loss of
pump prime that may occur with low transmission fluid under severe braking conditions, start-up, etc. and to point
towards more subtle problems such as a plugged or ruptured oil filter. The Loss of Prime fault is set by a loss of
hydraulic pressure in the transmission system. This condition, if sustained, will result in the vehicle being unable to
move.

Diagnostic Test

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0944 IS CURRENT

Place the gear selector in park.
Start the engine.
Note: The TRANS TEMP DEG must be at least 43° C or 110° F
before performing the following steps.
The Transmission must be at operating temperature prior to checking
pressure. A cold Transmission will give higher readings.
Place the Transmission in Reverse.
With the scan tool, observe the Transmission Pressure Switch states.

Are any of the Pressure Switches closed?

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 4
P0944-LOSS OF HYDRAULIC PUMP PRIME (CONTINUED)
2. INTERMITTENT OPERATION
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Test drive the vehicle. Allow the Transmission to shift through all gears and ranges.

Did you experience a delayed engagement and/or a no drive condition?

Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 3

3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wiring while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX EVENT DATA to help identify the
conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
ProCarManuals.com

Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -

VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.

4. SHIFT LEVER POSITION TEST

With the scan tool, perform a Shift Lever Position test. Follow the
instructions on the scan tool.

Did the Shift Lever Position Test pass?

Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Refer to Table of Contents in this category and perform
test for DTC P0706.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P0944-LOSS OF HYDRAULIC PUMP PRIME (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK FOR PLUGGED TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER
Remove and inspect the Transmission Oil Pan and Transmission Oil Filter per the Service Information.

Does the Transmission Oil Pan contain excessive debris and/or is the Oil Filter plugged?
Yes >> Repair the cause of the plugged Transmission Oil Filter. Refer to the Service Information for the proper
repair procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 6

6. TRANSMISSION OIL PUMP

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Transmission Oil Pump per the Service Information.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com
P0992-2/4/OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

Possible Causes
CONDITION P0992 PRESENT
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

OD and 24 pressure switches when they are off (ie. when the corresponding friction element is not applied) by
briefly applying the OD and 24 elements which will cause the corresponding pressure switch to close. The test
verifies that the switches are operational and that the switch will close when the corresponding element is applied.
If a switch fails to respond, it is re-tested. The MIL illuminates and the transmission system defaults to Limp-in
mode.

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P0992 IS CURRENT

Note: The vehicle must be driven to set this DTC. The transmis-
sion must be warm or hot with the Engine RPM above 1000 RPM.
This DTC is an indication of both the 2/4 and the O/D Hydraulic Pres-
sure Switch DTCs present.
Perform diagnostics for both P0870 and P0845 to determine which
switch is failing.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Refer to the Transmission category and perform the diag-
nostic procedures for P0845 and P0870.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P1684-BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
After a reset (ignition key turned to the RUN position).
Set Condition:
The checksum of the battery backed RAM does not match the stored checksum. Set Time: Less than 7 msec.

Possible Causes

BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED

PCM WAS REPLACED OR DISCONNECTED
QUICK LEARN WAS PERFORMED
(A209) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT TO PCM OPEN
(Z904) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

Theory of Operation
Note: This is not a fault code. It exists to provide reference information only. A battery backed RAM is used to
maintain some learned values. When the battery is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery is recon-
nected, the loss of learned values will be detected by the controller. The code will be set and the learned values will
be initialized to known constants and the learning process will continue. Setting the code has no effect except for
re-initialization of learned values.

Diagnostic Test

1. BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED

Has the battery been disconnected, lost it’s charge, or been replaced recently?
Yes >> Disconnecting or replacing the battery will set this DTC. Erase the DTC.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
P1684-BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED (CONTINUED)
2. WAS QUICK LEARN PERFORMED

Has a Quick Learn procedure been performed?

Yes >> Performing Quick Learn will set this DTC. Erase the DTC.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3

3. PCM REPLACED OR DISCONNECTED

ProCarManuals.com

Has the PCM been replaced or disconnected?

Yes >> Replacing or disconnecting the PCM will set this DTC.
Erase the DTC.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 4
P1684-BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED (CONTINUED)
4. (A209) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C1 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A209) Fused
B+ circuit.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the Fused B+ circuit for an open. If the fuse is
open make sure to check for a short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

5. (Z904) GROUND CIRCUITS

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z904)
Ground circuits in the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly for all the ground cir-
cuits?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the Ground circuits for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P1684-BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED (CONTINUED)
6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLETRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION
ProCarManuals.com
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Prior to a shift into 1st gear.
Set Condition:
Transmission temperature must be HOT. DTC is set after six unsuccessful attempts to shift into 1st gear.

Possible Causes

RELATED DTC P0841 PRESENT

(T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
ProCarManuals.com

Theory of Operation
The Solenoid Switch Valve, an internal, hydraulically operated valve, controls the direction of the transmission fluid
when the LR solenoid is energized. When the solenoid switch valve is in the downshifted position and the LR sole-
noid is energized, fluid is directed to the LR element for 1st gear. When the solenoid switch valve is In the up-
shifted position (2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear) and the LR solenoid is energized, fluid is directed into the Lockup Switch
Valve which controls the Torque Converter Clutch. When shifting into 1st gear, a special sequence is followed to
insure solenoid switch valve movement into the downshifted position. The LR pressure switch is monitored to con-
firm switch valve movement. If the solenoid switch valve movement is not confirmed (i.e. no LR pressure when the
LR solenoid is energized), 2nd gear is substituted for 1st. No 1st gear (2nd gear is substituted). The transmission
Torque converter FEMCC operation is inhibited. MIL on after 5 min. of substituted operation.
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check for other Transmission DTC’s

Is the DTC P0841 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P1775 IS CURRENT

With the scan tool, check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P1775.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 10
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Pressure Switch selector
switch to L/R.
With the scan tool, monitor the L/R Pressure Switch State while press-
ing the Pressure Switch Test button.

Did the Pressure Switch state change from open to closed

when the test button was pressed?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

4. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Repair internal transmission as necessary per the Service Information. Inspect the Solenoid Switch
Valve per the Service Information and repair or replace as necessary. If no problems are found, replace
the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION (CONTINUED)
5. (T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Connect a jumper wire between the (A104) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Starter Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check all (T16) Trans-
mission Control Relay Output circuits in the appropriate terminals of
special tool #8815.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
ProCarManuals.com

Does the test light illuminate brightly on all Transmission Con-

trol Relay Output circuits?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit
for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION (CONTINUED)
6. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
ProCarManuals.com

No >> Go To 7

7. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION (CONTINUED)
8. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

9. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P1775-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION (CONTINUED)
10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Test drive and verify if the transmission is launching in 2nd gear and/or
no TCC engagement.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Are there 2nd gear launches and/or no TCC engagement?

Yes >> Disassemble and inspect the Valve Body per the Service
Information and repair or replace as necessary. If no prob-
lems are found in the Valve Body, replace the Transmis-
sion Solenoid Pressure Switch Assembly.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION
ProCarManuals.com
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Every 7 ms when doing PEMCC or FEMCC.
Set Condition:
Must be in partial or full EMCC. The DTC is set if LR pressure is detected high for the fourth time.

Possible Causes

RELATED DTC P0841 PRESENT

Theory of Operation
The Solenoid Switch Valve, an internal, hydraulically operated valve, controls the direction of the transmission fluid
when the LR solenoid is energized. When the solenoid switch valve is in the downshifted position and the LR sole-
noid is energized, fluid is directed to the LR element for 1st gear. When the solenoid switch valve is In the up-
shifted position (2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear) and the LR solenoid is energized, fluid is directed into the Lockup Switch
Valve which controls the Torque Converter Clutch. When doing PEMCC or FEMCC, the LR pressure switch should
indicate no pressure if the solenoid switch valve is in the LU position. If the LR pressure switch indicates pressure
for some time while in partial or full EMCC, the EMCC operation is aborted and momentarily inhibited to avoid
accidental application of the LR clutch. EMCC is attempted again when there is no LR pressure. The fourth detec-
tion of LR pressure while in PEMCC or FEMCC will result in setting the DTC.Torque converter EMCC operation
inhibited. MIL on after 5 min. of substituted operation.
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. DETERMINING IF RELATED DTC’S ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, check for other Transmission DTC’s

Is the DTC P0841 present also?

Yes >> Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 2
ProCarManuals.com

2. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC P1776 IS CURRENT

With the scan tool, check the STARTS SINCE SET counter for P1776.
Note: This counter only applies to the last DTC set.

Is the STARTS SINCE SET counter 2 or less?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 10
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION (CONTINUED)
3. PCM AND WIRING
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, turn the Pressure Switch selector
switch to L/R.
With the scan tool, monitor the L/R Pressure Switch State while press-
ing the Pressure Switch Test button.

Did the Pressure Switch state change from open to closed

when the test button was pressed?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
ProCarManuals.com

4. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Repair internal transmission as necessary per the Service Information. Inspect the Solenoid Switch
Valve per the Service Information and repair or replace as necessary. If no problems are found, replace
the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION (CONTINUED)
5. (T16) TRANSMISSION CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Connect a jumper wire between the (A104) Fused B+ circuit and the
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Remove the Starter Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check all (T16) Trans-
mission Control Relay Output circuits in the appropriate terminals of
special tool #8815.
Note: The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the bright-
ness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
ProCarManuals.com

Does the test light illuminate brightly on all Transmission Con-

trol Relay Output circuits?
Yes >> Repair the (T16) Transmission Control Relay Output cir-
cuit(s) for an open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 6
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION (CONTINUED)
6. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit
from the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Transmission
Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly harness connector.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 7
ProCarManuals.com

7. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 8
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION (CONTINUED)
8. (T50) L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly har-
ness connector.
Remove the Transmission Control Relay.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (Internal) Fused B+ circuit and
(T16) Transmission Control Relay Output circuit in the Transmission
Control Relay connector.
Ignition on, engine not running.
Measure the voltage of the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit.

Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?

Yes >> Repair the (T50) L/R Pressure Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
ProCarManuals.com

9. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Powertrain Control Module per the Service
Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK LEARN,
then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P1776-SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION (CONTINUED)
10. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Test drive and verify if the transmission is launching in 2nd gear and/or
no TCC engagement.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Are there 2nd gear launches and/or no TCC engagement?

Yes >> Disassemble and inspect the Valve Body per the Service
Information and repair or replace as necessary. If no prob-
lems are found in the Valve Body, replace the Transmis-
sion Solenoid Pressure Switch Assembly.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P1790-FAULT IMMEDIATELY AFTER SHIFT
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
After a Gear Ratio Error code is stored.
Set Condition:
Gear Ratio Error DTC have already been set. The DTC is set if the fault happened within 1.3 seconds of a
shift. The DTC set time will vary from 1.214 seconds to 15 seconds.

Possible Causes
FAULT AFTER SHIFT
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
This DTC is not stored alone. It is stored if a Gear Ratio DTC is detected immediately after shift. The existence of
DTC P1790 indicates a mechanical or hydraulic (non-electrical) related problems. It should be noted, however, that
all mechanical problems don’t necessarily result in DTC P1790. When this DTC exists, diagnosing the system
ProCarManuals.com

should be based on the associated DTC and only mechanical causes should be considered.

Diagnostic Test

1. FAULT AFTER SHIFT

This DTC is set along with a Gear Ratio DTC. Perform the appropriate
test for the Gear Ratio DTC stored.
Note: Check 1 trip failures if there are no Gear Ratio DTCs cur-
rent.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Refer to the Transmission category and perform the appro-
priate diagnostic procedure.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P1794-SPEED SENSOR GROUND ERROR
ProCarManuals.com
P1794-SPEED SENSOR GROUND ERROR (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Every 7ms after a controler reset with transmission range in neutral.
Set Condition:
After a PCM reset in neutral and Input/Output Ratio equals a ratio of 2.50 to 1.0 ± 50.0 RPM.

Possible Causes
SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The two speed sensors in the transmission system and use a common ground circuit. The loss of this common
ground results in the input signal being sensed by both sensors. After a reset and in neutral, and observing a certain
Output/Input ratio will increment the Speed Check Fault Counter. Because the speed sensors and the thermistor
share the same ground wire, this DTC may indicate a loss of the common speed sensor ground. In some cases this
ProCarManuals.com

fault will cause a Gear Ratio Error DTC to be set.

P1794-SPEED SENSOR GROUND ERROR (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test

1. PCM AND WIRING

Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Remove the Starter Relay.
CAUTION: Removal of the Starter Relay is to prevent a Transmis-
sion, NO RESPONSE, condition and disable the starter.
Install the Transmission Simulator, Miller tool #8333 and the Electronic
Transmission Adapter kit 8333-1A.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Transmission Simulator, set the Input/Output Speed switch
to ON and the rotary switch to the 3000/1250 position.
With the scan tool, monitor the Input and Output Speed Sensor read-
ings.

Does the Input Speed read 3000 RPM and the Output Speed
read 1250 RPM, ± 50 RPM?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 4
ProCarManuals.com
P1794-SPEED SENSOR GROUND ERROR (CONTINUED)
2. (T13) SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off to the lock position.
Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
Disconnect the Input and Output Speed Sensor harness connectors.
Note: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing
the PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals
resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special
Tool #8815 to perform diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (T13) Speed Sensor Ground circuit from
the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815 to the Input and Output
Speed Sensor harness connectors.

Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms on either circuit?

Yes >> Repair the (T13) Speed Sensor Ground circuit for an
open.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
ProCarManuals.com

3. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground
circuits.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per
the Service Information. With the scan tool perform QUICK
LEARN, then program Pinion Factor in the Front Control
Module.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
P1794-SPEED SENSOR GROUND ERROR (CONTINUED)
4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors
specific to this circuit.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.

Were there any problems found?

Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Test Complete.
ProCarManuals.com
P1797-MANUAL SHIFT OVERHEAT
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Continuously with engine running.
Set Condition:
If the Engine Temperature exceeds 123° C or 255° F, or the Transmission Temperature exceeds 135° C or
275° F while in AutoStick mode. Note: Aggressive driving or driving in low for extended periods of time will set
this DTC.

Possible Causes
MANUAL SHIFT OVERHEAT
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

Theory of Operation
The major cause of heat build up in the transmission is torque converter slip. With the transmission in the autostick
mode, the torque converter can slip during aggressive driving or heavy loading conditions such as trailer tow or
ProCarManuals.com

steep grades. In the non autostick mode the controller logic prevents the transmission from overheating by manag-
ing the shift and EMCC schedule. In the autostick mode when the transmission or engine temperature approaches
an overheat condition, the manual shift overheat DTC is set and the autostick mode is temporarily suspended until
the temperature returns to a normal condition.

Diagnostic Test

1. MANUAL SHIFT OVERHEAT

This is an informational DTC only.
With the scan tool, check the EATX DTC EVENT DATA to help identify
the conditions in which the DTC was set.
Check the engine and transmission cooling system for proper opera-
tion.
Check the Radiator Cooling Fan operation.
Check the Transmission Cooling operation.
Check the Transmission Fluid Level per the Service Information. Make
sure it is not overfilled.
Note: Aggressive driving or driving in low for extended periods of
time will set this DTC.

If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.

Repair
If the Transmission Fluid is low, repair any Transmission
Fluid leak as necessary and adjust the Transmission Fluid
Level per the Service Information. Refer to Service Information for the related symptoms and repair as
necessary.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
U0002 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE
ProCarManuals.com
U0002 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Every 7 msec. Conditions: 1) Engine speed greater than 500 RPM. 2) Battery voltage greater than 10v but
less than 16v.
Set Condition:
CAN C bus messages not received for 10 seconds.

Theory of Operation
Some NGC controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The transmission controller contin-
uously monitors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate
transmission MIL status to the Engine Controller, therefor if the Engine Controller is unable to communicate with the
Transmission Controller, the Engine Controller will light the MIL.
Diagnose the U0002 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as the U0001 CAN C BUS CIRCUIT test in 8-ELEC-
TRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic procedures and for
further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM
ProCarManuals.com
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Every 7 msec. Conditions: 1) Engine speed greater than 500 RPM. 2) Battery voltage greater than 10v but
less than 16v.
Set Condition:
CAN C bus messages not received for 10 seconds.

Theory of Operation
Some NGC controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The transmission controller contin-
uously monitors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate
transmission MIL status to the Engine Controller, therefor if the Engine Controller is unable to communicate with the
Transmission Controller, the Engine Controller will light the MIL.
Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic
procedures and for further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
U0121 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS
ProCarManuals.com
U0121 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Every 7 msec. Conditions: 1) Engine speed greater than 500 RPM. 2) Battery voltage greater than 10v but
less than 16v.
Set Condition:
CAN C bus messages not received for 10 seconds.

Theory of Operation
Some NGC controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The transmission controller contin-
uously monitors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate
transmission MIL status to the Engine Controller, therefor if the Engine Controller is unable to communicate with the
Transmission Controller, the Engine Controller will light the MIL.
Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic pro-
cedures and for further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FCM
ProCarManuals.com
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FCM (CONTINUED)
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.

When Monitored:
Every 7 msec. Conditions: 1) Engine speed greater than 500 RPM. 2) Battery voltage greater than 10v but
less than 16v.
Set Condition:
CAN C bus messages not received for 10 seconds.

Theory of Operation
Some NGC controllers communicate with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The transmission controller contin-
uously monitors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. The CAN C bus is also used to communicate
transmission MIL status to the Engine Controller, therefor if the Engine Controller is unable to communicate with the
Transmission Controller, the Engine Controller will light the MIL.
Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for diagnostic pro-
cedures and for further possible causes.
ProCarManuals.com
42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1
For the Transmission circuit diagram (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHE-
MATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
Diagnostic Test

1. 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1

Note: 1. After completion of the Transmission Verification Test, the Powertrain Verification Test must be per-
formed. Refer to the Engine Category.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Reconnect any disconnected components.
4. With the scan tool, erase all Transmission DTC’s, also erase the PCM DTC’s.
5. Perform *PRNDL FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURE after completion of repairs for P0706 CHECK SHIFTER SIG-
NAL.
6. With the scan tool, display Transmission Temperature. Start and run the engine until the Transmission Temper-
ature is HOT, above 43° C or 110° F.
7. Check the transmission fluid and adjust if necessary. Refer to the Service Information for the Fluid Fill procedure.
Note: 8. If the Powertrain Control Module or Torque Converter has been replaced, or if the Transmission has
been repaired or replaced, it is necessary to perform the scan tool Quick Learn Procedure.
Note: 9. If the Powertrain Control Module or Front Control Module has been replaced you must reset the
ProCarManuals.com

Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module.

10. Road test the vehicle. With the scan tool, monitor the engine RPM. Make 15 to 20 1-2, 2-3, 3-4 upshifts. Per-
form these shifts from a standing start to 45 MPH with a constant throttle opening of 20 to 25 degrees.
11. Below 25 MPH, make 5 to 8 wide open throttle kickdowns to 1st gear. Allow at least 5 seconds each in 2nd and
3rd gear between each kickdown.
12. For a specific DTC, drive the vehicle to the Symptom’s When Monitored/When Set conditions to verify the DTC
is repaired.
13. If equipped with AutoStick , upshift and downshift several times using the AutoStick feature during the road
test.
Note: 14. Use the EATX OBDII task manager to run Good Trip time in each gear, this will confirm the repair
and to ensure that the DTC has not re-matured.
15. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) during the road test. If a DTC sets during the road test , return to
the Symptom list and perform the appropriate symptom.
Note: 16. Erase P0700 DTC in the PCM to turn the MIL light off after making transmission repairs.

Were there any Diagnostic Trouble Codes set during the road test?
Yes >> Repair is not complete, refer to the appropriate symptom.
Perform 42RLE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Repair is complete.
ProCarManuals.com

SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS

TRANSMISSION SCHEMATIC ELECTRICAL

page page

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - SERVICE CABLE-GEARSHIFT

INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 GEARSHIFT CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . 622
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . 622
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . 624
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . 525 ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE ... . . . 626
PRELIMINARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 CLUTCHES-HOLDING
ROAD TESTING .................... . 525 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . 526 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ALUMINUM B1-HOLDING CLUTCH
THREAD REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 B2-HOLDING CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
ProCarManuals.com

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS .......... . 558 CLUTCHES-INPUT
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
SPECIAL TOOLS - AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
TRANSMISSION - NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 K1-INPUT CLUTCH
MECHANISM-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 K2-INPUT CLUTCH
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - BRAKE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK . . . . . . 584 K3-INPUT CLUTCH
ADJUSTMENTS - BRAKE TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
SHIFT INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
UNIT-ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL SENSORS-INPUT SPEED
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 PUMP-OIL
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
FLUID AND FILTER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 BEARING-OUTPUT SHAFT
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL . . 615 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 SEAL-OUTPUT SHAFT
FLUID CONTAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
STANDARD PROCEDURE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
CHECK OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 CABLE-PARK LOCK
TRANSMISSION FILL ................ . 616 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
FLUID/FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
CLUTCH-FREEWHEELING GEARTRAIN-PLANETARY
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
MECHANISM-SHIFT TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR . 682
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 OPERATION
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 PARK/NEUTRAL CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR . 683
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 CONVERTER-TORQUE
SOLENOID DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
CONTACT-TEMPERATURE SENSOR/PARK- INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
NEUTRAL SEAL-TORQUE CONVERTER HUB
DESCRIPTION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
PARK/NEUTRAL CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NAG1 - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
ProCarManuals.com

NAG1 Automatic Transmission

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER 11 - PARKING LOCK GEAR

2 - OIL PUMP 12 - INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
3 - DRIVESHAFT 13 - FREEWHEEL F2
4 - MULTI-DISC HOLDING CLUTCH B1 14 - REAR PLANETARY GEAR SET
5 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 15 - CENTER PLANETARY GEAR SET
6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K2 16 - ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
7 - MULTI-DISC HOLDING CLUTCH B3 17 - FRONT PLANETARY GEAR SET
8 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3 18 - FREEWHEEL F1
9 - MULTI-DISC HOLDING CLUTCH B2 19 - STATOR SHAFT
10 - OUTPUT SHAFT 20 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH

The NAG1 automatic transmission is an electronically controlled 5-speed transmission with a lock-up clutch in the
torque converter. The ratios for the gear stages are obtained by 3 planetary gear sets. Fifth gear is designed as an
overdrive with a high-speed ratio.
NAG1 identifies a family of transmissions and means “N”ew “A”utomatic “G”earbox, generation 1. Various marketing
names are associated with the NAG1 family of transmissions, depending on the transmisson variation being used in
a specific vehicle. Some examples of the marketing names are: W5A300, W5A380, and W5A580. The marketing
name can be interpreted as follows:
W = A transmission using a hydraulic torque converter.
5 = 5 forward gears.
A = Automatic Transmission.
580 = Maximum input torque capacity in Newton meters.
The gears are actuated electronically/hydraulically. The gears are shifted by means of an appropriate combination of
three multi-disc holding clutches, three multi-disc driving clutches, and two freewheeling clutches.
Electronic transmission control enables precise adaptation of pressures to the respective operating conditions and to
the engine output during the shift phase which results in a significant improvement in shift quality.
Furthermore, it offers the advantage of a flexible adaptation to various vehicle and engines.
Basically, the automatic transmission with electronic control offers the following advantages:
Reduces fuel consumption.
Improved shift comfort.
More favourable step-up through the five gears.
Increased service life and reliability.
Lower maintenance costs.
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION
The transmission can be generically identified visually by the presence of a round 13-way connector located near
the front corner of the transmission oil pan, on the right side. Specific transmission information can be found
stamped into a pad on the left side of the transmission, above the oil pan rail.

TRANSMISSION GEAR RATIOS

The gear ratios for the NAG1 automatic transmission are as follows:

TRANSMISSION HOUSING
The converter housing and transmission are made from a light alloy. These are bolted together and centered via the
outer multi-disc carrier of multi-disc holding clutch, B1. A coated intermediate plate provides the sealing. The oil
pump and the outer multi-disc carrier of the multi-disc holding clutch, B1, are bolted to the converter housing. The
stator shaft is pressed into it and prevented from rotating by splines. The electrohydraulic unit is bolted to the trans-
mission housing from underneath. A sheet metal steel oil pan forms the closure.

MECHANICAL SECTION
The mechanical section consists of a input shaft, output shaft, a sun gear shaft, and three planetary gear sets which
are coupled to each other. The planetary gear sets each have four planetary pinion gears. The oil pressure for the
torque converter lock-up clutch and clutch K2 is supplied through bores in the input shaft. The oil pressure to clutch
K3 is transmitted through the output shaft. The lubricating oil is distributed through additional bores in both shafts.
All the bearing points of the gear sets, as well as the freewheeling clutches and actuators, are supplied with lubri-
cating oil. The parking lock gear is connected to the output shaft via splines.
Freewheeling clutches F1 and F2 are used to optimize the shifts. The front freewheel, F1, is supported on the
extension of the stator shaft on the transmission side and, in the locking direction, connects the sun gear of the front
planetary gear set to the transmission housing. In the locking direction, the rear freewheeling clutch, F2, connects
the sun gear of the center planetary gear set to the sun gear of the rear planetary gear set.
ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
The electrohydraulic control unit comprises the shift plate made from light alloy for the hydraulic control and an
electrical control unit. The electrical control unit comprises of a supporting body made of plastic, into which the
electrical components are assembled. The supporting body is mounted on the shift plate and screwed to it.
Strip conductors inserted into the supporting body make the connection between the electrical components and a
plug connector. The connection to the wiring harness on the vehicle and the transmission control module (TCM) is
produced via this 13-pin plug connector with a bayonet lock.

SHIFT GROUPS
The hydraulic control components (including actuators) which are responsible for the pressure distribution before,
during, and after a gear change are described as a shift group. Each shift group contains a command valve, a
holding pressure shift valve, a shift pressure shift valve, overlap regulating valve, and a solenoid.
The hydraulic system contains three shift groups: 1-2/4-5, 2-3, and 3-4. Each shift group can also be described as
being in one of two possible states. The active shift group is described as being in the shift phase when it is actively
engaging/disengaging a clutch combination. The 1-2/4-5 shift group control the B1 and K1 clutches. The 2-3 shift
group controls the K2 and K3 clutches. The 3-4 shift group controls the K3 and B2 clutches.

OPERATION
The transmission control is divided into the electronic and hydraulic transmission control functions. While the elec-
tronic transmission control is responsible for gear selection and for matching the pressures to the torque to be trans-
mitted, the transmission’s power supply control occurs via hydraulic elements in the electrohydraulic control module.
ProCarManuals.com

The oil supply to the hydraulic elements, such as the hydrodynamic torque converter, the shift elements and the
hydraulic transmission control, is provided by way of an oil pump connected with the torque converter.
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) allows for the precise adaptation of pressures to the corresponding oper-
ating conditions and to the engine output during the gearshift phase, resulting in a noticeable improvement in shift
quality. The engine speed limit can be reached in the individual gears at full throttle and kickdown. The shift range
can be changed in the forward gears while driving, but the TCM employs a downshift safeguard to prevent over-
revving the engine. The system offers the additional advantage of flexible adaptation to different vehicle and engine
variants.

EMERGENCY RUNNING FUNCTION

In order to ensure a safe driving state and to prevent damage to the automatic transmission, the TCM control mod-
ule switches to limp-home mode in the event of critical faults. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) assigned to the fault
is stored in memory. All solenoid and regulating valves are thus de-energized.
The net effect is:
The last engaged gear remains engaged.
The modulating pressure and shift pressures rise to the maximum levels.
The torque converter lockup clutch is deactivated.
In order to preserve the operability of the vehicle to some extent, the hydraulic control can be used to engage 2nd
gear or reverse using the following procedure:
Stop the vehicle.
Switch off engine.
Move selector lever to P .
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine.
Move selector lever to D: 2nd gear.
Move selector lever to R: Reverse gear.
The limp-home function remains active until the DTC is rectified or the stored DTC is erased with the appropriate
scan tool. Sporadic faults can be reset via ignition OFF/ON.

CLUTCH APPLICATION
Refer to CLUTCH APPLICATION for which shift elements are applied in each gear position.
CLUTCH APPLICATION

GEAR RATIO B1 B2 B3 K1 K2 K3 F1 F2
1 3.59 X* X X* X X
2 2.19 X X X* X
3 1.41 X X X
4 1.00 X X X
5 0.83 X X X X*
N N/A X X
R 3.16 X* X X X
R - Limp 1.93 X X X
In
* = The shift components required during coast.

FIRST GEAR POWERFLOW

ProCarManuals.com

First Gear Powerflow

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

2 - TORQUE CONVERTER TURBINE 15 - REAR PLANETARY CARRIER
3 - TORQUE CONVERTER IMPELLER 16 - TORQUE CONVERTER STATOR
4 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 17 - FRONT PLANETARY PINION GEARS
5 - HOLDING CLUTCH B3 18 - CENTER PLANETARY PINION GEARS
6 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2 19 - REAR PLANETARY PINION GEARS
7 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 20 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F1
8 - FRONT PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 21 - FRONT PLANETARY SUN GEAR
9 - DRIVING CLUTCH K2 22 - CENTER PLANETARY SUN GEAR
10 - CENTER PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 23 - REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR
11 - REAR PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 24 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F2
12 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3 25 - INPUT SHAFT
13 - FRONT PLANETARY CARRIER 26 - OUTPUT SHAFT
A - ENGINE SPEED D - SECOND GEAR RATIO
B - TRANSMISSION INPUT SPEED E - THIRD GEAR RATIO
C - FIRST GEAR RATIO F - FIXED PARTS
ProCarManuals.com

First Gear Powerflow

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the input shaft (25) and all three planetary gearsets and trans-
ferred to the output shaft (26).

Front Planetary Gear Set

The annulus gear (8) is driven by the input shaft (25). The sun gear (21) is held against the housing by the locked
freewheel F1 (20) during acceleration and via the engaged multiple-disc holding clutch B1 (4) during deceleration.
The planetary pinion gears (17) turn on the fixed sun gear (21) and increase the torque from the annulus gear (8)
to the planetary carrier (13). The planetary carrier (13) moves at a reduced speed in the running direction of the
engine.

Rear Planetary Gear Set

The annulus gear (11) turns at a reduced speed due to the mechanical connection to the front planetary carrier (15).
The sun gear (23) is held against the housing by the engaged multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (6), by the locked
freewheel F2 (24) during acceleration and by the engaged multiple-disc clutch K3 (12) during deceleration. The
planetary gears (19) turn on the fixed sun gear (23) and increase the torque from the annulus gear (11) to the
planetary carrier (15). The planetary carrier (15) moves at a reduced speed in the running direction of the engine.
Center Planetary Gear Set

The annulus gear (10) is driven at the same speed as the rear planetary carrier (15) as a result of a mechanical
connection. The sun gear (22) is held against the housing by the multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (6). The planetary
pinion gears (18) turn on the fixed sun gear (22) and increase the torque from the annulus gear (10) to the plan-
etary carrier (14). The output shaft (26) connected to the planetary carrier (14) turns at a reduced speed in the
running direction of the engine.

SECOND GEAR POWERFLOW

ProCarManuals.com

Second Gear Powerflow

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

Second Gear Powerflow

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the input shaft (25) and the center and rear planetary gearset and
transferred to the output shaft (26).

Front Planetary Gear Set

The planetary carrier (13) and sun gear (21) are connected via the engaged multiple-disc clutch K1 (7). The plan-
etary gearset is therefore blocked and turns as a closed unit at the input speed due to the mechanical connection
of the annulus gear (8) and input shaft.

Rear Planetary Gear Set

The annulus gear (11) turns at the input speed as a result of the mechanical connection to the front planetary carrier
(13). The sun gear (23) is held against the housing by the engaged multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (6), by the
locked freewheel F2 (24) during acceleration and by the engaged multiple-disc clutch K3 (12) during deceleration.
The planetary pinion gears (19) turn on the fixed sun gear (23) and increase the torque from the annulus gear (11)
to the planetary carrier (15). The planetary carrier (15) moves at a reduced speed in the running direction of the
engine.
Center Planetary Gear Set

The annulus gear (10) is driven at the same speed as the rear planetary carrier (15) as a result of a mechanical
connection. The sun gear (22) is held against the housing by the multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (6). The planetary
pinion gears (18) turn on the fixed sun gear (22) and increase the torque from the annulus gear (10) to the plan-
etary carrier (14). The output shaft (5) connected to the planetary carrier (14) turns at a reduced speed in the run-
ning direction of the engine.

THIRD GEAR POWERFLOW

ProCarManuals.com

Third Gear Powerflow

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

2 - TORQUE CONVERTER TURBINE 15 - REAR PLANETARY CARRIER
3 - TORQUE CONVERTER IMPELLER 16 - TORQUE CONVERTER STATOR
4 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 17 - FRONT PLANETARY PINION GEARS
5 - HOLDING CLUTCH B3 18 - CENTER PLANETARY PINION GEARS
6 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2 19 - REAR PLANETARY PINION GEARS
7 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 20 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F1
8 - FRONT PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 21 - FRONT PLANETARY SUN GEAR
9 - DRIVING CLUTCH K2 22 - CENTER PLANETARY SUN GEAR
10 - CENTER PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 23 - REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR
11 - REAR PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 24 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F2
12 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3 25 - INPUT SHAFT
13 - FRONT PLANETARY CARRIER 26 - OUTPUT SHAFT
A - ENGINE SPEED C - FIRST GEAR RATIO
B - TRANSMISSION INPUT SPEED D - FIXED PARTS
ProCarManuals.com

Third Gear Powerflow

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

2 - TORQUE CONVERTER TURBINE 15 - REAR PLANETARY CARRIER
3 - TORQUE CONVERTER IMPELLER 16 - TORQUE CONVERTER STATOR
4 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 17 - FRONT PLANETARY PINION GEARS
5 - HOLDING CLUTCH B3 18 - CENTER PLANETARY PINION GEARS
6 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2 19 - REAR PLANETARY PINION GEARS
7 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 20 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F1
8 - FRONT PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 21 - FRONT PLANETARY SUN GEAR
9 - DRIVING CLUTCH K2 22 - CENTER PLANETARY SUN GEAR
10 - CENTER PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 23 - REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR
11 - REAR PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 24 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F2
12 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3 25 - INPUT SHAFT
13 - FRONT PLANETARY CARRIER 26 - OUTPUT SHAFT
A - ENGINE SPEED C - FIRST GEAR RATIO
B - TRANSMISSION INPUT SPEED D - FIXED PARTS

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the input shaft (25) and the center planetary gearset and trans-
ferred to the output shaft (26).

Front Planetary Gear Set

The planetary carrier (13) and sun gear (21) are connected via the engaged multiple-disc clutch K1 (7). The plan-
etary gearset is therefore locked and turns as a closed unit at the input speed due to the mechanical connection of
the annulus gear (8) and input shaft (25).

Rear Planetary Gear Set

The multiple-disc clutch K2 (9) is engaged and transfers the input speed of the input shaft (25) to the planetary
carrier (15) via the annulus gear (10). The annulus gear (11) turns in the same way as the planetary carrier (15) due
to the mechanical connection with the locked front planetary gearset. This planetary gearset is therefore locked and
turns as a closed unit.

The planetary carrier (15) is held against the housing by the engaged multiple-disc holding clutch B3 (5). The annu-
lus gear (11) turns at a reduced speed due to the mechanical connection to the front planetary carrier (13). The
planetary gears (19) turn between the annulus gear (11) and the sun gear (23). The direction is reversed by the held
planetary carrier (15) so that the sun gear (23) turns in the opposite direction to the running direction of the engine.
Center Planetary Gear Set

The annulus gear (10) is held against the housing by the multiple-disc holding clutch B3 (5) via the mechanical
connection to the planetary carrier (15). The sun gear (22) turns backwards due to the engaged multiple-disc clutch
K3 (12). The planetary gears (18) turn on the fixed annulus gear (10) and increase the torque from the sun gear
(22) to the planetary carrier (14). The output shaft (26) connected to the planetary carrier (14) turns at a reduced
speed in the opposite direction to the running direction of the engine.

REVERSE GEAR POWERFLOW - LIMP IN

ProCarManuals.com

Reverse Gear Powerflow - Limp In

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

2 - TORQUE CONVERTER TURBINE 15 - REAR PLANETARY CARRIER
3 - TORQUE CONVERTER IMPELLER 16 - TORQUE CONVERTER STATOR
4 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 17 - FRONT PLANETARY PINION GEARS
5 - HOLDING CLUTCH B3 18 - CENTER PLANETARY PINION GEARS
6 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2 19 - REAR PLANETARY PINION GEARS
7 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 20 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F1
8 - FRONT PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 21 - FRONT PLANETARY SUN GEAR
9 - DRIVING CLUTCH K2 22 - CENTER PLANETARY SUN GEAR
10 - CENTER PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 23 - REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR
11 - REAR PLANETARY ANNULUS GEAR 24 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F2
12 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3 25 - INPUT SHAFT
13 - FRONT PLANETARY CARRIER 26 - OUTPUT SHAFT
A - ENGINE SPEED D - SECOND GEAR RATIO
B - TRANSMISSION INPUT SPEED E - FIXED PARTS
C - FIRST GEAR RATIO
Reverse Gear Powerflow - Limp In
ProCarManuals.com

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 14 - CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the input shaft (25) and all three planetary gearsets and trans-
ferred with reversed direction of rotation to the output shaft (26) and.

Front Planetary Gear Set

The clutch K1 (7) is shifted. The planetary carrier (13) and sun gear (21) are connected to each other as a result.
The annulus gear (8) is driven via the input shaft (25). The planetary gear set is locked and turns as a unit.

Rear Planetary Gear Set

The planetary carrier (15) is held against the housing by the engaged multiple-disc holding clutch B3 (5). The annulus
gear (11) turns at a reduced speed due to the mechanical connection to the front planetary carrier (13). The planetary
pinion gears (19) turn between the annulus gear (11) and the sun gear (23). The direction is reversed by the held plan-
etary carrier (15) so that the sun gear (23) turns in the opposite direction to the running direction of the engine.

Center Planetary Gear Set

First Gear Engaged

1 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID 5 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP VALVE 6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1
3 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 7 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
4 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

The end face of the command valve (5) is kept unpressurized via the solenoid valve for 1-2 and 4-5 shift (1).
Because of the holding pressure shift valve (4), the working pressure (p-A) is present at the multiple-disc holding
clutch B1 (7). Clutch K1 (6) is unpressurized.
Shift Phase - 1-2 Shift Phase 1
ProCarManuals.com

Shift Phase - 1-2 Shift Phase 1

1 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID 5 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP VALVE 6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1
3 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 7 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
4 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE
When the 1-2 and 4-5 shift solenoid valve (1) is turned on, the shift valve pressure (p-SV) is directed onto the end
face of the command valve (5). The command valve is moved and the shift pressure (p-S) coming from the shift
pressure shift valve (3) is directed via the command valve (5) onto clutch K1 (6).
Simultaneously the clutch B1 (7) is subjected to overlap pressure by the overlap regulating valve (2). The pressure
in the clutch B1 (7) as it disengages is controlled during the shift phase depending on engine load by the modu-
lating pressure and the applying clutch pressure (the shift pressure in clutch K1). The controlled pressure in clutch
B1 (7) is inversely proportional to the capacity of the clutch being engaged. The rising shift pressure (p-S) at clutch
K1 (6) acts on the annular face of the overlap regulating valve (2) and reduces the overlap pressure regulated by
the overlap regulating valve (2). When a corresponding pressure level is reached at the holding pressure shift valve
(4), this valve switches over.
ProCarManuals.com
Shift Phase - 1-2 Shift Phase 2
ProCarManuals.com

Shift Phase - 1-2 Shift Phase 2

1 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID 5 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP VALVE 6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1
3 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 7 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
4 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

The B1 (7) pressure acting on the end face of the shift pressure shift valve (3) is replaced by the working pressure
(p-A). The shift pressure is also routed to the spring end of the holding valve (4) and the holding valve downshifts.
The line pressure is then routed to the command valve (5).
Second Gear Engaged
ProCarManuals.com

Second Gear Engaged

1 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID 5 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE
2 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP VALVE 6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1
3 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 7 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
4 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

After the gearchange is complete, the pressure on the end face of the command valve (5) is reduced via the 1-2
and 4-5 shift solenoid valve (1), and the command valve (5) is pushed back to its basic position. Via the holding
pressure shift valve (4) the working pressure (p-A) now passes via the command valve (5) to clutch K1 (6). The
multiple-disc holding clutch B1 (7) is deactivated (unpressurized). The spring of the shift pressure shift valve (3)
pushes the valve back to its basic position.
Shift Phase - 2-1 Shift Phase 1
ProCarManuals.com

Shift Phase - 2-1 Shift Phase 1

1 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID 5 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP VALVE 6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1
3 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 7 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
4 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE
The 1-2/4-5 shift solenoid (1) is turned ON to apply shift pressure (p-S) to the end face of the 1-2/4-5 command
valve (5). This allows the command valve to up-shift and the shift pressure coming from the 1-2/4-5 shift valve (3)
is routed to the holding clutch B1 (7) via the command valve.
Simultaneously, the pressure in the releasing clutch, K1 (6), is regulated at the 1-2/4-5 overlap valve (2). The pres-
sure in the K1 clutch as it disengages is controlled during the shift phase depending on engine load, via the mod-
ulating pressure (p-MOD), and the shift pressure in clutch B1 (7). The increasing shift pressure in clutch B1, which
also acts on the end face of the overlap valve, reduces the overlap pressure.
ProCarManuals.com
Shift Phase - 2-1 Shift Phase 2
ProCarManuals.com

Shift Phase - 2-1 Shift Phase 2

1 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID 5 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP VALVE 6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1
3 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 7 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
4 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

The pressure in clutch B1 (7) acting on the end face of the 1-2/4-5 holding valve (4) forces the valve to up-shift
against the spring pressure and allows line pressure (p-A) to pass through the command valve (5).
2-1 Shift - First Gear Engaged
ProCarManuals.com

First Gear Engaged

1 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID 5 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP VALVE 6 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1
3 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 7 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
4 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

After the gear change is complete, the 1-2/4-5 shift solenoid (1) is turned off. This reduces the pressure on the end face
of the 1-2/4-5 command valve (5) to 0 psi and the spring pressure downshifts the valve to its initial position. The line
pressure (p-A) is switched to the holding clutch B1 (7) and the end face of the holding valve by the downshifted command
valve. The upshifted holding valve also allows the remaining pressure in clutch K1 (6) to be vented.
Gear Shift N to D (1st gear) - Engine Started
ProCarManuals.com

Engine Started

1 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 11 - PRESSURE HOLDING VALVE

2 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 12 - 3-4 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE
3 - HOLDING CLUTCH B3 13 - 3-4 COMMAND VALVE
4 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3 14 - 3-4 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE
5 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2 PISTON 15 - 3-4 OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE
6 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2 PISTON OPPOSING FACE 16 - BALL VALVE
7 - SHIFT PRESSURE REGULATING SOLENOID 17 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE
8 - SHIFT PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE 18 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE
9 - SHIFT VALVE B2 19 - BALL VALVE
10 - 3-4 SHIFT SOLENOID

With the engine started and the gearshift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK positions, holding clutch B1 (1) and driving
clutch K3 (4) are applied and the various valves in the 1-2/4-5 shift group are positioned to apply pressure to the
holding clutch B2.
Activation Sequence
ProCarManuals.com

Activation Sequence

1 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 11 - PRESSURE HOLDING VALVE

The selector valve opens the shift pressure (p-S) feed connection from the ball valve (19) with the shift valve B2 (9).
With the shift valve B2 (9) in the upper position, shift pressure (p-S) travels behind the piston B2 (5) and simulta-
neously to the opposing face of the piston B2 (6). The multiple-disc holding clutch B2 begins to close.
The pressure on the opposing face of the piston B2 (6) ensures a soft activation of the multiple-disc holding clutch
B2.
First Gear Engaged
ProCarManuals.com

First Gear Engaged

1 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 11 - PRESSURE HOLDING VALVE

The TCM monitors the activation sequence via the speed of the input shaft, which slows down as the frictional
connection in the multiple-disc holding clutch increases. When the speed drops to the specified level, the TCM shuts
off the power to the 3-4 shift solenoid valve (10). The spring chamber of the shift valve B2 (9) is depressurized and
switches downwards. This connects the line to the opposing face of the piston B2 (6) with the pressure holding
valve (11). The pressure on the opposing face of the piston B2 (6) drops to a residual pressure.
The working pressure (p-A) is formed and travels via the 2-3 holding pressure shift valve, the 2-3 command valve
and the ball valve (16) to multi-plate clutch K3 (4) and via the 3-4 command valve (13) to the end face of the 3-4
shift pressure shift valve (14). The 3-4 shift pressure shift valve (14) is moved against the force of the spring
towards the right. At the same time the 3-4 solenoid valve (10) is energized. This allows shift valve pressure (p-SV)
to enter the spring chamber of the shift valve B2 (9) and to reach the end face of the 3-4 command valve (13). The
shift valve B2 (9) is held in the upper position and the 3-4 command valve (13) switches towards the right. At the
end face of the 3-4 shift pressure shift valve (14) the working pressure (p-A) is replaced by shift valve pressure
(p-SV).
The 3-4 command valve (13) moves to the left. Working pressure (p-A) travels via the holding pressure shift valve
(12) and the 3-4 command valve (13) to the piston of multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (5).
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION: Before attempting any repair on a NAG1 automatic transmission, check for Diagnostic Trouble
Codes with the appropriate scan tool.

Transmission malfunctions may be caused by these general conditions:

Poor engine performance.
Improper adjustments.
Hydraulic malfunctions.
Mechanical malfunctions.
Electronic malfunctions.
Transfer case performance (if equipped).
Diagnosis of these problems should always begin by checking the easily accessible variables: fluid level and con-
dition, gearshift cable adjustment. Then perform a road test to determine if the problem has been corrected or if
more diagnosis is necessary.

PRELIMINARY
Two basic procedures are required. One procedure for vehicles that are drivable and an alternate procedure for
disabled vehicles (will not back up or move forward).
ProCarManuals.com

VEHICLE IS DRIVABLE
1. Check for transmission fault codes using the appropriate scan tool.
2. Check fluid level and condition.
3. Adjust gearshift cable if complaint was based on delayed, erratic, or harsh shifts.
4. Road test and note how transmission upshifts, downshifts, and engages.

VEHICLE IS DISABLED
1. Check fluid level and condition.
2. Check for broken or disconnected gearshift cable.
3. Check for cracked, leaking cooler lines, or loose or missing pressure-port plugs.
4. Raise and support vehicle on safety stands, start engine, shift transmission into gear, and note following:
a. If propeller shaft turns but wheels do not, problem is with differential or axle shafts.
b. If propeller shaft does not turn and transmission is noisy, stop engine. Remove oil pan, and check for debris.
If pan is clear, remove transmission and check for damaged driveplate, converter, oil pump, or input shaft.
c. If propeller shaft does not turn and transmission is not noisy, perform hydraulic-pressure test to determine if
problem is hydraulic or mechanical.

ROAD TESTING
Before road testing, be sure the fluid level and control cable adjustments have been checked and adjusted if nec-
essary. Verify that all diagnostic trouble codes have been resolved.
Observe engine performance during the road test. A poorly tuned engine will not allow accurate analysis of trans-
mission operation.
Operate the transmission in all gear ranges. Check for shift variations and engine flare which indicates slippage.
Note if shifts are harsh, spongy, delayed, early, or if part throttle downshifts are sensitive.
Slippage indicated by engine flare, usually means clutch, overrunning clutch, or line pressure problems.
A slipping clutch can often be determined by comparing which internal units are applied in the various gear ranges.
The Clutch Application chart CLUTCH APPLICATION provides a basis for analyzing road test results.
CLUTCH APPLICATION

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION

Harsh N-D Engagement 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
Harsh N-R Engagement calibration. software. Perform the TCM
ProCarManuals.com

adaptation procedure. (Refer to

8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Transmission in limp-home mode. 2. Check TCM for DTCs. Repair
as needed.
3. Driveline lash/movement. 3. Check engine mounts,
transmission mount, driveshaft
couplings, rear crossmember
mounts, axle mounts and axle
lash.
4. Converter clutch or lock up control 4. Perform converter clutch
valve malfunction. diagnostics test. Inspect valve
body for stuck or sticky lock up
control valve. If valve motion is
free, replace lock up solenoid
and retest.
5. Valve Body Malfunction. 5. Inspect valve body for stuck
or sticky regulator valve.
6. Clutch or planetary component 6. Remove, disassemble and
damage. repair transmission as
necessary.
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Delayed N-D or N-R 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
Engagement calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Torque converter fluid drain back, 2. If vehicle moves normally
delayed soft engagement. after 3 seconds of shifting into
gear, no repair is necessary. If
longer, inspect pump for worn
bushing.
3. Fluid Level Low. 3. Check and adjust fluid level.
(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
4. Filter plugged. 4. Check TC out pressure, if <
10psi, check for plugged filter.
Replace if needed.
ProCarManuals.com

5. Filter damaged or missing, 5. Check for damaged/missing

missing o-ring. filter or cut/missing o-ring.
6. Valve Body Malfunction. 6. Inspect valve body for stuck/
sticky regulator valve or shift
group valves.
7. Oil pump gears worn/damaged. 7. Inspect pump for damage or
excessive clearances. Replace
if needed.
No Drive or Reverse 1. Fluid level low. 1. Check and adjust fluid level.
Engagement (vehicle will (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
not move) AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. Misadjusted/damaged shift cable. 2. Inspect shift system. Adjust
and/or replace worn/damaged
parts.
3. Filter plugged. 3. Check TC out pressure, if <
10psi, check for plugged filter.
Replace if needed.
4. Filter damaged or missing, 4. Check for damaged/missing
missing filter o-ring. filter or cut/missing o-ring.
5 Hydraulic system-Low/no line 5. Remove valve body. Inspect
pressure. or sticky/stuck regulator valve.
If valve motion is free, replace
line pressure solenoid and
retest. If condition still exists
check for worn/damaged pump.
Replace pump assembly if
needed.
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Shudder garage shift R-D 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
or D-R calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Customer applying throttle while 2. Instruct customer to wait until
shift is in progress. shift is complete prior to
applying throttle.
Harsh rolling garage shift 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
R-D or D-R calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Customer shifting into desired 2. Instruct customer to only shift
range with vehicle motion. into the desired range with the
ProCarManuals.com

vehicle stopped and the service

brake applied.
3. Transmission in limp-home mode. 3. Check TCM for DTCs. Repair
as needed.
Engine stalls when 1. Converter clutch or lock up control 1. Perform converter clutch
transmission is shifted into valve malfunction. diagnostics test. Inspect valve
R or D. body for stuck or sticky lock up
control valve. If valve motion is
free, replace lock up solenoid
and retest.
2. Defective torque converter. 2. Replace torque converter.
Clunk/click noise during 1. Stick-slip condition between output 1. Replace output flange and
garage shift from R-D or flange and output shaft nut upon nut.
D-R torque reversal from R to D or D to
R. Click on first launch.
Harsh Upshift or downshift 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Valve body malfunction. 2. Inspect valve body for
sticky/stuck valves. Repair as
needed. If valve motion is free,
replace shift pressure solenoid
and line pressure solenoid and
retest.
3. Damaged or misbuilt clutch. 3. Remove, disassemble and
repair transmission as needed.
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
EMCC Shudder 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Fluid condition, contamination or 2. Change fluid per service
wrong type. manual procedures. (Refer to
21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. Valve body malfunction. 3. Remove valve body. Inspect
for sticky/stuck lock up control
valve. If valve motion is free,
replace the lock up solenoid
and retest.
4. Defective torque converter. 4. Replace torque converter.
Grating or Scraping Noise 1. Torque converter bolts contacting 1. Dust shield bent. Replace if
ProCarManuals.com

proportional to engine dust shield. needed. Torque converter bolt

speed backed out. Replace with new
bolt and torque to proper level.
2. Damaged/broken drive plate. 2. Inspect driveplate. Replace if
needed.
Grating or Scraping Noise 1. Driveshaft or rear axle noise. 1. Check driveshaft, center
proportional to transmission bearing and axle for noise or
output speed contact with other components.
2. Transmission output bearing 2. Replace output bearing and
noise. retest.
3. Internal transmission damage. 3. Remove, disassemble and
repair transmission as needed.
High pitched whine/noise 1. Fluid level low. 1. Check and adjust fluid level.
related to engine speed (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. Transmission in limp-home mode. 2. Check TCM for DTCs. Repair
as needed.
3. Filter plugged. 3. Check TC out pressure, if <
10psi, check for plugged filter.
Replace if needed.
4. Filter damaged or missing. 4. Check for damaged/missing
filter or cut/missing o-ring.
5. Oil pump bushing worn/ damaged. 5. Visually inspect for worn or
damaged pump bushing.
Replace pump assembly if
needed.
6. Oil pump gears worn/ damaged. 6. Inspect for worn or damaged
pump gears. Replace pump
assembly if needed.
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Slips on 1-2 upshift 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Fluid level low. 2. Check and adjust fluid level.
(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. Filter damaged or missing. 3. Check for damaged/missing
filter or cut/missing o-ring.
4. Valve body malfunction. 4. Check for sticky/stuck 2-3
shift pressure valve or regulator
valve.
5. F1 or K1 clutch damaged. 5. Disassemble transmission
inspect for damaged F1 or K1
clutch. Repair as needed.
ProCarManuals.com

Slips on 2-3 upshift 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Fluid level low. 2. Check and adjust fluid level.
(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. Filter damaged or missing. 3. Check for damaged/missing
filter or cut/missing o-ring.
4. Valve body malfunction. 4. Check for sticky/stuck 2-3
shift pressure valve or regulator
valve.
5. F2 or B2 clutch damaged. 5. Disassemble transmission,
inspect for damaged F2 or B2
clutch. Repair as needed.
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Slips on 3-4 upshift 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Fluid level low. 2. Check and adjust fluid level.
(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. Filter damaged or missing. 3. Check for damaged/missing
filter or cut/missing o-ring.
4. Valve body malfunction. 4. Check for sticky/stuck 2-3
shift pressure valve or regulator
valve.
5. K3 or B2 clutch damaged. 5. Disassemble transmission,
inspect for damaged K3 or B2
clutch. Repair as needed.
ProCarManuals.com

Slips on 4-5 upshift 1. Transmission adaptation/ 1. Check for latest level TCM
calibration. software. Perform the TCM
adaptation procedure. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
2. Fluid level low. 2. Check and adjust fluid level.
(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. Filter damaged or missing. 3. Check for damaged/missing
filter or cut/missing o-ring.
4. Valve body malfunction. 4. Check for sticky/stuck 2-3
shift pressure valve or regulator
valve.
5. B1 or K1 clutch damaged. 5. Disassemble transmission,
inspect for damaged B1 or K1
clutch. Repair as needed.
In-gear shudder on heavy 1. Fluid level low. 1. Check and adjust fluid level.
acceleration (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. Filter damaged or missing. 2. Check for damaged/missing
filter or cut/missing o-ring.
No Drive engagement 1. Customer shifting into N at vehicle 1. Instruct the customer that
following a shift to N speeds greater than 25mph and they should not shift into N at
tipping in on the throttle. vehicle speeds greater 25mph.
2. Shift system malfunction. 2. Inspect shift system for
proper adjustment or damage.
Check shifter for DTCs. Repair
as needed.
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Reverse gear position 1. Customer shifting into R at vehicle 1. Instruct customer that R
blocked engagement when speeds greater than 7mph. shifter position is blocked at
moving shift lever from D vehicle speeds greater than
position 7mph.
2. Shift system malfunction. 2. Inspect shift system for
proper adjustment or damage.
Check shifter for DTCs. Repair
as needed.
No Engine Cranking in P or 1. Gearshift cable adjustment. 1. Adjust shift cable and retest.
N 2. Shift system malfunction. 2. Check shifter DTCs. Inspect
shift cable and lever assembly.
Adjust and/or replace worn/
damaged parts.
3. Valve body malfunction. 3. Starter lockout contact
malfunction. Remove valve
body, replace lead frame
assembly.
ProCarManuals.com
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Fluid Leak 1. Leak in area of bell housing. 1. Check bolt torque on internal
bell housing bolts. If loose,
replace fastener and torque to
proper level. If bolts are to
proper torque level, check
pump outer seal and impeller
seal. Replace if needed.
2. Leak in area of control unit(valve 2. Check connector for
body) electrical connector. damaged(cut) or missing
o-rings. Replace as needed.
3. Leak in area of pan gasket. 3. Check for proper torque on
oil pan clamps. Check for
mis-positioned or rolled gasket.
Repair as needed.
3. Free Wheeling Clutch F2 3. Replace Free Wheeling
Defective. Clutch F2, Hollow Shaft, and
Rear Sun Gear/Inner Disc
Carrier K3.
4. Leak in area of park guide plug. 4. Remove park guide plug.
Check for damaged(cut) or
ProCarManuals.com

missing o-ring. If o-ring is in

good condition, install new plug.
5. Leak in area of shift lever. 5. Check for damaged shift
lever seal or damaged lever.
Repair as needed.
6. Leak in area of output flange. 6. Check for worn/damaged
slinger seal and output seal.
Visually inspect output flange
seal surface for damage.
Repair as needed.
7. Leak in area of transmission vent. 7. Check fluid level for overfill
condition. Adjust as needed. If
fluid level is within specification,
ride check vehicle. Monitor
transmission temperature. If
high operating temperatures are
observed, fluid may be
contaminated or cooling system
malfunctioning. Change fluid
per service manual procedures.
Refer to cooling system
diagnostics if needed.
8. Leak in area of transmission fill 8. Inspect fill tube cap for
tube. proper installation. Inspect fill
tube grommet between case
and fill tube for leakage. Repair
as needed.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ALUMINUM THREAD REPAIR
Damaged or worn threads in the aluminum transmission case and valve body can be repaired by the use of Heli-
Coils™, or equivalent. This repair consists of drilling out the worn-out damaged threads. Then tap the hole with a
special Heli-Coil™ tap, or equivalent, and installing a Heli-Coil™ insert, or equivalent, into the hole. This brings the
hole back to its original thread size.
Heli-Coil™, or equivalent, tools and inserts are readily available from most automotive parts suppliers.

REMOVAL
Note: If the transmission is being reconditioned (clutch/seal replacement) or replaced, it is necessary to
perform the TCM Adaptation Procedure using the scan tool (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CON-
TROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Mark propeller shaft (1) and the transmission
flange (4) for assembly alignment.
4. Remove the bolts (2) holding the rear propeller
shaft coupler (3) to the transmission flange (4).
5. Slide the propeller shaft (1) rearward until the cou-
pler clears the propeller shaft pilot (5) on the trans-
ProCarManuals.com

mission output shaft.

6. Remove the bolts (2) holding the starter motor (1)

to the transmission. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
STARTING/STARTER MOTOR - REMOVAL)
7. Remove the starter (1) from the transmission
starter pocket and safely relocate.
8. Remove the bolt (2) holding the torque converter
access cover (1) to the transmission.
9. Remove the torque converter access cover (1)
from the transmission.

10. Rotate crankshaft in clockwise direction until con-

verter bolts (1) are accessible. Then remove bolts
ProCarManuals.com

(1) one at a time. Rotate crankshaft with socket

wrench on dampener bolt.

11. Disconnect the gearshift cable (1) from the trans-

mission manual valve lever (3).
12. Loosen the bolts holding the shift cable retaining
strap (2) to the transmission.
13. Remove the shift cable (1) from the transmission.

14. Remove bolt (3) and screw (1) holding the heat
shield (2) to the transmission.
15. Remove the heat shield (2) from the transmission.

16. Disconnect 13-pin plug connector (1). Turn bayo-

net lock of guide bushing (2) anti-clockwise.
ProCarManuals.com

17. Remove the 13-pin connector (1) from the

transmission.

18. Disconnect transmission fluid cooler lines (1) at

transmission fittings (2) and clips (3).
19. Disconnect the transmission vent hose from the
transmission.
20. Support rear of engine with safety stand or jack.
21. Raise transmission slightly with service jack to
relieve load on crossmember and supports.
22. Remove bolts (2) securing rear support and cush-
ion (3) to transmission crossmember (1).
23. Remove bolts attaching crossmember (1) to frame
and remove crossmember.

24. Remove the bolts (1) holding the engine oil pan
(2) to the transmission (3).
ProCarManuals.com

25. Remove all remaining bolts (2) holding the engine

(1) to the transmission (3).
26. Carefully work transmission and torque converter
assembly rearward off engine block dowels.
27. Hold torque converter in place during transmission
removal.
28. Lower transmission and remove assembly from
under the vehicle.
29. To remove torque converter, carefully slide torque
converter out of the transmission.
DISASSEMBLY
Note: If the transmission is being reconditioned (clutch/seal replacement) or replaced, it is necessary to
perform the TCM Adaptation Procedure using the scan tool (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CON-
TROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

Note: Tag all clutch pack assemblies, as they are removed, for reassembly identification.

1. Remove the torque converter (1).

ProCarManuals.com

2. Place transmission in a vertical position.

3. Measure input shaft end play as follows:
a. Attach Adapter 8266-18 (2) to Handle 8266-8
(1).
b. Attach dial indicator C-3339 (3) to Handle
8266-8 (1).
c. Install the assembled tool onto the input shaft
of the transmission and tighten the retaining
screw on Adapter 8266-18 (2) to secure it to
the input shaft.
d. Position the dial indicator plunger against a flat
spot on the oil pump and zero the dial indica-
tor.
e. Move the input shaft in and out. Record the
maximum travel for assembly reference.
4. Loosen guide bushing (12) and remove from trans-
mission housing.
5. Detach oil pan (5).
6. Remove oil filter (4).
7. Unscrew Torx socket bolts (3) and remove electro-
hydraulic unit (2).

1 - HEAT SHIELD
ProCarManuals.com

2 - ELECTROHYDRAULIC UNIT
3 - BOLT
4 - OIL FILTER
5 - OIL PAN
6 - CLAMPING ELEMENT
7 - BOLT
8 - DRAIN PLUG
9 - DRAIN PLUG GASKET
10 - 13-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR
11 - BOLT
12 - GUIDE BUSHING

8. Place the transmission in PARK to prepare for the

removal of the output shaft nut.
9. Remove the nut holding the propeller shaft flange
to the output shaft and remove the flange.
10. Remove the transmission rear oil seal with a suit-
able slide hammer and screw.
11. Remove the transmission output shaft washer. Be
sure to tag the washer since it is very similar to
the geartrain end-play shim and they must not be
interchanged.
12. Remove the transmission rear output shaft bear-
ing retaining ring (1).
13. Position Bearing Remover 9082 (1) over the inner
race of the output shaft bearing (3).
ProCarManuals.com

14. Slide the collar (3) on the Bearing Remover 9082

(1) downward over the fingers (4) of the tool.
15. Remove the output shaft bearing (3).
16. Remove the geartrain end-play shim from the out-
put shaft. Be sure to tag the shim since it is very
similar to the output shaft washer and they must
not be interchanged.
ProCarManuals.com
ProCarManuals.com

Remove K1, K2, and K3 Clutches

1 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 5 - THRUST WASHER

2 - SUN GEAR OF FRONT PLANETARY GEAR SET 6 - FRONT PLANETARY GEAR SET, DRIVING CLUTCH K2, AND
INPUT SHAFT
3 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3, OUTPUT SHAFT , AND CENTER AND 7 - SEALING RINGS
REAR PLANETARY GEAR SETS
4 - THRUST NEEDLE BEARING

17. Remove the bolts holding the transmission housing to the converter housing from inside the converter housing.
18. Stand the transmission upright on the converter housing. Be sure to use suitable spacers between the bench
surface and the converter housing since the input shaft protrudes past the front surface of the housing.
19. Remove the remaining bolts holding the transmission housing to the converter housing.
20. Remove the transmission housing from the converter housing.
21. Remove output shaft with center and rear gear set and clutch K3 (3).
22. Remove thrust needle bearing (4) and thrust washer (5).
23. Remove input shaft with clutch K2 and front gear set (6).
24. Remove clutch K1 (1).
ProCarManuals.com

Remove Holding Clutch B1 and Oil Pump

1 - BOLTS - M6X32 4 - BOLTS - M8X35

2 - CONVERTER HOUSING 5 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
3 - INTERMEDIATE PLATE 6 - OIL PUMP

25. Unscrew Torx socket bolts (4) and remove oil pump (6). Screw two opposed bolts into the oil pump housing and
press the oil pump out of the converter housing by applying light blows with a plastic hammer.
26. Remove and discard the torque converter hub seal and the oil pump outer o-ring seal from the oil pump.
27. Unscrew Torx socket bolts (1) and remove multiple-disc holding clutch B1 (5) from converter housing. Screw
two opposed bolts into the multiple-disc holding clutch B1 (5) and separate from the converter housing by
applying light blows with a plastic hammer.
28. Detach intermediate plate (3) from converter housing (2).
ProCarManuals.com

Remove B2, B3, and Parking Gear

1 - SNAP-RING 5 - PARK GEAR

2 - HOLDING CLUTCH B3 DISCS 6 - TRANSMISSION HOUSING
3 - SPRING WASHER 7 - BOLTS - M8X60
4 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2

29. Remove multiple-disc pack B3 (2) and spring washer (3) by removing snap-ring (1) in transmission housing. To
facilitate removal of the snap-ring (1), compress the multiple-disc pack B3 (2). Note which clutch disc is
removed just prior to the spring washer (3) for re-assembly. If the clutch discs are re-used, this disc must be
returned to its original position on top of the spring washer.
30. Unscrew Torx socket bolts (7).
31. Remove multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (4) from transmission housing. The externally toothed disc carrier for
multiple-disc holding clutch B2 is also the piston for multiple-disc holding clutch B3.
32. Remove parking lock gear (5).

ASSEMBLY
Note: If the transmission is being reconditioned (clutch/seal replacement) or replaced, it is necessary to
perform the TCM Adaptation Procedure using the scan tool (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CON-
TROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
ProCarManuals.com

Install B2, B3, and Parking Gear

1 - SNAP-RING 5 - PARK GEAR

2 - HOLDING CLUTCH B3 DISCS 6 - TRANSMISSION HOUSING
3 - SPRING WASHER 7 - BOLTS - M8X60
4 - HOLDING CLUTCH B2

1. Insert parking lock gear (5).

2. Install multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (4) in transmission housing (6).
3. Screw in both Torx socket bolts (7). Tighten the bolts to 16 N·m (141 in.lbs.).
Note: During the measurement the snap ring (7)
must contact the upper bearing surface of the
groove in the outer multiple-disc carrier (8).

Note: Pay attention to sequence of discs. If the

original clutch discs are reused, be sure to return
the disc identified on disassembly as belonging
on top of the spring washer (4) to its original loca-
tion. Place new friction multiple-discs in ATF fluid
for one hour before installing.

4. Insert and measure spring washer (4) and multiple-

disc pack B3 (2, 6).
a. Put multiple-discs for multiple-disc holding
clutch B3 together in the sequence shown in
the illustration and insert individually. 1 - OUTER DISC - 6.5 MM 5 - PISTON
(0.256 IN.)
b. 2 - OUTER DISCS - 1.8 MM 6 - FRICTION DISCS
(0.071 IN.)
3 - OUTER DISCS - 1.8 MM 7 - SNAP-RING
CAUTION: Apply only light pressure (less than 10 (0.071 IN.)
N (3 lbs.) of force) to the clutch pack when mea- 4 - SPRING WASHER 8 - B3 DISC CARRIER
suring the clutch clearance with the feeler gauge.
Applying excessive force to the clutch will give an incorrect reading and lead to a transmission failure.Us-
ProCarManuals.com

ing a feeler gauge, determine the play L at three points between the snap ring (7) and outer multiple-disc
(1). B3 clutch clearance should be 1.0-1.4 mm (0.039-0.055 in.). Adjust the clearance as necessary.

c. Adjust with snap-ring (7), if necessary. Snap-rings are available in thicknesses of 3.2 mm (0.126 in.), 3.5 mm
(0.138 in.), 3.8 mm (0.150 in.), 4.1 mm (0.162 in.), 4.4 mm (0.173 in.), and 4.7 mm (0.185 in.).

5. Check that the K1 clutch feed hole (1) in the inner

hub of clutch B1 is free before installing clutch B1.
ProCarManuals.com

Install Holding Clutch B1 and Oil Pump

1 - BOLTS - M6X32 4 - BOLTS - M8X35

2 - CONVERTER HOUSING 5 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1
3 - INTERMEDIATE PLATE 6 - OIL PUMP

6. Place intermediate plate (3) on converter housing (2) and align.

Note: The intermediate plate can generally be used several times. The plate must not be coated with addi-
tional sealant

7. Install the holding clutch B1 (5) onto the converter housing and intermediate plate. Installed position of clutch B1
in relation to converter housing is specified by a plain dowel pin in clutch B1 (arrow).
8. Install the bolts to hold clutch B1 (5) to the converter housing.
9. Securely tighten multiple-disc holding clutch B1 (5) on converter housing (2) to 10 N·m (88.5 in.lbs.).
10. Install new torque converter hub seal (1) into the
oil pump using Seal Installer 8902A.
11. Install new oil pump outer o-ring seal onto oil
pump.
12. Install oil pump (6) and securely tighten. Tighten
the oil pump bolts to 20 N·m (177 in.lbs.).
ProCarManuals.com

Install K1, K2, and K3 Clutches

1 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 5 - THRUST WASHER

13. Using grease, insert sealing rings (7) in the groove so that the joint remains together.
14. Install the K1 (1) clutch onto the B1 clutch.
15. Install input shaft with clutch K2 (6) and front gear set (1).
16. Install front washer (5) and thrust needle bearing (4).
17. Install output shaft with center and rear gear set and clutch K3 (3).

18. Using grease, install both Teflon rings in the

groove at the rear of the output shaft so that the
joint stays together.
19. Mount transmission housing on converter housing.
20. Screw in Torx socket bolts through the transmis-
sion housing into the converter housing. Tighten
the bolts to 20 N·m (177 in.lbs.).

Note: Verify that there are no nicks or other irreg-

ularities in the surface of the transmission case
that will cause an inaccurate measurement.

21. Measure end-play between park pawl gear and

grooved ball bearing in order to select the proper
geartrain end-play shim.
22. Place Gauge Bar 6311 (1) on transmission hous-
ing. Using a depth gauge, measure from the
gauge bar (1) to the parking lock gear (2).
ProCarManuals.com

23. Using a depth gauge, measure from the Gauge

Bar 6311 (1) to the contact surface of the output
shaft bearing (2) in the transmission housing.
24. Subtract the first figure from the second figure to
determine the current end-play of the transmis-
sion. Select a shim such that the end-play will be
0.3-0.5 mm (0.012-0.020 in.). Shims are available
in thicknesses of 0.2 mm (0.008 in.), 0.3 mm
(0.012 in.), 0.4 mm (0.016 in.), and 0.5 mm (0.020
in.).
25. Install the selected end-play shim.

26. Screw in Torx socket bolts through the converter

housing into the transmission housing. Tighten the
bolts to 20 N·m (177 in.lbs.).
27. Install output shaft bearing (2) in rear transmission
housing. Using Bearing Installer 9287 (1), install
the output shaft bearing (2) into the transmission
housing. The closed side of the plastic cage
must point towards the parking lock gear.

28. Install the retaining ring (1). Ensure that the

retaining ring is seated correctly in the groove.
29. Check that there is no play between the bearing
and the retaining ring using feeler gauge.
30. There must be no play between the retaining ring
and the bearing. If the ring cannot be installed, a
thinner ring must be used. If there is play between
the ring and the bearing, a thicker ring must be
installed. Retaining rings are available in thick-
nesses of 2.0 mm (0.079 in.), 2.1 mm (0.083 in.),
and 2.2 mm (0.087 in.).

31. Rotate the transmission so that the bellhousing is

pointed upward and ensuring that the output shaft
ProCarManuals.com

is allowed to move freely.

32. Measure input shaft end-play.

Note: If end-play is incorrect, transmission is

incorrectly assembled, or the geartrain end-play
shim is incorrect. The geartrain end-play shim is
selective.

a. Attach Adapter 8266-18 (2) to Handle 8266-8

(1).
b. Attach dial indicator C-3339 (3) to Handle
8266-8 (1).
c. Install the assembled tool onto the input shaft
of the transmission and tighten the retaining
screw on Adapter 8266-18 to secure it to the
input shaft.
d. Position the dial indicator plunger against a flat
spot on the oil pump and zero the dial indica-
tor.
e. Move input shaft in and out and record reading. End play should be 0.3-0.5 mm (0.012-0.020 in.). Adjust as
necessary.
33. Install the output shaft washer onto the output
shaft.
34. Install a new transmission rear seal into the trans-
mission case with Seal Installer 8902A (1).

35. Place the transmission in PARK to prepare for the

installation of the output shaft nut.
36. Install the propeller shaft flange onto the output
shaft and install an new flange nut. Tighten the
flange nut to 120 N·m (88.5 ft.lbs.).
ProCarManuals.com

37. Place the Staking Tool 9078 (2) and Driver Handle
C-4171 onto the output shaft.
38. Rotate the Staking Tool 9078 (2) until the align-
ment pin (3) engages the output shaft notch (4).

39. Press downward on the staking tool (1) until the

staking pin (3) contacts the output shaft nut flange
(2).
40. Strike the Driver handle C-4171 with a suitable
hammer until the output shaft nut is securely
staked to the output shaft.
41. Install electrohydraulic unit (2). Tighten the bolts
to 8 N·m (71 in.lbs.).
42. Install oil filter (4).
43. Install oil pan (5). Tighten the bolts to 8 N·m (71
in.lbs.).
44. Install guide bushing (12).

1 - HEAT SHIELD
ProCarManuals.com

2 - ELECTROHYDRAULIC UNIT
3 - BOLT
4 - OIL FILTER
5 - OIL PAN
6 - CLAMPING ELEMENT
7 - BOLT
8 - DRAIN PLUG
9 - DRAIN PLUG GASKET
10 - 13-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR
11 - BOLT
12 - GUIDE BUSHING

45. Install the torque converter.

INSTALLATION
1. Check torque converter hub and hub drive flats for sharp edges burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and
flats with 320/400 grit paper and crocus cloth if necessary. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging pump
seal at installation.
2. If a replacement transmission is being installed, transfer any components necessary, such as the manual shift
lever and shift cable bracket, from the original transmission onto the replacement transmission.
3. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid.

4. Place torque converter (1) in position in transmis-

sion (2).

CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or con-

verter hub while inserting torque converter into
the front of the transmission.

5. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening.

6. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump.
7. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate con-
verter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump
gears.
ProCarManuals.com

8. Check converter seating with a scale and straight-

edge (A). Surface of converter lugs should be at
least 19 mm (3/4 in.) to rear of straightedge when
converter is fully seated.
9. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing.

10. Check condition of converter driveplate. Replace

the plate if cracked, distorted or damaged. Also
be sure transmission dowel pins are seated in
engine block and protrude far enough to hold
transmission in alignment.
11. Apply a light coating of Mopar High Temp
Grease to the torque converter hub pocket in the
rear pocket of the engine’s crankshaft.
12. Raise transmission (3) and align the torque con-
verter with the drive plate and the transmission
converter housing with the engine block (1).
13. Move transmission forward. Then raise, lower, or
tilt transmission to align the converter housing
with the engine block dowels.
14. Carefully work transmission forward and over
engine block dowels until converter hub is seated
in crankshaft. Verify that no wires, or the transmission vent hose, have become trapped between the engine
block and the transmission.
15. Install two bolts (2) to attach the transmission to the engine.
16. Install remaining torque converter housing to engine bolts (2). Tighten to 39 N·m (29 ft.lbs.).

17. Install rear transmission crossmember (1). Tighten

crossmember to frame bolts to 68 N·m (50 ft.lbs.).
18. Install rear support (3) to transmission. Tighten
bolts to 47 N·m (35 ft.lbs.).
19. Lower transmission onto crossmember and install
bolts attaching transmission mount to crossmem-
ber. Tighten clevis bracket to crossmember
bolts(2) to 47 N·m (39 ft.lbs.).
20. Remove engine support fixture.
ProCarManuals.com

21. Install the transmission (3) to engine oil pan (2)

bolts (1). Tighten to 39 N·m (29 ft.lbs.).
22. Connect the gearshift cable (1) to the transmis-
sion manual shift lever (3).

23. Check O-ring on plug connector (1) , and replace

if necessary.
ProCarManuals.com

24. Install the plug connector (1) into the guide bush-
ing (2). Turn bayonet lock of guide bushing (2)
clockwise to connect plug connector (1).

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

DESCRIPTION N·m Ft. Lbs. In. Lbs.

Bolt, B2 Clutch Carrier 16 - 141
Bolt, B1 Carrier to 10 - 88.5
Converter Housing
ProCarManuals.com

Bolt, Oil Pump 20 - 177

Nut, Propeller Flange 120 88.5 -
Bolt, Electrohydraulic Unit 8 - 71
Bolt, Transmission 20 - 177
Housing to Converter
Housing
Bolts, Oil Pan 8 - 71
Screws, Valve Body/ 4 - 35
Housing Side Cover
Bolt, Shift Plate 8 - 71
Bolt, Solenoid Leaf Spring 8 - 71
Nut, Shifter Mechanism to 7 - 65
Floor Pan
SPECIAL TOOLS - AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION - NAG1

Dial Indicator - C-3339 End Play Set - 8266

ProCarManuals.com

Adapter, Geartrain End-play - 8266-18

Driver Handle C-4171

Bar, Gauge - 6311

Compressor, Multi-use Spring - 8900

Remover, Bearing - 9082

Tool, Pressing - 8901

ProCarManuals.com

Installer, Bearing - 9287

Installer, Seal - 8902A

Tool, Staking - 9078

MECHANISM-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
DESCRIPTION

The Brake Transmission Shifter/Ignition Interlock

(BTSI) is a cable operated system that prevents the
transmission gear shifter from being moved out of
PARK without the proper driver inputs. The system
also contains a solenoid that is integral to the shifter
assembly. The solenoid works in conjunction with the
park lock cable to permit shifter movement out of
PARK when the brake is depressed and prevents
shifter movement into REVERSE unless a shift into
REVERSE is permitted.
A BTSI override (2) is provided on the side of the
shifter mechanism (1) to allow the vehicle to be shifted
out of PARK in the event of an electrical failure.
ProCarManuals.com

OPERATION

The Brake Transmission Shifter/Ignition Interlock

(BTSI) is engaged whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (1) position. An additional electrically acti-
vated feature will prevent shifting out of the PARK
position unless the brake pedal is depressed at least
one-half inch. A solenoid in the shifter assembly is
energized when the ignition is in the ON position and
the brake pedal is depressed. When the key is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed, the
shifter is unlocked and will move into any position. The
interlock system also prevents the ignition switch from
being turned to the LOCK position, unless the shifter
is in the gated PARK position.
The following chart describes the normal operation of the Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system. If the
“expected response” differs from the vehicle’s response, then system repair and/or adjustment is necessary.

ACTION EXPECTED RESPONSE

1. Turn key to the ACC position and depress brake 1. Shifter CAN be shifted out of park.
pedal.
2. Turn key to the ON position, with foot off of brake 2. Shifter CANNOT be shifted out of park.
pedal.
3. Turn key to the ON position and depress the brake 3. Shifter CAN be shifted out of park.
pedal.
4. Leave shifter in any gear, except PARK , and try to 4. Key cannot be returned to the LOCK position.
return key to the LOCK position.
5. Return shifter to PARK and try to remove the key. 5. Key can be removed (after returning to LOCK
position).
6. With the key removed, and the brake depressed, try 6. Shifter cannot be shifted out of PARK .
to shift out of PARK .
NOTE: Any failure to meet these expected responses requires system adjustment or repair.

BTSI Override

In the event of an electrical failure, the vehicle can be

ProCarManuals.com

shifted out of PARK by using the following procedure.

1. Turn the key to the ACC or ON position.
2. Remove the liner to the cubby bin to the right side
of the shifter.
3. Depress the BTSI override (2) on the side of the
shifter assembly (1).
4. While the override is depressed, move the shifter
out of the PARK position.
5. Return the cubby bin liner to its original location.

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK

SYSTEM VERIFICATION
1. Verify that the key can only be removed in the PARK position
2. When the shift lever is in PARK, the ignition key cylinder should rotate freely from ACC to LOCK. When the
shifter is in any other gear or neutral position, the ignition key cylinder should not rotate to the LOCK position.
3. Shifting out of PARK should not be possible when the ignition key cylinder is in the ACC position and the brake
pedal is not depressed.
4. Shifting out of PARK should not be possible while applying normal force on the shift lever and ignition key cyl-
inder is in the ACC, ON, or START positions unless the foot brake pedal is depressed approximately 1/2 inch
(12mm).
5. Shifting out of PARK should not be possible when the ignition key cylinder is in the LOCK position, regardless of
the brake pedal position.
6. Shifting between any gears, NEUTRAL or into PARK may be done without depressing foot brake pedal with
ignition switch in ACC, ON, or START positions.

DIAGNOSTIC CHART

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

KEY WILL NOT ROTATE TO THE 1. Misadjusted Park Lock cable. 1. Adjust Park Lock cable. (Refer to
LOCK POSITION. 21 - TRANSMISSION AND
TRANSFER CASE/AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION/BRAKE
TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK SYSTEM -
ADJUSTMENTS)
2. Misadjusted gearshift cable. 2. Adjust gearshift cable. (Refer to
21 - TRANSMISSION AND
TRANSFER CASE/AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION/GEAR SHIFT
CABLE - ADJUSTMENTS)
3. Burrs on ignition key. 3. Remove burrs and cycle key
ProCarManuals.com

several times to verify operation.

4. Binding or broken components. 4. Inspect system components and
repair/replace components as
necessary.
VEHICLE WILL NOT START 1. Misadjusted gearshift cable. 1. Adjsut gearshift cable. (Refer to
UNLESS SHIFTER IS HELD 21 - TRANSMISSION AND
FORWARD, OR REARWARD, OF TRANSFER CASE/AUTOMATIC
THE PARK POSITION. TRANSMISSION/GEAR SHIFT
CABLE - ADJUSTMENTS)

ADJUSTMENTS - BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK

The park interlock cable is part of the brake/shift lever interlock system. Correct cable adjustment is important to
proper interlock operation. The gear shift and park lock cables must both be correctly adjusted in order to shift out
of PARK.

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove floor console as necessary for access to the park lock cable. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR
CONSOLE - REMOVAL)
2. Shift the transmission into the PARK position.
3. Turn ignition switch to LOCK position. Be sure ignition key cylinder is in the LOCK position. Cable will not
adjust correctly in any other position.

Note: If the key will not turn to the LOCK position, pull up on the cable lock button and manually move the
cable in and out until the key can be turned to the LOCK position.

4. Pull cable lock button up to release cable, if necessary.

5. Remove and discard the cable adjuster lock pin, if a new cable is being installed.
6. Ensure that the cable is free to self-adjust by pushing cable rearward and releasing.
7. Push lock button down until it snaps in place. The lock should be 1-2mm below the surface of the cylinderical
portion of the cable adjustment housing.
BTSI FUNCTION CHECK
1. Verify removal of ignition key allowed in PARK position only.
2. When the shift lever is in PARK, the ignition key cylinder should rotate freely LOCK position. When the shifter is
in any other position, the ignition key should not rotate to the LOCK position.
3. Shifting out of PARK should not be possible when the ignition key cylinder is in the ACC position and the brake
pedal is not depressed.
4. Shifting out of PARK should not be possible while applying normal force on the shift lever and ignition key cyl-
inder is in the ACC, ON, or START positions unless the foot brake pedal is depressed approximately 1/2 inch
(12mm).
5. Shifting out of PARK should not be possible when the ignition key cylinder is in the LOCK position, regardless of
the brake pedal position.
6. Shifting between any gears, NEUTRAL or into PARK may be done without depressing foot brake pedal with
ignition switch in ACC, ON, or START positions.
7. The floor shifter lever and gate positions should be in alignment with all transmission detent positions.
8. Engine starts must be possible with shifter lever in PARK or NEUTRAL gate positions only. Engine starts must
not be possible in any other gate positions other than PARK or NEUTRAL.
9. With the shifter lever handle in the:
PARK position- apply forward force on center of handle and remove pressure. Engine start must be possible.
PARK position- apply rearward force on center of handle and remove pressure. Engine start must be possible.
NEUTRAL position- engine start must be possible.
ProCarManuals.com

NEUTRAL position, engine running and brakes applied- Apply forward force on center of shift handle. Trans-
mission should not be able to shift into REVERSE detent.
UNIT-ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL
DESCRIPTION

The electrohydraulic control unit comprises the shift

plate (13) made from light alloy for the hydraulic con-
trol and an electrical control unit (12). The electrical
control unit (12) comprises of a supporting body made
of plastic, into which the electrical components (1 - 11)
are assembled. The supporting body is mounted on
the shift plate (13) and screwed to it.
Strip conductors inserted into the supporting body
make the connection between the electrical compo-
nents and a plug connector. The connection to the wir-
ing harness on the vehicle and the transmission
control module (TCM) is produced via this 13-pin plug
connector with a bayonet lock.
ProCarManuals.com

Electrical Unit Components

The electric valve control unit (7) consists of a plastic

shell which houses the RPM sensors (1,12), regulating
solenoid valves (3, 4), solenoid valves (5, 6, 10), the
TCC solenoid valve (11), the park/neutral contact (9),
and the transmission oil temperature sensor (8). Con-
ductor tracks integrated into the shell connect the
electric components to a plug connection (2). This
13-pin plug connection (2) establishes the connection
to the vehicle-side cable harness and to the transmis-
sion control module (TCM). With the exception of the
solenoid valves, all other electric components are
fixed to the conductor tracks.
ProCarManuals.com

HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

Working Pressure (Line Pressure or Operating Pressure) (p-A)

The working pressure provides the pressure supply to the hydraulic control and the transmission shift elements. It is
the highest hydraulic pressure in the entire hydraulic system. The working pressure is regulated at the working pres-
sure regulating valve in relation to the load and gear. All other pressures required for the transmission control are
derived from the working pressure.

Lubrication Pressure (p-Sm)

At the working pressure regulating valve surplus oil is diverted to the lubrication pressure regulating valve, from
where it is used in regulated amounts to lubricate and cool the mechanical transmission components and the torque
converter. Furthermore, the lubrication pressure (p-Sm) is also used to limit the pressure in the torque converter.

Shift Pressure (p-S)

The shift pressure is determined by the shift pressure regulating solenoid valve and the shift pressure regulating
valve. The shift pressure:
Regulates the pressure in the activating shift element during the shift phase.
Determines together with the modulating pressure the pressure reduction at the deactivating shift element as
regulated by the overlap regulating valve.
Initializes 2nd gear in limp-home mode.

Modulating Pressure (p-Mod)

The modulating pressure influences the size of the working pressure and determines together with the shift pressure
the pressure regulated at the overlap regulating valve. The modulating pressure is regulated at the modulating pres-
sure regulating solenoid valve, which is under regulating valve pressure. The modulating pressure is variable and
relative to the engine load.
Regulating Valve/Control Valve Pressure (p-RV)

The regulating valve pressure is regulated at the regulating valve pressure regulating valve in relation to the working
pressure (p-A) up to a maximum pressure of 8 bar (116 psi). It supplies the modulating pressure regulating solenoid
valve, the shift pressure regulating solenoid valve and the shift valve pressure regulating valve.

Shift Valve Pressure (p-SV)

The shift valve pressure (p-SV) is derived from the regulating valve pressure (p-RV), is regulated at the shift valve
pressure regulating valve and is then present at the:
1-2 and 4-5 shift solenoid valve.
3-4 shift solenoid valve.
2-3 shift solenoid valve.
Torque converter lockup solenoid valve.
3-4 and 2-3 shift pressure shift valve.
The shift valve pressure (p-SV) controls the command valves via the upshift/downshift solenoid valves.

Overlap Pressure (p-Ü)

The overlap pressure controls the shift component pressure reduction during a shift phase. The pressure in a shift
element as it disengages is controlled during the shift phase depending on engine load (modulating pressure) and
the pressure in the shift element as it engages. The adjusted pressure is inversely proportional to the transmission
capability of the shift element being engaged (controlled overlap).
ProCarManuals.com

Working Pressure Regulating Valve (Operating Pressure)

The working pressure regulating valve (4) is located in

the valve housing of the shift plate. It regulates the pri-
mary pressure of the hydraulic system.

1 - PRESSURE FROM K1/K2

2 - END FACE
3 - TO TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATING VALVE
4 - WORKING PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Regulating Valve
ProCarManuals.com

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 6 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH REGULATING

2 - TORQUE CONVERTER OUTPUT VALVE
3 - TORQUE CONVERTER INPUT 7 - OIL COOLER
4 - LUBRICATION 8 - LINE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
5 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP SOLENOID 9 - OIL PUMP

The torque converter lock-up clutch regulating valve (6) is located in the valve housing of the electrohydraulic con-
trol module. The valve is responsible for the hydraulic control of the torque converter lockup clutch and distribution
of the lubricating oil.
Overlap Regulating Valve

Each shift group is assigned one overlap regulating

valve (1). The 1-2 / 4-5 overlap regulating valve is
installed in the shift valve housing; the 2-3 and 3-4
overlap regulating valves are installed in the valve
housing. The overlap regulating valve regulates the
pressure reduction during a shift phase.

1 - OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE

2 - ANNULAR SURFACE ON OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE
ProCarManuals.com

Command Valve

1 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 3 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1

Each shift group possesses one command valve (3). The 1-2 / 4-5 and 2-3 command valves are installed in the shift
valve housing, the 3-4 command valve is installed in the valve housing. The command valve switches the shift
group from the stationary phase to the shift phase and back again.
Holding Pressure Shift Valve

Holding Pressure Shift Valve

ProCarManuals.com

1 - HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

Each shift group possesses one holding pressure shift valve (1). The 1-2 / 4-5 and 2-3 holding pressure shift valves
are installed in the shift valve housing; the 3-4 holding pressure shift valve is installed in the valve housing. The
holding pressure shift valve allocates the working pressure to one actuator of a shift group.
Shift Pressure Shift Valve

Shift Pressure Shift Valve

ProCarManuals.com

1 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE 3 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1

2 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 4 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

Each shift group possesses one shift pressure shift valve (4). The 1-2 / 4-5 and 2-3 shift pressure shift valves are
installed in the shift valve housing; the 3-4 shift pressure shift valve is installed in the valve housing. It assigns the
shift pressure (p-S) to the activating actuator and the overlap pressure (p-Ü) regulated by the overlap regulating
valve to the deactivating actuator.

Lubrication Pressure Regulating Valve

The lubrication pressure regulating valve (1) is located

in the valve housing of the electrohydraulic control
module. The valve controls the fluid to lubricate and
cool the mechanical part of the transmission, and lim-
its the pressure in the torque converter.
Shift Pressure Regulating Valve

The shift pressure regulating valve (1) is located in the

valve housing of the shift plate. It regulates the shift
pressure (p-S).

Regulating Valve Pressure Regulating Valve

The regulating valve pressure regulating valve (1) is

ProCarManuals.com

located in the valve housing of the electrohydraulic

control module. It regulates the regulating valve/con-
trol valve pressure (p-RV).

Shift Valve Pressure Regulating Valve

The shift valve pressure regulating valve (1) is located

in the valve housing of the electrohydraulic control
module. It regulates the shift valve pressure (p-SV).
OPERATION
ELECTRICAL CONTROL UNIT

Signals from the transmission control module (TCM)

are converted into hydraulic functions in the electric
valve control unit (7). The RPM sensors (1, 12), starter
interlock contact (9), and transmission oil temperature
sensor (8) of the electric valve control unit (7) supply
the TCM with input signals. The solenoid valves are
controlled by the TCM and trigger the hydraulic
functions.
ProCarManuals.com

HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

Working Pressure Regulating Valve (Line Pressure or Operating Pressure)

The working pressure (p-A) is regulated at the working

pressure regulating valve (4) in relation to load (mod-
ulating pressure, p-Mod) and gear (K1 or K2 pressure)
(1). The spring in the working pressure regulating
valve sets a minimum pressure level (basic pressure).
Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Regulating Valve
ProCarManuals.com

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH 6 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP CLUTCH REGULATING

2 - TORQUE CONVERTER OUTPUT VALVE
3 - TORQUE CONVERTER INPUT 7 - OIL COOLER
4 - LUBRICATION 8 - LINE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
5 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP SOLENOID 9 - OIL PUMP

The torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve (6) regulates the torque converter lock-up clutch working pres-
sure (p-TCC) in relation to the torque converter clutch control pressure (p-S/TCC). According to the size of the work-
ing pressure (p-A), the torque converter lockup clutch is either Engaged, Disengaged, or Slipping. When the
regulating valve (6) is in the lower position, lubricating oil flows through the torque converter and oil cooler (8) into
the transmission (torque converter lockup clutch unpressurized). In its regulating position (slipping, torque converter
lockup clutch pressurized), a reduced volume of lubricating oil flows through the annular passage (7) bypassing the
torque converter and passing direct through the oil cooler into the transmission. The rest of the lubricating oil is
directed via the throttle a into the torque converter in order to cool the torque converter lockup clutch.
Overlap Regulating Valve

During the shift phase the pressure in the deactivating

shift actuator is regulated in relation to the engine load
(modulating pressure, p-Mod) and the pressure in the
activating actuator. The regulated pressure is inversely
proportional to the transfer capacity of the activating
shift actuator (regulated overlap).

1 - OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE

2 - ANNULAR SURFACE ON OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE
ProCarManuals.com

Command Valve

1 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 3 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE

2 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1

When the end face is unpressurized (stationary phase), the working pressure (p-A) is directed to the actuated shift
element. If the end face of the command valve is subjected to the shift valve pressure (p-SV) (shift phase), then the
shift pressure (p-S) is switched to the activating element and the overlap pressure (p-Ü) is switched to the deacti-
vating element.
Shift Valve Holding Pressure

Shift Valve Holding Pressure

ProCarManuals.com

1 - HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

The holding pressure shift valve (1) is actuated by the pressures present at the end face in the actuators and a
spring. It assigns the working pressure (p-A) to the actuator with the higher pressure (taking into account the spring
force and the effective surface area). The other element of the shift group is then unpressurized. The valve switches
over only during the shift phase and only at a certain pressure ratio between the overlap pressure (p-Ü) and the
shift pressure (p-S).
Shift Pressure Shift Valve

Shift Pressure Shift Valve

ProCarManuals.com

1 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE 3 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1

2 - DRIVING CLUTCH K1 4 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE

When the multiple-disc brake B1 (3) is activated, the working pressure (p-A) is applied to the end face of the 1-2 /
4-5 shift pressure shift valve (4) via the command valve (1). Its shift state is maintained during the shift phase by
substituting the shift element pressure acting on its end face (and which is variable during the shift phase) with a
corresponding constant pressure. When the multi-plate clutch K1 (2) is activated, the end face of the shift valve is
unpressurized during the stationary and shift phases, so the shift state is maintained during the shift phase in this
case too.

Lubrication Pressure Regulating Valve

At the working pressure regulating valve surplus oil is

diverted to the lubrication pressure regulating valve
(1), from where the lubrication pressure (p-Sm) is
used in regulated amounts to supply the transmission
lubrication system including the torque converter.
Shift Pressure Regulating Valve

The shift pressure is determined by the shift pressure

regulating solenoid valve and the shift pressure regu-
lating valve (3). In addition, pressure from the clutch
K2 (1) is also present at the annular surface (2) of the
shift pressure regulating valve (3). This reduces the
shift pressure in 2nd gear.

Regulating Valve Pressure Regulating Valve

The regulating valve pressure (p-RV) is set at the reg-

ProCarManuals.com

ulating valve pressure regulating valve (1) in relation

to the working pressure (p-A) as far as the maximum
pressure.

Shift Valve Pressure Regulating Valve

The non-constant regulating valve pressure (p-RV) is

regulated to a constant shift valve pressure (p-SV) at
the shift valve pressure regulating valve (1) and is
used to supply the 1-2 and 4-5 / 3-4 / 2-3 solenoid
valves and the torque converter lockup clutch PWM
solenoid valve.
REMOVAL
1. Drain transmission oil by unscrewing oil drain plug
(8), if equipped.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Move selector lever to position P .

3. Raise vehicle.
4. Remove bolt (3) and screw (1) holding the heat
shield (2) to the transmission.
5. Disconnect 13-pin plug connector (1). Turn bayonet
lock of guide bushing (2) anti-clockwise.
6. Loosen guide bushing (2) and remove from trans-
mission housing.

7. Detach oil pan (5).

8. Remove oil filter (4).
9. Unscrew Torx socket bolts (3) and remove electro-
hydraulic control module (2).
ProCarManuals.com

1 - HEAT SHIELD
2 - ELECTROHYDRAULIC UNIT
3 - BOLT
4 - OIL FILTER
5 - OIL PAN
6 - CLAMPING ELEMENT
7 - BOLT
8 - DRAIN PLUG
9 - DRAIN PLUG GASKET
10 - 13-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR
11 - BOLT
12 - GUIDE BUSHING
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove electrohydraulic unit from the vehicle.
(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION - NAG1/ELECTROHYDRAULIC
UNIT - REMOVAL)
2. Remove solenoid caps (1, 2).
3. Unscrew Torx socket bolts (3, 4).

Note: Pay attention to the different lengths of the

Torx socket bolts.

4. Remove leaf springs (5).

5. Withdraw solenoid valves (6 - 11) from shift plate
(13).

Note: Check O-rings on solenoid valves for dam-

age and replace if necessary.

6. Bend away retaining lug on stiffening rib on trans-

mission oil temperature sensor.
7. Remove electrohydraulic control module (12) from
ProCarManuals.com

the shift plate (13).

Electrical Unit Components

1 - SOLENOID CAP
2 - SOLENOID CAP
3 - BOLT - M6X32
4 - BOLT - M6X30
5 - LEAF SPRING
6 - MODULATING PRESSURE REGULATING SOLENOID VALVE
7 - SHIFT PRESSURE REGULATING SOLENOID
8 - 3-4 SHIFT SOLENOID
9 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP SOLENOID
10 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID
11 - 2-3 SHIFT SOLENOID
12 - ELECTRICHYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE
13 - SHIFT PLATE
8. Note the locations of the major shift valve group
components for assembly reference.
A - Operating and Lubricating Pressure Regulating
valves and 2-3 Overlap valve
B - 1-2/4-5 Shift Group and Shift, Shift Valve, and
Regulating Valve Pressure Regulating Valves
C - 3-4 Shift Group
D - 2-3 Shift Group, TCC Lock-up, and B2 Regulat-
ing Valves
ProCarManuals.com

Note: Pay great attention to cleanliness for all

work on the shift plate. Fluffy cloths must not be
used. Leather cloths are particularly good. After
dismantling, all parts must be washed and blown
out with compressed-air, noting that parts may be
blown away.

9. Unbolt leaf spring (5).

10. Unscrew Torx bolts (1).
11. Remove valve housing (2) from valve body (4).
12. Remove sealing plate (3).
13. Remove the strainers (1, 2) for the modulating
pressure and shift pressure control solenoid
valves from the valve housing.
ProCarManuals.com

14. Remove the strainer (1) in the inlet to torque con-

verter lock-up control solenoid valve.

Note: A total of 12 valve balls are located in the

valve body, four made from plastic (4) and eight
from steel (1, 3).

15. Note the location of all check balls (1, 3, 4) and

the central strainer (2) for re-installation. Remove
all check balls (1, 3, 4) and the central strainer
(2).
ProCarManuals.com

Valve Body Components

1 - VALVE BODY 8 - SHIFT VALVE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE

2 - 1-2/4-5 COMMAND VALVE 9 - B2 SHIFT VALVE
3 - 1-2/4-5 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 10 - 2-3 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE
4 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 11 - 2-3 COMMAND VALVE
5 - 1-2/4-5 OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE, SLEEVE, AND PISTON 12 - 2-3 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE
6 - SHIFT PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE 13 - TCC LOCK-UP REGULATING VALVE
7 - REGULATING VALVE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE 14 - TCC DAMPER VALVE - if equipped

16. Remove the screws holding the side covers to the valve body and valve housing.
17. Remove all valves and springs from the valve body (1). Check all valves for ease of movement and shavings.

Note: The sleeves and pistons of the overlap regulating valves must not be mixed up.
ProCarManuals.com

Valve Housing Components

1 - 2-3 OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE, SLEEVE, AND PISTON 6 - 3-4 SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE
2 - VALVE HOUSING 7 - 3-4 OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE, SLEEVE, AND PISTON
3 - SELECTOR VALVE 8 - OPERATING PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
4 - 3-4 HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE 9 - LUBRICATING PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
5 - 3-4 COMMAND VALVE

18. Remove all valves and springs from the valve housing (2). Check all valves for ease of movement and
shavings.

19. Remove the pressure supply valve (1) from the

valve body.
ASSEMBLY
Note: Pay great attention to cleanliness for all work on the shift plate. Fluffy cloths must not be used.
Leather cloths are particularly good. After dismantling, all parts must be washed and blown out with com-
pressed-air, noting that parts may be blown away.

1. Install the pressure supply valve (1) into the valve

body.
ProCarManuals.com

Valve Body Components

1 - VALVE BODY 8 - SHIFT VALVE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE

2. Install all valves and springs from the valve body (1). Check all valves for ease of movement and shavings.
3. Install the screws to hold the side covers to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 4 N·m (35 in.lbs.).
ProCarManuals.com

Valve Housing Components

4. Install all valves and springs into the valve housing (2). Check all valves for ease of movement and shavings.
5. Install the screws to hold the side covers to the valve housing. Tighten the screws to 4 N·m (35 in.lbs.).
Note: A total of 12 valve balls are located in the
valve body, four made from plastic (4) and eight
from steel (1, 3).

6. Install all check balls (1, 3, 4) and the central

strainer (2).

7. Install the strainer (1) in the inlet to torque con-

verter lock-up control solenoid valve.
ProCarManuals.com

8. Position the sealing plate (3) onto the valve body

(4).
9. Install the valve housing (2) onto the valve body (4)
and sealing plate (3).
10. Install the shift plate Torx bolts (1). Tighten the
bolts to 8 N·m (71 in.lbs.).
11. Install leaf spring (5).
12. Install the strainers (1, 2) for the modulating pres-
sure and shift pressure control solenoid valves
into the valve housing.
ProCarManuals.com

13. Install the electrohydraulic control module (12)

onto the shift plate (13).
14. Bend the retaining lug on stiffening rib on trans-
mission oil temperature sensor to retain the elec-
trohydraulic control module.
15. Install the solenoid valves (6 - 11) into shift plate
(13).

Note: Check O-rings on solenoid valves for dam-

age and replace if necessary.

16. Install the leaf springs (5).

17. Install the Torx socket bolts (3, 4). Tighten the
bolts to 8 N·m (71 in.lbs.).

Note: Pay attention to the different lengths of the

Torx socket bolts.

18. Install the solenoid caps (1, 2).

19. Install the electrohydraulic unit into the vehicle.

Electrical Unit Components

1 - SOLENOID CAP
2 - SOLENOID CAP
3 - BOLT - M6X32
4 - BOLT - M6X30
5 - LEAF SPRING
6 - MODULATING PRESSURE REGULATING SOLENOID VALVE
7 - SHIFT PRESSURE REGULATING SOLENOID
8 - 3-4 SHIFT SOLENOID
9 - TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP SOLENOID
10 - 1-2/4-5 SHIFT SOLENOID
11 - 2-3 SHIFT SOLENOID
12 - ELECTRICHYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE
13 - SHIFT PLATE
INSTALLATION
1. Position the electrohydraulic unit in the transmis-
sion housing.
2. Insert selector valve (1) in driver of detent plate (2).
When installing the electrohydraulic control module
in the transmission housing, the plastic part of the
selector valve (1) must engage in the driver of the
detent plate (2).

3. Install the Torx socket bolts (3) and torque to 8

N·m (71 in.lbs.).
ProCarManuals.com

4. Install a new oil filter (4).

5. Install oil pan (5) and torque the oil pan bolts to 8
N·m (71 in.lbs.).
6. Install the oil drain plug (8) with a new drain plug
gasket (9). Torque the drain plug to 20 N·m (177
in.lbs.).
7. Install the guide bushing (2) into the transmission
housing and install the bolt (11) to hold the guide
bushing in place.

1 - HEAT SHIELD
2 - ELECTROHYDRAULIC UNIT
3 - BOLT
4 - OIL FILTER
5 - OIL PAN
6 - CLAMPING ELEMENT
7 - BOLT
8 - DRAIN PLUG
9 - DRAIN PLUG GASKET
10 - 13-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR
11 - BOLT
12 - GUIDE BUSHING
8. Check O-ring on plug connector (1), and replace if
necessary.
9. Install the plug connector (1) into the guide bushing
(2). Turn bayonet lock of guide bushing (2) clock-
wise to connect plug connector (1).

10. Position the heat shield (2) onto the transmission

housing and install the screw (1) and bolt (3) to
hold the shield in place.
11. Fill the transmission with the correct oil (Refer to
LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES -
ProCarManuals.com

DESCRIPTION) using the standard procedure

(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC -
NAG1/FLUID AND FILTER - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE - TRANSMISSION FILL).
FLUID AND FILTER
DESCRIPTION

The oil level control is located on the electrohydraulic

unit (4) and consists of the float (5) which is integrated
into the electrohydraulic unit. The float is positioned to
plug the opening (6) between the oil gallery (2) and
gearset chamber (1) so that the rotating gearsets do
not splash about in oil as the oil level rises. The oil
level control reduces power loss and prevents oil from
being thrown out of the transmission housing at high
oil temperatures.
ProCarManuals.com

OPERATION

With low oil levels, the lubricating oil which flows con-
stantly out of the gearset, flows back to oil gallery (2)
though the opening (6). If the oil level rises, the oil
presses the float (5) against the housing opening (6).
The float (5) therefore separates the oil gallery (2)
from the gearset chamber (1). The lubricating oil which
continues to flow out of the gearsets is thrown against
the housing wall, incorporated by the rotating parts
and flows back into the oil gallery (2) through the
upper opening (arrow).
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL
A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be
low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aer-
ates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid
overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes
fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be
mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful.

CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID

Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes.
1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal
failure.
2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of
a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and
lines caused by debris or kinked lines.
3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar
high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should
have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination
needed to handle heavy loads.
ProCarManuals.com

FLUID CONTAMINATION
Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of:
adding incorrect fluid
failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level
engine coolant entering the fluid
internal failure that generates debris
overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown)
failure to replace contaminated converter after repair
The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage,
abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using rec-
ommended fluids only.
The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign mate-
rial on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube
clean before withdrawing the dipstick.
Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace
the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission,
an overhaul is necessary.
The torque converter should be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary
because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants.

STANDARD PROCEDURE
CHECK OIL LEVEL
1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
2. Remove the dipstick tube cap.

WARNING: Risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine running. Risk of injury from con-
tusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure
vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not
touch hot or rotating parts.

3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position P .
4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling
5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil
Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil
level, repeat if necessary.

Note: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed.
ProCarManuals.com

NAG1 Transmission Fill Graph

6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool.

Note: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward
gear position. (Refer to 21 - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION- NAG1/TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR/
PARK-NEUTRAL SWITCH - OPERATION)

7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the
dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the
transmission oil level is correct.
8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level.
9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap.

TRANSMISSION FILL
To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure:
1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
2. Remove the dipstick tube cap.
3. Add following initial quantity of Mopar ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, to the transmission:
a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 7.4 L (14.8 pts.) of transmission fluid to transmission.
b. If the transmission was completely overhauled or the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 8.1 L
(17.1 pts.) of transmission fluid to transmission.
4. Check the transmission fluid (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FLUID AND FLUID - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - CHECK OIL LEVEL) and adjust as required.

FLUID/FILTER SERVICE
1. Run the engine until the transmission oil reaches
operating temperature.
2. Raise and support vehicle.
3. Remove the bolts (5) and retainers (4) holding the
oil pan to the transmission.
4. Remove the transmission oil pan (3) and gasket (2)
from the transmission.
5. Remove the transmission oil filter (1) and o-ring
from the electrohydraulic control unit.
6. Clean the inside of the oil pan (3) of any debris.
ProCarManuals.com

Inspect the oil pan gasket (2) and replace if neces-

sary.
7. Install a new oil filter (1) and o-ring into the elec-
trohydraulic control unit.
8. Install the oil pan (3) and gasket (2) onto the trans-
mission. Fluid/Filter Service Points
9. Install the oil pan bolts (5) and retainers (4). Torque 1 - OIL FILTER
the bolts to 8 N·m (70 in.lbs.). 2 - OIL PAN GASKET
3 - OIL PAN
10. Lower the vehicle and add 7.0 L (7.4 qts.) of 4 - RETAINER
transmission fluid to the transmission. 5 - BOLT
11. Check the oil level (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FLUID AND FILTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE - CHECK OIL LEVEL).
CLUTCH-FREEWHEELING
DESCRIPTION

Freewheeling clutches are installed in the front plane-

tary gear set between the sun gear and the stator
shaft, and in the rear planetary gear set between the
sun gear and the intermediate shaft.
The freewheel consists of an outer race (4), an inner
race (7), a number of locking elements (3) and a cage
(6) for these locking elements.
ProCarManuals.com

OPERATION

The freewheeling clutch optimizes individual gear-

shifts. They lock individual elements of a planetary
gear set together or against the transmission housing
in one direction of rotation to allow the torque to be
transmitted.
If the inner race (7) of the freewheeling clutch is
locked and the outer race (4) turns counter-clockwise
(1), the locking elements (3) adopt a diagonal position
on account of their special contours, allowing the free-
wheel function. The inner race (4) slides under the
locking elements (3) with minimal friction. If the rota-
tion of the outer race (4) changes to clockwise (2), the
locking elements (3) stand up and lock the outer and
inner races (4, 7) together.
DISASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Freewheeling Clutch F2

1 - HOLLOW SHAFT 4 - K3 INNER DISC CARRIER AND REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR
2 - F2 CLUTCH SNAP-RING 5 - RETAINING RING
3 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F2 6 - O-RINGS

1. Remove retaining ring (5) from hollow shaft (1).

2. Remove rear sun gear (4) with the K3 internally toothed disk carrier and rear freewheeling clutch F2 (3).
3. Remove snap-ring (2) for freewheel.
4. Press freewheeling clutch (3) out of sun gear.
5. Check O-rings (6), replace if necessary.
6. Check the anti-friction bearing (2) in the rear plan-
etary sun gear for damage. Replace as necessary.
ProCarManuals.com
ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Freewheeling Clutch F2

1 - HOLLOW SHAFT 4 - K3 INNER DISC CARRIER AND REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR
2 - F2 CLUTCH SNAP-RING 5 - RETAINING RING
3 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F2 6 - O-RINGS

Note: The side of the freewheeling clutch F2 (3) with the markings (directional arrow, part number, etc.)
must be up when the clutch is installed in the sun gear (4).

1. Press freewheeling clutch F2 (3) into sun gear (4).

2. Install snap-ring (2) for freewheeling clutch.
3. Check O-rings (6) on hollow shaft, replace if necessary.
4. Install rear sun gear (4) with K3 internally toothed disc carrier and rear freewheeling clutch (3) onto the hollow
shaft.
5. Verify proper operation of the freewheeling clutch F2. When the assembly is held with the F2 clutch snap-ring
upward, it should be possible to rotate the hollow shaft counter-clockwise.
6. Install retaining ring (5) onto hollow shaft (1).
CABLE-GEARSHIFT
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
GEARSHIFT CABLE
1. The floor shifter lever and gate positions should be in alignment with all transmission PARK, NEUTRAL, and gear
detent positions.
2. Engine starts must be possible with floor shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL gate positions only. Engine starts must
not be possible in any other gear position.
3. With floor shift lever handle push-button not depressed and lever in:
a. PARK position - Apply forward force on center of handle and remove pressure. Engine starts must be pos-
sible.
b. PARK position - Apply rearward force on center of handle and remove pressure. Engine starts must be pos-
sible.
c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible.
d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply forward force on center of shift handle. Trans-
mission shall not be able to shift from NEUTRAL to REVERSE.

REMOVAL
ProCarManuals.com

1. Shift transmission into PARK.

2. Raise vehicle.
3. Disengage the gearshift cable (1) eyelet at trans-
mission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable out of
the mounting bracket (2).
4. Lower the vehicle.
5. Remove the floor console (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
TERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - REMOVAL) as nec-
essary to access the shift mechanism and cables.
6. If necessary, remove the bolts holding the shield,
covering the gearshift and park lock cables, to the
floorpan and remove the shield.
7. Remove the gearshift cable (1) from the shift lever
pin (3).
8. Remove the gearshift cable retainer (2) from the
notch (2) in the shifter assembly.

9. From under the hood, remove the shift cable grom-

met (2) from the dash panel.
10. Remove gearshift cable (1) from vehicle.
ProCarManuals.com
INSTALLATION
1. From under the hood, route the gearshift cable (1)
through the dash panel and toward the shifter
assembly.
2. From under the hood, install the grommet (2) to the
dash panel.
ProCarManuals.com

3. Engage the gearshift cable retainer (2) into the

notch (2) in the shifter assembly.
4. Install the gearshift cable (1) onto the shift lever pin
(3).
5. Loosen the cable adjustment screw (5), if
necessary.
6. From under the hood, route the gearshift cable (1)
forward of the air conditioning lines and the heater
hoses (2) and toward the transmission (3) manual
lever.

7. Raise vehicle.
8. Verify that the transmission is in the PARK position
ProCarManuals.com

by trying to rotate the propeller shaft. If the propel-

ler shaft rotates, move the transmission manual
shift lever to the full rearward position and turn the
propeller shaft until the PARK system is engaged.
9. Route the gearshift cable (1) through the mounting
bracket (2).
10. Engage the gearshift cable (1) eyelet onto the
transmission manual shift lever (3).

11. Lower vehicle.

12. Verify that the shifter is in the PARK position.
13. Tighten the adjustment screw (5) to 7 N·m (65
in.lbs.).
14. Verify correct shifter operation.
15. If necessary, install the shield, covering the gear-
shift and park lock cables, to the floorpan and
install the bolts to hold the shield to the floorpan.
16. Install the floor console (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
TERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION),
lower instrument panel components (Refer to 23 -
BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL CENTER BEZEL - INSTALLATION) and
dash panel insulation pad as necessary.
ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE
Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only
in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts
in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the park/neutral position contact
may be faulty.

1. Shift transmission into PARK.

2. Remove floor console as necessary for access to
the shift cable adjustment. (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
TERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - REMOVAL)
3. Loosen the shift cable adjustment screw (5).
ProCarManuals.com

4. Raise vehicle.
5. Unsnap cable eyelet from transmission shift lever.
6. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK
position.
7. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate
when park lock is engaged.
8. Snap cable eyelet onto transmission shift lever.

9. Lower vehicle
10. Tighten the shift cable adjustment screw (5) to 7
N·m (65 in.lbs.).
11. Verify correct operation.
12. Install any floor console components removed for
access. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR
CONSOLE - INSTALLATION)
CLUTCHES-HOLDING
DESCRIPTION
ProCarManuals.com

Holding Clutches

1 - B1 CLUTCH 10 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET ANNULUS GEAR

2 - EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC 11 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET PINION GEARS
3 - INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC 12 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET SUN GEAR
4 - B3 CLUTCH 13 - FRONT PLANETARY GEARSET PINION GEARS
5 - B2 CLUTCH 14 - FRONT PLANETARY GEARSET SUN GEAR
6 - B3 CLUTCH PISTON 15 - B1 CLUTCH INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
7 - B2 CLUTCH PISTON 16 - B1 CLUTCH PISTON
8 - B2 CLUTCH INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER 17 - B1 CLUTCH EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
9 - REAR PLANETARY GEARSET PLANETARY CARRIER

Three multiple-disc holding clutches, the front, B1 (1), middle, B3 (4), and rear multiple disc clutches, B2 (5), are
located in the planetary gear sets in the transmission housing.
A multiple-disc holding clutch consists of a number of internally toothed discs (10) on an internally toothed disc
carrier and externally toothed discs (9) on an externally toothed disc carrier, which is rigidly connected to the trans-
mission housing.
OPERATION
ProCarManuals.com

Holding Clutches

1 - B1 CLUTCH 10 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET ANNULUS GEAR

The holding clutches connect the annulus gear, sun gear, or planetary carrier of a planetary gear set against the
transmission housing in order to transmit the drive torque.
If the piston (16) on multiple-disc holding clutch B1 (1) is subjected to oil pressure, it presses the internal (3) and
external discs (2) of the disc set together. The internally toothed disc carrier (15) locks the sun gear (14) against the
housing. The planetary pinion gears (13) turn on the sun gear (14).
If the multiple-disc holding clutch B2 (5) is actuated via the piston (7), the piston compresses the disc set. The
internally toothed disc carrier (8) locks the sun gear (12) against the housing. The planetary pinion gears (11) turn
on the sun gear (12).
If the multiple-disc holding clutch B3 (4) is actuated via the piston (6), the planetary carrier (9) and the annulus gear
(10) are locked. When the multiple-disc brake B3 (4) is actuated, the direction of rotation is reversed.
B1-HOLDING CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the teflon rings (1) from the B1 plate car-
rier hub (2).
ProCarManuals.com

Holding Clutch B1

1 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 OUTER CARRIER 5 - DISC SPRING

2 - PISTON 6 - MULTIPLE DISC PACK
3 - DISC SPRING 7 - SNAP-RING
4 - SNAP-RING 8 - MULTI-USE SPRING COMPRESSOR 8900
2. Remove snap-ring (7).
3. Remove multiple-disc pack (6) and disc spring (5) from outer multiple-disc carrier. Note which clutch disc is
removed just prior to the disc spring (5) for re-assembly. If the clutch discs are re-used, this disc must be
returned to its original position on top of the disc spring.
4. Place the Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 (8) on disc spring (3) and compress the spring until the snap-ring
(4) is exposed.
5. Remove snap-ring (4).
6. Remove piston (2) from the outer multiple-disc carrier by carefully blowing compressed air into the bore (A).

ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Holding Clutch B1

1 - HOLDING CLUTCH B1 OUTER CARRIER 5 - DISC SPRING

2 - PISTON 6 - MULTIPLE DISC PACK
3 - DISC SPRING 7 - SNAP-RING
4 - SNAP-RING 8 - MULTI-USE SPRING COMPRESSOR 8900

Note: Check vulcanized gasket, replace if necessary.

1. Install piston (2) in outer multiple-disc carrier (1).

2. Place compressor (8) on disc spring (3) and compress until the groove of the snap-ring is exposed.

Note: The collar of the snap-ring must point towards the multiple-disc pack. After installing, check snap-ring
for correct seat.

3. Insert snap-ring (4).

4. Insert disc spring (2) in the outer multiple-disc car-
rier. Observe the disc spring (2) installation posi-
tion. The lugs of the disc spring (2) washer must
align with the 3 raised pads (arrow) of the B1 mul-
tiple-disc carrier (1). The cone of the spring washer
must point downwards.

5. Insert the multiple-disc pack (6) in the outer multi-

ple-disc carrier and measure the clutch clearance.
ProCarManuals.com

Note: Pay attention to the sequence of discs. If the

original clutch discs are reused, be sure to return
the disc identified on disassembly as belonging
on top of the disc spring (5) to its original loca-
tion.

CAUTION: When working with double sided fric-

tion discs, an externally lugged steel plate is
installed first, followed by a friction disc, and con-
tinuing on until all the required discs are installed.
When working with single sided friction discs, an
externally lugged disc is installed first, followed by
an internally lugged disc, and continuing on until
all the required discs are installed. All single sided
discs are installed with the friction side up.

Note: Place new friction multiple-discs in ATF fluid

for one hour before installing.

6. Measure B1 clutch clearance by mounting Pressing Tool 8901 (1) on outer multiple disc.
7. Using a lever press , compress pressing tool as far as the stop (then the marking ring is still visible, see small
arrow).
8. For transmissions using double sided friction discs,
use a feeler gauge to determine the play L at
three points between the snap-ring (6) and outer
multiple-disc (4). During the measurement, the
snap-ring (6) must contact the upper bearing sur-
face of the groove in the outer multiple-disc carrier
(5). The correct clearance for transmissions using
double sided friction discs is 2.3-2.7 mm
(0.091-0.106 in.) for two friction disc versions, 2.7-
3.1 mm (0.106-0.122 in.) for three disc versions,
and 3.0-3.4 mm (0.118-0.134 in.) for four disc ver-
sions.
9. Adjust with snap-ring (6), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.6 mm (0.102 in.),
2.9 mm (0.114 in.), 3.2 mm (0.126 in.), 3.5 mm
(0.138 in.), 3.8 mm (0.150 in.), and 4.1 mm (0.162
1 - DISC SPRING
in.). 2 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 1.8 mm (0.071 IN.)
3 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 2.8 mm (0.110 IN.)
4 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 4.0 mm (0.158 IN.)
5 - B1 OUTER CARRIER
6 - SNAP-RING
7 - INNER MULTIPLE DISCS
8 - PISTON
ProCarManuals.com

10. For transmissions using single sided friction discs,

use a feeler gauge to determine the play L at
three points between the snap-ring (5) and outer
multiple-disc (3). During the measurement, the
snap-ring (5) must contact the upper bearing sur-
face of the groove in the outer multiple-disc car-
rier (4). The correct clearance is 2.2-2.6 mm
(0.087-0.102 in.) for four friction disc versions,
2.4-2.8 mm (0.095-0.110 in.) for six disc versions,
and 2.6-3.0 mm (0.102-0.118 in.) for eight disc
versions.
11. Adjust with snap-ring (5), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.6 mm (0.102 in.),
2.9 mm (0.114 in.), 3.2 mm (0.126 in.), 3.5 mm
(0.138 in.), 3.8 mm (0.150 in.), and 4.1 mm (0.162
in.).
1 - DISC SPRING
2 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC
3 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 4.0 mm (0.158 IN.)
4 - B1 OUTER CARRIER
5 - SNAP-RING
6 - INNER MULTIPLE DISCS
7 - PISTON
12. Install the teflon rings (1) onto the B1 plate carrier
hub (2).
13. Coat Teflon rings (1) lightly with grease and insert
in the groove so that the joint remains together.
ProCarManuals.com
B2-HOLDING CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Holding Clutch B2

1 - SNAP-RING 9 - B2 PISTON SEALING RING

2 - MULTIPLE DISC PACK 10 - B2 PISTON
3 - DISC SPRING 11 - PISTON GUIDE SEALING RING
4 - B2 AND B3 PISTON GUIDE 12 - PISTON GUIDE SEALING RING
5 - O-RING 13 - PISTON GUIDE RING
6 - B3 PISTON SEALING RING 14 - PISTON BACK PRESSURE DISC SPRING
7 - B3 PISTON SEALING RING 15 - SPRING PLATE
8 - B3 PISTON/B2 OUTER DISC CARRIER 16 - SNAP-RING

1. Remove snap ring (1).

2. Take multiple-disc pack B2 (2) and disc spring (3) out of the outer multiple-disc carrier B2 (8). The outer multiple-
disc carrier for the multi-disc holding clutch B2 is the piston for the multiple-disc holding clutch B3 at the same
time. Note which clutch disc is removed just prior to the disc spring (3) for re-assembly. If the clutch discs are
re-used, this disc must be returned to its original position on top of the disc spring.
3. Place the Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 on the spring disc (14) and compress the spring until the groove for
the snap-ring is exposed.
4. Remove snap-ring (16).
5. Remove spring plate (15) and disc spring (14).
6. Separate piston guide ring (13) and the B2 piston
(10) from the B3 piston (8) by blowing compressed
air into the bore (D).
7. Press piston guide ring (13) out of the B2 piston
(10).
8. Separate piston guide (4) from the B3 piston (8) by
blowing compressed air into the bore (A).
ProCarManuals.com
ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Holding Clutch B2/B3 Seals

1 - PISTON GUIDE RING 4 - B2 PISTON SEALING RING

2 - PISTON GUIDE RING SEALING RING 5 - B3 PISTON/B2 OUTER DISC CARRIER
3 - PISTON GUIDE RING SEALING RING 6 - B3 PISTON SEALING RING

1. Check all sealing rings (2-4, 6), replace if necessary. The rounded off edges on the sealing rings (2, 4, 6) must
point outwards.
ProCarManuals.com

Holding Clutch B2

1 - SNAP-RING 9 - B2 PISTON SEALING RING

2. Assemble piston guide (4) and B3 piston (8) in the correct position. Verify that the missing tooth in the B3 pis-
ton/B2 outer disc carrier (8) is aligned with the centerline of the two threaded holes in the B2 and B3 piston
guide (4).
3. Insert B2 piston (10) in B3 piston (8).
4. Insert piston guide ring (2). The valve (1) in the pis-
ton guide ring must be on top.
ProCarManuals.com

5. Insert disc spring (14) and spring plate (15). Insert disc spring with the curvature towards the spring plate
6. Place Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 on the disc spring (14) and compress the spring until the groove for the
snap-ring is exposed.
7. Insert snap-ring (16).

Note: Pay attention to sequence of discs. If the original clutch discs are reused, be sure to return the disc
identified on disassembly as belonging on top of the disc spring (3) to its original location. Place new fric-
tion multiple-discs in ATF fluid for one hour before installing.

8. Insert disc spring (3) and multiple-disc pack (2) in the B2 outer multiple-disc carrier.
9. Insert snap-ring (1).

Note: During the measurement the snap-ring (8)

must contact the upper bearing surface of the
groove in the outer multiple-disc carrier.

10. Measure the B2 clutch pack clearance by mount-

ing the Pressing Tool 8901 (1) on outer multiple
disc.
11. Using a lever press, compress the pressing tool
as far as the stop (then the marking ring is still
visible, see small arrow).

12. Using a feeler gauge, determine the play L at

three points between the snap-ring (8) and outer
multiple-disc (7).
13. The correct clutch clearance is 1.9-2.3 mm
(0.075-0.091 in.) for the four friction disc versions
and 2.0-2.4 mm (0.079-0.095 in.) for the five disc
versions.
14. Adjust with snap-ring (8), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.9 mm (0.114 in.),
3.2 mm (0.126 in.), 3.5 mm (0.138 in.), 3.8 mm
(0.150 in.), and 4.1 mm (0.162 in.).

1 - B2 OUTER DISC CARRIER

2 - FRICTION DISCS
3 - DISC SPRING
4 - B2 PISTON
5 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 1.8 MM (0.071 IN.)
ProCarManuals.com

6 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 1.8 MM (0.071 IN.)

7 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 6.5 MM (0.256 IN.)
8 - SNAP-RING
CLUTCHES-INPUT
DESCRIPTION
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutches

1 - K1 CLUTCH 12 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET SUN GEAR

2 - K2 CLUTCH 13 - K2 CLUTCH EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
3 - EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC 14 - K2 CLUTCH PISTON
4 - INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC 15 - FRONT PLANETARY GEARSET PLANETARY CARRIER
5 - K3 CLUTCH 16 - FRONT PLANETARY GEARSET ANNULUS GEAR
6 - K3 CLUTCH EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER 17 - FRONT PLANETARY GEARSET SUN GEAR
7 - K3 CLUTCH PISTON 18 - K1 CLUTCH INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
8 - K3 CLUTCH INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER 19 - K1 CLUTCH EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
9 - REAR PLANETARY GEARSET SUN GEAR 20 - K1 CLUTCH PISTON
10 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET PLANETARY CARRIER 21 - DRIVE SHAFT
11 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET ANNULUS GEAR

Three multi-plate input clutches (1, 2, 5), the front, middle and rear multi-plate clutches K1 (1), K2 (2), and K3 (5),
are located in the planetary gear sets in the transmission housing.
A multi-plate input clutch consists of a number of internally toothed discs (4) on an internally toothed disc carrier and
externally toothed discs (3) on an externally toothed disc carrier.
OPERATION
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutches

1 - K1 CLUTCH 12 - CENTER PLANETARY GEARSET SUN GEAR

The input clutches produce a non-positive locking connection between two elements of a planetary gear set or
between one element from each of two planetary gear sets in order to transmit the drive torque.
If the piston (20) on multi-plate clutch K1 (1) is subjected to oil pressure, it presses the internal and external discs
of the disc set together. The sun gear (17) is locked with the planetary carrier (15) via the externally toothed disc
carrier (19) and the internally toothed disc carrier (18). The front planetary gear set is thus locked and turns as a
closed unit.
If the multi-plate clutch K2 (2) is actuated via the piston (14), the piston compresses the disc set. The annulus gear
(16) of the front planetary gear set is locked with the annulus gear (11) of the center planetary gear set via the
externally toothed disc carrier (13) and the center planetary carrier (10) on which the internally toothed discs are
seated. Annulus gear (16) and annulus gear (11) turn at the same speed as the input shaft (21)
If the multi-plate clutch K3 (5) is actuated via the piston (7), the piston compresses the disc set. The sun gear (12)
of the center planetary gear set is locked with the sun gear (9) of the rear planetary gear set via the externally
toothed disc carrier (6) and the internally toothed disc carrier (8). Sun gear (12) and sun gear (9) turn at the same
speed.
K1-INPUT CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutch K1 Components

1 - K1 OUTER DISC CARRIER 7 - DISC SPRING

2 - FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F1 8 - SPRING PLATE
3 - SNAP-RING 9 - SPRING PLATE SEALING RING
4 - OUTER DISC CARRIER SEALING RING 10 - SNAP-RING
5 - PISTON SEALING RING 11 - SNAP-RING
6 - PISTON 12 - MULTIPLE DISC PACK - REFER TO TEXT FOR CORRECT
ASSEMBLY ORDER

1. Remove snap-ring (11) from outer multiple-disc carrier (6).

2. Take multiple-disc pack (12) out of outer multiple-disc carrier (6). Note which clutch disc is removed just prior to
the spring plate (8) for re-assembly. If the clutch discs are re-used, this disc must be returned to its original
position on top of the spring plate.
3. Place Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 (2) on the
spring plate and compress the spring until the
snap-ring (1) is exposed.
4. Remove snap-ring (1).
5. Take out disc spring (7) and remove piston (6) by
carefully blowing compressed air into the drilled oil
feed passage.
6. Remove snap-ring (3) and take out front freewheel-
ing clutch F1 (2). Take care when removing the F1
clutch to prevent the clutch sprags from falling out.
If this occurs, the clutch must be replaced.
ProCarManuals.com
ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutch K1 Components

1 - K1 OUTER DISC CARRIER 7 - DISC SPRING

1. Install piston (6) in the outer multiple-disc carrier (1). Check sealing rings (4 and 5), replace if necessary. The
rounded off edges of the sealing rings must point outwards.
2. Insert disc spring (7). Insert disc spring with the curvature towards the piston.
3. Insert spring plate (8). Insert spring plate with the curvature towards the sun gear. Check sealing ring (9), replace
if necessary.
4. Place Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 (2) on
spring plate and compress the spring until the
groove of the snap-ring (1) is exposed.
5. Insert snap-ring (1). After installing, check snap-ring
for correct seat.

CAUTION: When working with double sided fric-

tion discs, an externally lugged steel plate is
ProCarManuals.com

installed first, followed by a friction disc, and con-

tinuing on until all the required discs are installed.
When working with single sided friction discs, an
externally lugged disc is installed first, followed by
an internally lugged disc, and continuing on until
all the required discs are installed. All single sided
discs are installed with the friction side up.

Note: Pay attention to the sequence of discs. If the

original clutch discs are reused, be sure to return
the disc identified on disassembly as belonging
on top of the spring plate (8) to its original loca-
tion.

Note: Place new friction multiple-discs in ATF fluid

for one hour before installing.

6. Insert multiple-disc pack (12) in the outer multiple-

disc carrier.
7. Insert snap-ring (11).
8. Measure the K1 clutch pack clearance by mounting Pressing Tool 8901 (1) on outer multiple disc.
9. Using a lever press, compress pressing tool as far as the stop (then the marking ring is still visible, see small
arrow).
10. For transmissions using double sided friction
discs, use a feeler gauge to determine the play
L at three points between the snap-ring (5) and
outer multiple-disc (3).
11. During the measurement the snap-ring (5) must
contact the upper bearing surface of the groove in
the outer multiple-disc carrier (4).
12. The correct clutch clearance for transmissions
with double sided friction discs is 2.7-3.1 mm
(0.106-0.122 in.) for three friction disc versions,
3.0-3.4 mm (0.118-0.134 in.) for four disc ver-
sions, 3.3-3.7 mm (0.130-0.146 in.) for five disc
versions, and 3.6-4.0 mm (0.142-0.158 in.) for six
disc versions.
13. Adjust with snap-ring (5), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.6 mm (0.102 in.), 1 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 1.8MM (0.071 IN.)
2.9 mm (0.114 in.), 3.2 mm (0.126 in.), 3.5 mm 2 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 2.8MM (0.110 IN.)
3 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 4.0MM (0.158 IN.)
(0.138 in.), 3.8 mm (0.150 in.), and 4.1 mm (0.162 4 - K1 OUTER DISC CARRIER
in.). 5 - SNAP-RING
6 - FRICTION DISCS
14. Insert front freewheeling clutch F1 (2) and fit 7 - DISC SPRING
snap-ring (3). The freewheeling clutch F1 (2) must 8 - PISTON
be installed in the direction of the arrow.
ProCarManuals.com

15. For transmissions using single sided friction discs,

use a feeler gauge to determine the play L at
three points between the snap-ring (4) and outer
multiple-disc (2).
16. During the measurement the snap-ring (4) must
contact the upper bearing surface of the groove in
the outer multiple-disc carrier (3).
17. The correct clutch clearance for transmissions
with single sided friction discs is 2.4-2.8 mm
(0.095-0.110 in.) for six friction disc versions, 2.6-
3.0 mm (0.102-0.118 in.) for eight disc versions,
2.8-3.2 mm (0.110-0.126 in.) for ten disc versions,
and 2.9-3.3 mm (0.114-0.130 in.) for twelve disc
versions.
18. Adjust with snap-ring (4), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.6 mm (0.102 in.),
2.9 mm (0.114 in.), 3.2 mm (0.126 in.), 3.5 mm 1 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISCS
(0.138 in.), 3.8 mm (0.150 in.), and 4.1 mm (0.162 2 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 4.0MM (0.158 IN.)
3 - K1 OUTER DISC CARRIER
in.). 4 - SNAP-RING
19. Insert front freewheeling clutch F1 (2) and fit 5 - INNER MULTIPLE DISCS
6 - DISC SPRING
snap-ring (3). The freewheeling clutch F1 (2) must 7 - PISTON
be installed in the direction of the arrow.
K2-INPUT CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutch K2 Components

1 - NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING 11 - SPRING RETAINER SEALING - O-RING

2 - K1 INNER DISC CARRIER WITH INTEGRATED FRONT GEAR 12 - SPRING RETAINER
SET
3 - THRUST BEARING 13 - SNAP-RING
4 - TORLON SEAL RINGS 14 - DISC SPRING
5 - INPUT SHAFT AND K2 CLUTCH 15 - EXTERNALLY TOOTHED PLATE - 1.8 MM (0.071 IN.)
6 - PISTON OUTER SEAL RING - O-RING 16 - MULTIPLE DISC PACK
7 - PISTON INNER SEAL RING 17 - SNAP-RING
8 - THRUST WASHER 18 - HOLLOW GEAR
9 - PISTON 19 - SNAP-RING
10 - DISC SPRING

1. Remove snap-ring (19) from the K1 inner multiple-disc carrier with integrated front gear set (2) and take off hol-
low gear (18).
2. Remove input shaft with clutch K2 (5).
3. Remove needle thrust bearing (3).
4. Remove snap-ring (17) from K2 outer multiple-disc carrier.
5. Take out multiple-disc pack (16). Note which clutch disc is removed just prior to the disc spring (14) for re-as-
sembly. If the clutch discs are re-used, this disc must be returned to its original position on top of the disc spring.
6. Take out disc spring (14).
7. Fit Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 (1) onto
spring retainer (12) and press until snap-ring (2) is
released.
8. Remove snap-ring (2).
9. Take out disc spring (10) and pull piston (9) out of
outer multiple-disc carrier.
ProCarManuals.com
ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutch K2 Components

1 - NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING 11 - SPRING RETAINER SEALING - O-RING

1. Install piston (9) in outer multiple-disc carrier. Inspect seals (6 and 7), replace if necessary. The rounded edges
of the inner piston seal (7) must point to the outside.
2. Insert disk spring (10) and spring retainer (12). Insert disk spring (10) with curved side pointing toward spring
retainer (12). Inspect seal (11), replace if necessary.
3. Place Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 (1) on
spring plate and press until the groove (2) of the
snap-ring is exposed.
4. Insert snap-ring.
ProCarManuals.com

5. Insert disk spring (14).

Note: Pay attention to the sequence of discs. If the original clutch discs are reused, be sure to return the
disc identified on disassembly as belonging on top of the disc spring (14) to its original location.

6. Insert multiple-disk set (16) into outer multiple-disk carrier.

7. Fit snap-ring (17).

8. Measure K2 clutch clearance by mounting Pressing

Tool 8901 (1) on outer multiple disc.
9. Using a lever press, compress pressing tool as far
as the stop (then the marking ring is still visible,
see small arrow).
10. Using a feeler gauge, determine the play L at
three points between the snap-ring (6) and outer
multiple-disc (4).
11. During the measurement the snap-ring (6) must
contact the upper bearing surface of the groove in
the outer multiple-disc carrier.
12. The correct clutch clearance is 2.3-2.7 mm
(0.091-0.106 in.) for three friction disc versions,
2.4-2.8 mm (0.095-0.110 in.) for four disc ver-
sions, 2.5-2.9 mm (0.099-0.114 in.) for five disc
versions, and 2.7-3.1 mm (0.106-0.122 in.) for six
disc versions.
13. Adjust with snap-ring (6), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.3 mm (0.091 in.),
2.6 mm (0.102 in.), 2.9 mm (0.114 in.), 3.2 mm
(0.126 in.), 3.5 mm (0.138 in.), and 3.8 mm (0.150 1 - DISC SPRING
in.). 2 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 1.8 MM (0.071 IN.)
3 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 3.5 MM (0.138 IN.)
4 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 4.0 MM (0.158 IN.)
5 - K2 OUTER DISC CARRIER
6 - SNAP-RING
7 - FRICTION DISCS
8 - PISTON
ProCarManuals.com

14. Insert axial needle bearing (3) into K1 inner multiple-disk carrier. Insert axial needle bearing (3) with a little
grease to prevent it slipping.
15. Install input shaft in K1 inner multiple-disc carrier with integrated front gear set (2).
16. Fit internally-geared wheel (18) and install snap-ring (19). Pay attention to installation position.
K3-INPUT CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutch K3 Components

1 - SNAP-RING 6 - PISTON
2 - MULTIPLE DISC PACK 7 - SEALING RING
3 - DISC SPRING 8 - OUTER DISC CARRIER
4 - SNAP-RING 9 - MULTI-USE SPRING COMPRESSOR 8900
5 - SPRING PLATE

1. Remove snap-ring (1) from outer multiple-disc carrier.

2. Remove multiple-disc pack (2) and disk spring (3) from outer multiple-disc carrier. Note which clutch disc is
removed just prior to the spring plate (3) for re-assembly. If the clutch discs are re-used, this disc must be
returned to its original position on top of the spring plate.
3. Place Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 (9) on disc spring (5) and compress the spring until the snap-ring (4)
is exposed.
4. Remove snap-ring (4).
5. Remove spring plate (5) and piston (6) from outer multiple-disc carrier.
ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Input Clutch K3 Components

1 - SNAP-RING 6 - PISTON
2 - MULTIPLE DISC PACK 7 - SEALING RING
3 - DISC SPRING 8 - OUTER DISC CARRIER
4 - SNAP-RING 9 - MULTI-USE SPRING COMPRESSOR 8900
5 - SPRING PLATE

1. Install piston (6) in the outer multiple-disc carrier (8). Check sealing ring (7), replace if necessary. The rounded
off edges of the sealing ring must point outwards.
2. Insert disc spring (5). Insert disc spring with the curvature towards the piston.
3. Mount the Multi-use Spring Compressor 8900 (9) on the spring plate and clamp until the snap-ring groove is
exposed.
4. Insert snap-ring (4). The collar of the snap-ring must point towards the multiple-disc pack.

CAUTION: When working with double sided friction discs, an externally lugged steel plate is installed first,
followed by a friction disc, and continuing on until all the required discs are installed. When working with
single sided friction discs, an externally lugged disc is installed first, followed by an internally lugged disc,
and continuing on until all the required discs are installed. All single sided discs are installed with the fric-
tion side up.

Note: Pay attention to the sequence of discs. If the original clutch discs are reused, be sure to return the
disc identified on disassembly as belonging on top of the spring plate (3) to its original location.

Note: Place new friction multiple-discs in ATF fluid for one hour before installing.

5. Install disk spring (3) and multiple-disc pack (2) in outer multiple-disc carrier (8).
6. Insert snap-ring (1).
7. Measure the K3 clutch clearance by mounting
Pressing Tool 8901 (1) on outer multiple disc.
8. Using a lever press, compress pressing tool as far
as the stop (then the marking ring is still visible,
see small arrow).
ProCarManuals.com

9. For transmissions using double sided friction discs,

use a feeler gauge to determine the play L at
three points between the snap-ring (8) and outer
multiple-disc (2).
10. During the measurement the snap-ring (8) must
contact the upper bearing surface of the groove in
the outer multiple-disc carrier.
11. The correct clutch clearance for transmissions
with double sided friction discs is 2.3-2.7 mm
(0.091-0.106 in.) for three friction disc versions,
2.4-2.8 mm (0.095-0.110 in.) for four disc ver-
sions, and 2.5-2.9 mm (0.099-0.114 in.) for five
disc versions.
12. Adjust with snap-ring (8), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.0 mm (0.079 in.),
2.3 mm (0.091 in.), 2.6 mm (0.102 in.), 2.9 mm
(0.114 in.), 3.2 mm (0.126 in.), and 3.5 mm (0.138 1 - OUTER DISC CARRIER
in.). 2 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 4.0 MM (0.158 IN.)
3 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 2.8 MM (0.110 IN.)
4 - OUTER MULTIPLE DISC - 1.8 MM (0.079 IN.)
5 - DISC SPRING
6 - PISTON
7 - FRICTION DISCS - 2.1 MM (0.083 IN.)
8 - SNAP-RING
13. For transmissions using single sided friction discs,
use a feeler gauge to determine the play L at
three points between the snap-ring (7) and outer
multiple-disc (2).
14. During the measurement the snap-ring (7) must
contact the upper bearing surface of the groove in
the outer multiple-disc carrier.
15. The correct clutch clearance for transmissions
with single sided friction discs is 2.3-2.7 mm
(0.091-0.106 in.) for six friction disc versions, 2.4-
2.8 mm (0.095-0.110 in.) for eight disc versions,
and 2.5-2.9 mm (0.099-0.114 in.) for ten disc ver-
sions.
16. Adjust with snap-ring (7), if necessary. Snap-rings
are available in thicknesses of 2.0 mm (0.079 in.),
2.3 mm (0.091 in.), 2.6 mm (0.102 in.), 2.9 mm
(0.114 in.), 3.2 mm (0.126 in.), and 3.5 mm (0.138
in.).

SENSORS-INPUT SPEED
ProCarManuals.com

DESCRIPTION

The input speed sensors (6, 8) are fixed to the shell of

the control unit via contact blades. The speed sensors
are pressed against the transmission housing (2) by a
spring (7) which is held against the valve housing of
the shift plate (5). This ensures a defined distance
between the speed sensors and the exciter ring (4).
OPERATION

Signals from the input speed sensors (6, 8) are

recorded in the transmission control module (TCM)
together with the wheel and engine speeds and other
information and are processed into an input signal for
electronic control.
Input speed sensor N2 (6) records the speed of the
front sun gear via the externally toothed disc carrier of
the multiple-disc clutch K1 (10) and input speed sen-
sor N3 (8) records the speed of the front planet carrier
via the internally toothed disc carrier of multiple-disc
clutch K1 (3).

PUMP-OIL
ProCarManuals.com

DESCRIPTION

The oil pump (2) (crescent-type pump) is installed in

the bellhousing behind the torque converter and is
driven by the drive flange of the torque converter. The
pump creates the oil pressure required for the hydrau-
lic procedures.
OPERATION

When the engine is running, the oil is pumped through

the inlet chamber (5) along the upper and lower side
of the crescent (1) to the pressure chamber (6) of the
housing. The meshing of the teeth prevents oil flowing
from the delivery side to the intake side. An external
gear (3) is eccentrically mounted in the pump housing.
The external gear is driven by the internal gear (4)
which is connected to the torque converter hub.

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove pump gears (1 and 2) from pump housing.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Remove the inner oil pump seal (1).

3. Replace the outer oil pump O-ring (2).
INSPECTION
Before measuring any oil pump components, perform a thorough visual inspection of all the components. If any sign
of scoring, scratches, or other damage is seen, replace the oil pump as an assembly.

SIDE CLEARANCE
Side clearance is the difference between the thickness of the pump gears and the depth of the pocket in the pump
housing. Side clearance can be measured by laying a flat plate across the mounting face of the pump housing, and
measuring the distance between the plate and the gears.

Acceptable side clearance:

Inner gear: 0.064 mm (0.0025 in) max
Outer gear: 0.069 mm (0.0027 in) max

TIP CLEARANCE

Tip clearance is the difference between the tip diame-

ters of the gear teeth and the corresponding diameters
of the pocket in the pump housing.
Tip clearance for the inner gear can be checked by
moving the inner gear into tight mesh (2) with the
outer gear as shown. Clearance between the ID of the
ProCarManuals.com

crescent feature of the housing and the OD of the

teeth of the inner gear (3) should then me measured
at a point 37 mm from the corner of the crescent (1)
feature, as shown below.

Acceptable tip clearance for inner gear:

0.85 mm (0.033 in) max

ASSEMBLY
1. Install new inner oil pump seal (1) with Seal
Installer 8902-A.
2. Replace O-ring (2).
3. Lubricate pump gears and place in the pump hous-
ing. Insert pump gear (1) so that the chamfer
(arrow) points towards the pump housing.

BEARING-OUTPUT SHAFT
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support vehicle.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Remove the propeller shaft (Refer to 3 - DIFFER-

ENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT/PRO-
PELLER SHAFT - REMOVAL).
3. Verify that the transmission is in PARK in order to
prepare for the removal of the output shaft nut.
4. Remove the nut holding the propeller shaft flange
to the output shaft and remove the flange.
5. Remove the transmission rear oil seal with a suit-
able slide hammer and screw.
6. Remove the transmission output shaft washer. Be
sure to tag the washer since it is very similar to the
geartrain end-play shim and they must not be inter-
changed.
7. Remove the transmission rear output shaft bearing
retaining ring (1).
8. Position Bearing Remover 9082 (1) over the inner
race of the output shaft bearing.
ProCarManuals.com

9. Slide the collar (3) on the Bearing Remover 9082

(1) downward over the fingers (3) of the tool.
CAUTION: Verify that the geartrain end-play shim
has remained on the output shaft and against the
park gear. The shim may be adhered to the bear-
ing inner race. Retrieve the shim from the bearing
and install over the output shaft and against the
park gear.

10. Remove the output shaft bearing (3).

INSTALLATION
ProCarManuals.com

CAUTION: Verify that the geartrain end-play shim

is properly installed over the output shaft and
against the park gear.

1. Install output shaft bearing in the rear transmission

housing. Using Bearing Installer 9287 (1), install
the output shaft bearing (2) into the transmission
housing. The closed side of the plastic cage
must point towards the parking lock gear.
2. Install the retaining ring (1). Ensure that the retain-
ing ring is seated correctly in the groove.
3. Check that there is no play between the bearing
and the retaining ring using feeler gauge.
4. There must be no play between the retaining ring
and the bearing. If the ring cannot be installed, a
thinner ring must be used. If there is play between
the ring and the bearing, a thicker ring must be
installed. Retaining rings are available in thick-
nesses of 2.0 mm (0.079 in.), 2.1 mm (0.083 in.),
and 2.2 mm (0.087 in.).
5. Install the output shaft washer onto the output
shaft.

6. Install a new transmission rear seal into the trans-

mission case with Seal Installer 8902A (1).
7. Verify that the transmission is in PARK in order to
prepare for the installation of the output shaft nut.
8. Install the propeller shaft flange onto the output
ProCarManuals.com

shaft and install an new flange nut. Tighten the

flange nut to 120 N·m (88.5 ft.lbs.).

9. Stake the output shaft nut to the output shaft as

follows.Place the Staking Tool 9078 (2) and Driver
Handle C-4171 onto the output shaft.
10. Rotate the Staking Tool 9078 (2) until the align-
ment pin (3) engages the output shaft notch (4).
11. Press downward on the staking tool (1) until the
staking pin (3) contacts the output shaft nut flange
(2).
12. Strike the Driver handle C-4171 with a suitable
hammer until the output shaft nut is securely
staked to the output shaft.
13. Install the propeller shaft (Refer to 3 - DIFFEREN-
TIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT/PRO-
PELLER SHAFT - INSTALLATION).

SEAL-OUTPUT SHAFT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the propeller shaft (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT/PROPELLER
SHAFT - REMOVAL). Move propeller shaft to the right and tie up.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Verify that the transmission is in PARK in order to prepare for the removal of the output shaft nut.
3. Remove the nut holding the propeller shaft flange to the output shaft and remove the flange.
4. Remove the output shaft seal with suitable screw and slide hammer.

INSTALLATION
1. Position the new output shaft seal over the output
shaft and against the transmission case.
2. Use Seal Installer 8902A (1) to install the seal.
3. Verify that the transmission is in PARK in order to
prepare for the installation of the output shaft nut.
4. Install the propeller shaft flange onto the output
shaft and install an new flange nut. Tighten the
flange nut to 120 N·m (88.5 ft.lbs.).
5. Stake the output shaft nut to the output shaft as
follows.Place the Staking Tool 9078 (2) and Driver
Handle C-4171 onto the output shaft.
6. Rotate the Staking Tool 9078 (2) until the alignment
pin (3) engages the output shaft notch (4).

7. Press downward on the staking tool until the stak-

ing pin (3) contacts the output shaft nut flange (2).
8. Strike the Driver handle C-4171 with a suitable
hammer until the output shaft nut is securely
staked to the output shaft.
ProCarManuals.com

9. Install the propeller shaft (Refer to 3 - DIFFEREN-

TIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT/PRO-
PELLER SHAFT - INSTALLATION).
CABLE-PARK LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Place ignition key in the ACC (2) position.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Remove the lower instrument panel trim as neces-

sary to access the park lock cable.
3. Disconnect park lock cable (4) from ignition cylin-
der (3).
4. Remove the floor console as necessary for access
to the park lock cable. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTE-
RIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - REMOVAL)
5. If necessary, remove the bolts holding the shield,
covering the gearshift and park lock cables, to the
floorpan and remove the shield.
6. Disconnect the park lock cable from the shift mech-
anism. Release retention tab using suitable
screwdriver.

INSTALLATION
ProCarManuals.com

1. Verify that ignition key is in ACC (2) position.

2. Install the park lock cable (4) to the ignition cylinder
(3). Secure the cable to instrument panel at
retainer.
3. Install any instrument panel trim that was removed
to access the park lock cable.
ProCarManuals.com

4. Route park lock cable towards shift mechanism.

5. Connect the park lock cable core to shift mecha-
nism cam (3), and then secure cable housing to
shift mechanism.

6. Adjust the park lock cable. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/SHIFT INTERLOCK

MECHANISM - ADJUSTMENTS)
7. If necessary, install the shield, covering the gearshift and park lock cables, to the floorpan and install the bolts to
hold the shield to the floorpan.
8. Install the floor console assembly. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION)
GEARTRAIN-PLANETARY
DESCRIPTION

Three planetary gear sets are used to produce the dif-

ferent gear ratios. These are located in the mechanical
part of the transmission as the front, middle and rear
planetary gear sets.

OPERATION
ProCarManuals.com

The annulus gear (1) and sun gear (3) elements of a

planetary gear system are alternately driven and
braked by the actuating elements of the multi-plate
clutch and multiple-disc brake. The planetary pinion
gears (2) can turn on the internal gearing of the annu-
lus gear (1) and on the external gearing of the sun
gear (3). This allows for a variety of gear ratios and
the reversal of the rotation direction without the need
for moving gear wheels or shift collars. When two
components of the planetary gear set are locked
together, the planetary gear set is locked and turns as
a closed unit.
The torque and engine speed are converted according
to the lever ratios and the ratio of the number of teeth
on the driven gears to that on the drive gears, and is
referred to as the gear ratio. The overall ratio of a
number of planetary gear sets connected in series is
obtained by multiplying the partial ratios.
DISASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Output Shaft with Center and Rear Planetary Geartrain

1 - TEFLON RINGS 7 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3

2 - OUTPUT SHAFT WITH CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER 8 - THRUST WASHER
3 - NEEDLE BEARING 9 - AXIAL NEEDLE BEARING
4 - THRUST WASHER 10 - SHIM
5 - REAR PLANETARY GEAR SET 11 - RETAINING RING
6 - REAR HOLLOW SHAFT/FREEWHEELING CLUTCH F2

1. Remove upper two visible Teflon rings (1) from output shaft.
2. Remove retaining ring (11), shim (10), thrust needle bearing (9) and thrust washer (8) from output shaft.
3. Remove clutch K3 (7).
4. Remove rear tubular shaft/freewheeling clutch F2 (6) from output shaft.
5. Remove rear gear set (5) with integrated tubular shaft of center gear set from output shaft.
6. Remove thrust washer (4).
ASSEMBLY
ProCarManuals.com

Output Shaft with Center and Rear Planetary Geartrain

1 - TEFLON RINGS 7 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3

1. Mount thrust washer (4) with the collar pointing towards the planet carrier.
2. Mount the rear gear set (5) on the rear hollow shaft (6).
3. Using grease, install lower three Teflon rings (1) in the groove so that the joint stays together
4. Put rear hollow shaft/freewheeling clutch F2 (6) with rear gear set (5) onto output shaft.
5. Install clutch K3 (7).
6. Mount retaining ring, shim, thrust needle bearing and thrust washer (8 - 11).
7. Using grease, insert the upper two Teflon rings (1) in the groove so that the joint remains together.
Note: During the test, apply a contact force by
hand to K3 in the direction of the arrow.

8. Inspect axial play between shim (10) and retaining

ring (11). Check axial play S between shim (10)
and retaining ring (1) using a feeler gauge. Clear-
ance should be 0.15-0.6 mm (0.006-0.024 in.).
Shims are available in thicknesses of 3.0 mm
(0.118 in.), 3.4 mm (0.134 in.), and 3.7 mm (0.146
in.). Adjust as necessary

1 - DRIVING CLUTCH K3
ProCarManuals.com

2 - THRUST WASHER
3 - SHIM
4 - AXIAL NEEDLE BEARING
5 - RETAINING RING
6 - OUTPUT SHAFT WITH CENTER PLANETARY CARRIER

MECHANISM-SHIFT
DESCRIPTION

The automatic transmission is operated with the help

of a shift lever assembly (SLA) (1) located in the floor
console. There are four positions to which the selec-
tion lever can be shifted: P, R, N, D. In addition, the
selector lever can be moved sideways (+/-) in position
D to adjust the shift range.
All selector lever positions, as well as selected shift
ranges in position D , are identified by the SLA. The
information is then sent to the transmission control
module (TCM) via a hardwire connection. At the same
time, the selector lever positions P , R , N and D
are transmitted by a shift cable to the selector shaft in
the transmission.

The SLA is comprised of the following functions:

Key lock: Depending on the selector lever position, the ignition cylinder is locked/unlocked, i.e., the ignition
key can be removed only if the selector lever is in position P . A park lock cable is used to perform this
function.
Park lock: The selector lever is not released from postion P until the brake pedal has been applied and the
ignition key is in ”ACC” or ON” positions. Shift lock is controlled by the brake light switch in conjunction with a
locking solenoid in the SLA. As soon as the brake pedal is applied firmly, the locking solenoid is energized and
retracted to unlock the selector lever. If the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P due to a mal-
function, the shift lock function can be overriden (2). (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-
SION - NAG1/SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM - OPERATION)
Reverse inhibitor: As soon as the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 4-7 mph, it is no longer possible to
move the selector lever from position N to position R . The reverse inhibit functionality is controlled by the
same solenoid as the park lock. As the vehicle accelerates past the calibrated speed threshold, the solenoid is
energized to block the sideways motion of the shift lever necessary to move from NEUTRAL to REVERSE.
The reverse inhibit is not released until the vehicle speed falls below approximately 4-7 mph and the shifter is
moved out of the “D” shifter position.

sensor assembly identifies the various positions of the SLA according to the following table.

Shift Lever Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3

Position
Default 0 0 0 0
D 1 0 1 0
N 0 1 1 0
R 1 1 1 0
P 0 0 0 1
+ 1 0 0 1
- 0 1 0 1
ND 1 1 0 1
RN 0 0 1 1
PR 1 0 1 1
Implausible 1 1 1 1
The current selector lever position or, if the shift range has been limited, the current shift range is indicated in the
instrument cluster display.
The permissible shifter positions and transmission operating ranges are:
P = Parking lock and engine starting.
R = Reverse.
N = Neutral and engine starting (no power is transmitted to the axles).
D = The shift range includes all forward gears.
4= Shift range is limited to gears 1 to 4.
3= Shift range is limited to gears 1 to 3.
2= Shift range is limited to gears 1 to 2.
1= Shift range is limited to the 1st gear.
The shift range can be adjusted to the current operating conditions by tipping the selector lever to the left-hand side
( - ) or the right-hand side ( + ) when in position D . If the shift range is limited, the display in the instrument cluster
indicates the selected shift range and not the currently engaged gear.
Tipping the shift lever will have the following results:
Tipping the selector lever toward - one time after another: The shift range is reduced in descending
sequence by one gear each time, i.e., from D - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1. If the selected limitation of the shift range would
result in a downshift causing excessive engine speed, the shifting is not executed and the engaged gear as
well as the shift range remain unchanged. This is to prevent the engine from overspeeding. Engine retardation
is low with the selector lever in position D . To make use of the full braking power of the engine, manual
downshifting by tipping the lever towards the left-hand side is recommended. If this has been done, subse-
quent upshifting must be carried out manually as well.
Tipping the selector lever toward - and holding it in this position: The currently engaged gear in range
D is indicated in the instrument cluster display and the shift range is limited to this gear.
Tipping the selector lever toward + one time after another: The shift range is increased by one gear each
time and the increased shift range is displayed in the instrument cluster; possibly, the transmission upshifts to
a faster gear.
Tipping the selector lever toward + several times: The shift range is increased by one gear each time the
lever is tipped until the shift range ends up in D .
Tipping the selector lever toward + and holding it in this position: The shift range is extended immedi-
ately to D , shift ranges are indicated in ascending sequence; possibly, the transmission upshifts to a faster
gear due to the extension of the shift range.

REMOVAL
1. Remove any necessary console parts for access to
ProCarManuals.com

shift lever assembly and shifter cables. (Refer to 23

- BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE -
REMOVAL)
2. If necessary, remove the bolts holding the shield,
covering the gearshift and park lock cables, to the
floorpan and remove the shield.
3. Shift transmission into PARK.
4. Disconnect the transmission shift cable (1) at shift
lever (3) and shifter assembly bracket (2).
5. Remove the shift cable retainer (2) from the notch
in the shifter assembly (2).
6. Verify the key is in the LOCK position and discon-
nect the park lock cable (1) from the shifter
mechansim cam (3) and the notch in the shifter
assembly (3).
ProCarManuals.com

7. Disengage all wiring connectors (2) from the shifter

assembly (1).
8. Remove all nuts (2) holding the shifter assembly
(1) to the floor pan.
9. Remove the shifter assembly (1) from the vehicle.

INSTALLATION
ProCarManuals.com

1. Install shifter assembly (1) onto the shifter assem-

bly studs on the floor pan.
2. Install the nuts (2) to hold the shifter assembly (1)
onto the floor pan. Tighten nuts to 7 N·m (652
in.lbs.).
3. Place the floor shifter lever in PARK position.
4. Loosen the adjustment screw (5) on the gearshift
cable (1).
5. Install the gearshift cable (1) to the shift lever pin
(3).

6. Install the park lock cable (1) to the shift mecha-

nism cam (3) and the notch in the shifter assembly
(2).
7. Verify that the key is in the LOCK position and
remains there until the cable is fully adjusted.
ProCarManuals.com

8. Verify that the park lock cable adjustment tab is

pulled upward to the unlocked position.
9. Install the wiring harness connectors (2) to the
shifter assembly.
10. Verify that the shift lever is in the PARK position.
11. Tighten the adjustment screw to 7 N·m (65
in.lbs.).
12. Verify that the key in the LOCK position and the
shifter is in PARK.
13. Push downward on the park lock cable adjust-
ment tab to lock the adjustment.
14. Verify correct shifter, park lock, and BTSI opera-
tion.
15. If necessary, install the shield, covering the gear-
shift and park lock cables, to the floorpan and
install the bolts to hold the shield to the floorpan.
16. Install any console parts removed for access to
shift lever assembly and shift cables. (Refer to 23
- BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTAL-
LATION)

SOLENOID
ProCarManuals.com

DESCRIPTION
The typical electrical solenoid used in automotive applications is a linear actuator. It is a device that produces
motion in a straight line. This straight line motion can be either forward or backward in direction, and short or long
distance.
A solenoid is an electromechanical device that uses a magnetic force to perform work. It consists of a coil of wire,
wrapped around a magnetic core made from steel or iron, and a spring loaded, movable plunger, which performs
the work, or straight line motion.
The solenoids used in transmission applications are attached to valves which can be classified as normally open
or normally closed. The normally open solenoid valve is defined as a valve which allows hydraulic flow when no
current or voltage is applied to the solenoid. The normally closed solenoid valve is defined as a valve which does
not allow hydraulic flow when no current or voltage is applied to the solenoid. These valves perform hydraulic con-
trol functions for the transmission and must therefore be durable and tolerant of dirt particles. For these reasons, the
valves have hardened steel poppets and ball valves. The solenoids operate the valves directly, which means that
the solenoids must have very high outputs to close the valves against the sizable flow areas and line pressures
found in current transmissions. Fast response time is also necessary to ensure accurate control of the transmission.
The strength of the magnetic field is the primary force that determines the speed of operation in a particular sole-
noid design. A stronger magnetic field will cause the plunger to move at a greater speed than a weaker one. There
are basically two ways to increase the force of the magnetic field:
1. Increase the amount of current applied to the coil or
2. Increase the number of turns of wire in the coil.
The most common practice is to increase the number of turns by using thin wire that can completely fill the available
space within the solenoid housing. The strength of the spring and the length of the plunger also contribute to the
response speed possible by a particular solenoid design.
A solenoid can also be described by the method by which it is controlled. Some of the possibilities include variable
force, pulse-width modulated, constant ON, or duty cycle. The variable force and pulse-width modulated versions
utilize similar methods to control the current flow through the solenoid to position the solenoid plunger at a desired
position somewhere between full ON and full OFF. The constant ON and duty cycled versions control the voltage
across the solenoid to allow either full flow or no flow through the solenoid’s valve.
UPSHIFT/DOWNSHIFT SOLENOID VALVES

The solenoid valves (1) for upshifts and downshifts

are located in the shell of the electric control unit and
pressed against the shift plate with a spring.
The solenoid valves (1) initiate the upshift and down-
shift procedures in the shift plate.
The solenoid valves (1) are sealed off from the valve
housing of the shift plate (5) by two O-rings (4, 6). The
contact springs (8) at the solenoid valve engage in a
slot in the conductor tracks (7). The force of the con-
tact spring (8) ensures safe contacts.
ProCarManuals.com

MODULATING PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

The modulating pressure control solenoid valve (1) is

located in the shell of the electric valve control unit
and pressed against the shift plate by a spring.
Its purpose is control the modulating pressure depend-
ing on the continuously changing operating conditions,
such as load and gear change.
The modulating pressure regulating solenoid valve (1)
has an interference fit and is sealed off to the valve
body of the shift plate (4) by a seal (arrow). The con-
tact springs (2) at the solenoid valve engage in a slot
in the conductor tracks (3). The force of the contact
springs (2) ensures secure contacts.
TORQUE CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH PWM SOLENOID VALVE

The torque converter lockup clutch PWM solenoid

valve (1) is located in the shell of the electric valve
control unit and pressed against the shift plate by a
spring.
The PWM solenoid valve (1) for the torque converter
lockup controls the pressure for the torque converter
lockup clutch.
The torque converter lockup PWM solenoid valve (1)
is sealed off to the valve body of the shift plate (4) by
an O-ring (5) and a seal (arrow). The contact springs
(2) at the solenoid valve engage in a slot in the con-
ductor tracks (3). The force of the contact springs (2)
ensures secure contacts.
ProCarManuals.com

SHIFT PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

The shift pressure control solenoid valve (1) is located

in the shell of the electric valve control unit and
pressed against the shift plate by a spring.
Its purpose is to control the shift pressure depending
on the continuously changing operating conditions,
such as load and gear change.
The shift pressure regulating solenoid valve (1) has an
interference fit and is sealed off to the valve body of
the shift plate (4) by a seal (arrow). The contact
springs (2) at the solenoid valve engage in a slot in
the conductor tracks (3). The force of the contact
springs (2) ensures secure contacts.

OPERATION
When an electrical current is applied to the solenoid coil, a magnetic field is created which produces an attraction
to the plunger, causing the plunger to move and work against the spring pressure and the load applied by the fluid
the valve is controlling. The plunger is normally directly attached to the valve which it is to operate. When the cur-
rent is removed from the coil, the attraction is removed and the plunger will return to its original position due to
spring pressure.
The plunger is made of a conductive material and accomplishes this movement by providing a path for the magnetic
field to flow. By keeping the air gap between the plunger and the coil to the minimum necessary to allow free move-
ment of the plunger, the magnetic field is maximized.

UPSHIFT/DOWNSHIFT SOLENOID VALVES

If a solenoid valve (1) is actuated by the TCM, it

opens and guides the control pressure (p-SV) to the
assigned command valve. The solenoid valve remains
actuated and therefore open until the shifting process
is complete. The shift pressure (p-SV) to the com-
mand valve is reduced to zero as soon as the power
supply to the solenoid valve is interrupted.
ProCarManuals.com

MODULATING PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

The modulating pressure regulating solenoid valve (1)

assigns a proportional pressure to the current which is
controlled by the TCM according to the load.
TORQUE CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH PWM SOLENOID VALVE

The torque converter lockup PWM solenoid (1) valve

converts pulse-wave-modulated current controlled by
the TCM into the appropriate hydraulic control pres-
sure (p-S/TCC).
ProCarManuals.com

SHIFT PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

The shift pressure regulating solenoid valve (1)

assigns a proportional pressure to the current which is
controlled by the TCM according to the load.
CONTACT-TEMPERATURE SENSOR/PARK-NEUTRAL
DESCRIPTION
PARK/NEUTRAL CONTACT

The park/neutral contact (4) is located in the shell of

the electric control unit and is fixed to the conductor
tracks.
Its purpose is to recognize selector valve and selector
lever positions P and N . The park/neutral contact
consists of:
the plunger (2).
the permanent magnet (3).
the dry-reed contact (4).
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The transmission oil temperature sensor (1) is located

in the shell of the electric valve control unit and is
fixed to the conductor tracks.
Its purpose is to measure the temperature of the
transmission oil and pass the temperature to the TCM
as an input signal. It is a temperature-dependent
resistor (PTC).
OPERATION
PARK/NEUTRAL CONTACT

In selector lever positions P and N the park/neutral

contact (4) is actuated by a cam track which is located
on the detent plate. The permanent magnet (3) is
moved away from the dry-reed contact (4). The dry-
reed contact (4) is opened. The TCM receives an
electric signal. The circuit to the starter in the selector
lever positions P and N is closed.
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The temperature of the transmission oil has a consid-

erable effect on the shifting time and therefore the
shift quality. By measuring the oil temperature, shift
operations can be optimized in all temperature ranges.
The transmission oil temperature sensor (1) is
switched in series with the park/neutral contact. The
temperature signal is transferred to the TCM only
when the dry-reed contact of the park/neutral contact
is closed in REVERSE or a forward gear position.
Refer to the Transmission Temperature Sensor Speci-
fications table for the relationship between transmis-
sion temperature, sensor voltage, and sensor
resistance.
ProCarManuals.com
CONVERTER-TORQUE
DESCRIPTION

CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced

if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts
of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid.

The torque converter is a hydraulic device that cou-

ples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The
torque converter consists of an outer shell with an
internal turbine (1), a stator (3), an overrunning clutch,
an impeller (2), and an electronically applied converter
clutch. The converter clutch provides reduced engine
speed and greater fuel economy when engaged.
Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmis-
sion fluid temperatures. The converter clutch engages
in third through fifth gears. The torque converter hub
drives the transmission oil (fluid) pump.
A turbine damper (6) has been added for some appli-
cations to help improve vehicle noise, vibration, and
ProCarManuals.com

harshness (NVH) characteristics.

The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is
not repairable and is serviced as an assembly.

1 - TURBINE
2 - IMPELLER
3 - STATOR
4 - INPUT SHAFT
5 - STATOR SHAFT
6 - TURBINE DAMPER
IMPELLER
ProCarManuals.com

Impeller

1 - ENGINE FLEXPLATE 4 - ENGINE ROTATION

2 - OIL FLOW FROM IMPELLER SECTION INTO TURBINE 5 - ENGINE ROTATION
SECTION
3 - IMPELLER VANES AND COVER ARE INTEGRAL

The impeller (3) is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially
along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the
engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system.
TURBINE
ProCarManuals.com

Turbine

1 - TURBINE VANE 4 - PORTION OF TORQUE CONVERTER COVER

2 - ENGINE ROTATION 5 - ENGINE ROTATION
3 - INPUT SHAFT 6 - OIL FLOW WITHIN TURBINE SECTION

The turbine (1) is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite
the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and
splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are
curved in the opposite direction.
STATOR

The stator assembly (1-4) is mounted on a stationary

shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump.

The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and

turbine (4) within the torque converter case. The stator
ProCarManuals.com

contains a freewheeling clutch, which allows the stator

to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator
is locked against the freewheeling clutch, the torque
multiplication feature of the torque converter is
operational.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)

The TCC (9) was installed to improve the efficiency of

the torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the
fluid coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides
smooth, shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all
fluid couplings to slip. If the impeller and turbine were
mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condi-
tion could be obtained. A hydraulic piston with friction
material was added to the turbine assembly to provide
this mechanical lock-up.
In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission
and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations,
the TCM can duty cycle the torque converter lock-up
solenoid to achieve a smooth application of the torque
converter clutch. This function, referred to as Electron-
ically Modulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) can occur
at various times depending on the following variables:
Shift lever position
Current gear range
Transmission fluid temperature
Engine coolant temperature
ProCarManuals.com

Input speed
Throttle angle 1 - TURBINE
Engine speed 2 - IMPELLER
3 - STATOR
4 - INPUT SHAFT
5 - STATOR SHAFT
6 - PISTON
7 - COVER SHELL
8 - INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
9 - CLUTCH PLATE SET
10 - EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
11 - TURBINE DAMPER
OPERATION

The converter impeller (driving member) (2), which is

integral to the converter housing and bolted to the
engine drive plate, rotates at engine speed. The con-
verter turbine (driven member) (1), which reacts from
fluid pressure generated by the impeller, rotates and
turns the transmission input shaft (4).
ProCarManuals.com

1 - TURBINE
2 - IMPELLER
3 - STATOR
4 - INPUT SHAFT
5 - STATOR SHAFT
6 - TURBINE DAMPER

TURBINE
As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and
rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft)
to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine’s
blades it continues in a “hindering” direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes
the impeller, it will strike the impeller in such a direction that it would tend to slow it down.
STATOR

Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the sta-

tor’s over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall condi-
tions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the
turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and
tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction.
When this happens the over-running clutch of the sta-
tor locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the
stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is
redirected into a “helping” direction before it enters the
impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine,
turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a
maximum torque multiplication of about 2.0:1. As the
turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the
fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to
cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this con-
dition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and
the converter acts as a fluid coupling. 1 - DIRECTION STATOR WILL FREE WHEEL DUE TO OIL
PUSHING ON BACKSIDE OF VANES
2 - FRONT OF ENGINE
3 - INCREASED ANGLE AS OIL STRIKES VANES
4 - DIRECTION STATOR IS LOCKED UP DUE TO OIL PUSHING
AGAINST STATOR VANES
ProCarManuals.com

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)

In a standard torque converter, the impeller (2) and

turbine (1) are rotating at about the same speed and
the stator (3) is freewheeling, providing no torque mul-
tiplication. By applying the turbine’s piston and friction
material (9), a total converter engagement can be
obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1
mechanical link between the engine and the transmis-
sion.
The clutch can be engaged in second, third, fourth,
and fifth gear ranges.
The TCM controls the torque converter by way of
internal logic software. The programming of the soft-
ware provides the TCM with control over the torque
converter solenoid. There are four output logic states
that can be applied as follows:
No EMCC
Partial EMCC
Full EMCC
Gradual-to-no EMCC

1 - TURBINE
2 - IMPELLER
3 - STATOR
4 - INPUT SHAFT
5 - STATOR SHAFT
6 - PISTON
7 - COVER SHELL
8 - INTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
9 - CLUTCH PLATE SET
10 - EXTERNALLY TOOTHED DISC CARRIER
11 - TURBINE DAMPER
NO EMCC

Under No EMCC conditions, the TCC Solenoid is OFF. There are several conditions that can result in NO EMCC
operations. No EMCC can be initiated due to a fault in the transmission or because the TCM does not see the need
for EMCC under current driving conditions.

PARTIAL EMCC

Partial EMCC operation modulates the TCC Solenoid (duty cycle) to obtain partial torque converter clutch applica-
tion. Partial EMCC operation is maintained until Full EMCC is called for and actuated. During Partial EMCC some
slip does occur. Partial EMCC will usually occur at low speeds, low load and light throttle situations.

FULL EMCC

During Full EMCC operation, the TCM increases the TCC Solenoid duty cycle to full ON after Partial EMCC control
brings the engine speed within the desired slip range of transmission input speed relative to engine rpm.

GRADUAL-TO-NO EMCC

This operation is to soften the change from Full or Partial EMCC to No EMCC. This is done at mid-throttle by
decreasing the TCC Solenoid duty cycle.

REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission.

CAUTION: Verify that transmission is secure on the lifting device or work surface, the center of gravity of
the transmission will shift when the torque converter is removed creating an unstable condition. The torque
converter is a heavy unit. Use caution when separating the torque converter from the transmission.

3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal.
4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission.

INSTALLATION

Check converter hub and drive flats for sharp edges,

burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and flats
with 320/400 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary.
The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump
seal at installation.
1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid.
2. Place torque converter in position on transmission.

CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or con-

verter hub while inserting torque converter into
the front of the transmission.

3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening.

4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump.
5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate con-
verter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump
gears.
6. Check converter seating with a scale and straightedge. Surface of converter lugs should be at least 19 mm (3/4
in.) to rear of straightedge when converter is fully seated.
7. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing.
8. Install the transmission in the vehicle.
9. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid.
SEAL-TORQUE CONVERTER HUB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the torque converter (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - NAG1/TORQUE CONVERTER -
REMOVAL).
2. Remove the torque converter hub seal with suitable screw and slide hammer.

INSTALLATION
1. Position the torque converter hub seal (1) over the
input shaft and against the transmission oil pump.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Using Seal Installer 8902A (2), install a new torque

converter hub seal.
3. Install the torque converter (Refer to 21 - TRANS-
MISSION/AUTOMATIC - NAG1/TORQUE CON-
VERTER - INSTALLATION).
page page

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 42RLE - SERVICE CABLE-GEARSHIFT

INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . 702 ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE . . . . . . 800
ROAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 CLUTCHES-HOLDING
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TESTS . . . . . . . . . 704 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
CLUTCH AIR PRESSURE TESTS . . . . . . . . 706 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
FLUID LEAKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 ASSEMBLY-INPUT CLUTCH
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ALUMINUM DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
THREAD REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 SENSOR-INPUT SPEED
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
ProCarManuals.com

ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS - 42RLE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 PUMP-OIL
SPECIFICATIONS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
42RLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . 780 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
SPECIAL TOOLS DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION – 42RLE . . . . 782 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
ACCUMULATOR BEARING-OUTPUT SHAFT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
BEARINGS SEAL-OUTPUT SHAFT
ADJUSTMENTS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
BEARING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES . . . 788 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
MECHANISM-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED
INTERLOCK DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - BRAKE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK . . . . . . 790 CABLE-PARK LOCK
ADJUSTMENTS - BRAKE TRANSMISSION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
SHIFT INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
CLUTCHES-DRIVING GEARTRAIN-PLANETARY
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
FLUID AND FILTER SEAL-OIL PUMP
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL . . 793 MECHANISM-SHIFT
FLUID CONTAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
STANDARD PROCEDURE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
CHECK OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
FLUID/FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
TRANSMISSION FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 SOLENOID
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/ OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
CONVERTER-TORQUE BODY-VALVE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 42RLE - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
ProCarManuals.com
ProCarManuals.com

42RLE Automatic Transmission

The 42RLE is a four-speed transmission that is a conventional hydraulic/mechanical assembly controlled with adap-
tive electronic controls and monitors. The hydraulic system of the transmission consists of the transmission fluid,
fluid passages, hydraulic valves, and various line pressure control components. An input clutch assembly which
houses the underdrive, overdrive, and reverse clutches is used. It also utilizes separate holding clutches: 2nd/4th
gear and Low/Reverse. The primary mechanical components of the transmission consist of the following:
Three multiple disc input clutches
Two multiple disc holding clutches
Four hydraulic accumulators
Two planetary gear sets
Hydraulic oil pump
Valve body
Solenoid/Pressure switch assembly
Control of the transmission is accomplished by fully adaptive electronics. Optimum shift scheduling is accomplished
through continuous real-time sensor feedback information provided to the Transmission Control Module (TCM) por-
tion of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
The TCM is the heart of the electronic control system and relies on information from various direct and indirect
inputs (sensors, switches, etc.) to determine driver demand and vehicle operating conditions. With this information,
the TCM can calculate and perform timely and quality shifts through various output or control devices (solenoid
pack, transmission control relay, etc.).
The TCM also performs certain self-diagnostic functions and provides comprehensive information (sensor data,
DTC’s, etc.) which is helpful in proper diagnosis and repair. This information can be viewed with the scan tool.
ProCarManuals.com

TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION

The 42RLE transmission can be identified by a bar-

code label that is affixed to the upper left area of the
bellhousing.
The label contains a series of digits that can be trans-
lated into useful information such as transmission part
number (10), date of manufacture (4, 5), manufactur-
ing origin (2), assembly line identifier (6), build
sequence number (7), etc..
If the tag is not legible or is missing, the “PK” number,
which is stamped into the left rear flange of the trans-
mission case, can be referred to for identification. The
entire part number, build code, and sequence number
are stamped into the flange.

1 - T=TRACEABILITY
2 - SUPPLIER CODE (PK=KOKOMO)
3 - COMPONENT CODE (TK=KOKOMO TRANSMISSION)
4 - BUILD DAY (350=DEC. 15)
5 - BUILD YEAR (1=2001)
6 - ASSEMBLY LINE CODE
7 - BUILD SEQUENCE NUMBER
8 - LAST THREE OF P/N
9 - CHANGE LEVEL
10 - TRANSMISSION PART NUMBER
11 - P=PART NUMBER
OPERATION
The 42RLE transmission ratios are:

First 2.84 : 1
Second 1.57 : 1
Third 1.00 : 1
Overdrive 0.69 : 1
Reverse 2.21 : 1

FIRST GEAR POWERFLOW

ProCarManuals.com

First Gear Powerflow

1 - UNDERDRIVE CLUTCH APPLIED (Turns Rear Sun)

2 - LOW-REVERSE CLUTCH APPLIED (Holds Rear Annulus/Front Carrier)

In first gear range, torque input is through the underdrive clutch (1) to the underdrive hub assembly. The underdrive
hub is splined to the rear sun gear. When the underdrive clutch is applied, it rotates the underdrive hub and rear
sun gear. The L/R clutch (2) is applied to hold the front carrier/rear annulus assembly. The rear sun gear drives the
rear planetary pinion gears. The rear planetary pinion gears are forced to walk around the inside of the stationary
rear annulus gear. The pinions are pinned to the rear carrier and cause the rear carrier assembly to rotate as they
walk around the annulus gear. This provides the torque output for first gear. The other planetary gearset compo-
nents are freewheeling. The first gear ratio is 2.84:1.
SECOND GEAR POWERFLOW
ProCarManuals.com

Second Gear Powerflow

1 - UNDERDRIVE CLUTCH APPLIED (Turns Rear Sun)

2 - 2-4 CLUTCH APPLIED (Holds Front Sun)

Second gear is achieved by having both planetary gear sets contribute to torque multiplication. As in first gear,
torque input is through the underdrive clutch (1) to the rear sun gear. The 2/4 clutch (2) is applied to hold the front
sun gear stationary. The rotating rear sun gear turns the rear planetary pinions. The rear pinions rotate the rear
annulus/front carrier assembly. The pinions of the front carrier walk around the stationary front sun gear. This trans-
mits torque to the front annulus/rear carrier assembly, which provides output torque and a gear ratio of 1.57:1.
THIRD GEAR POWERFLOW
ProCarManuals.com

Third Gear Powerflow

1 - UNDERDRIVE CLUTCH APPLIED (Turns Rear Sun)

2 - OVERDRIVE CLUTCH APPLIED (Turns Front Carrier/Rear Annulus)

In third gear, two input clutches are applied to provide torque input: the underdrive clutch (1) and overdrive clutch
(2). The underdrive clutch rotates the rear sun gear, while the overdrive clutch rotates the front carrier/rear annulus
assembly. The result is two components (rear sun gear and rear annulus gear) rotating at the same speed and in
the same direction. This effectively locks the entire planetary gearset together and is rotated as one unit. The gear
ratio in third is 1:1.
FOURTH GEAR POWERFLOW
ProCarManuals.com

Fourth Gear Powerflow

1 - OVERDRIVE CLUTCH APPLIED (Turns Rear Sun)

2 - 2-4 CLUTCH APPLIED (Holds Front Sun)

In fourth gear input torque is through the overdrive clutch (1) which drives the front carrier. The 2/4 clutch (2) is
applied to hold the front sun gear. As the overdrive clutch rotates the front carrier, it causes the pinions of the front
carrier to walk around the stationary front sun gear. This causes the front carrier pinions to turn the front annulus/
rear carrier assembly which provides output torque. In fourth gear, transmission output speed is more than engine
input speed. This situation is called overdrive and the gear ratio is 0.69:1.
REVERSE GEAR POWERFLOW
ProCarManuals.com

Reverse Gear Powerflow

1 - LOW-REVERSE CLUTCH APPLIED (Holds Rear Annulus Front Carrier)

2 - REVERSE CLUTCH APPLIED (Turns Front Sun)

In reverse, input power is through the reverse clutch (1). When applied, the reverse clutch drives the front sun gear
through the overdrive hub and shaft. The L/R clutch (2) is applied to hold the front carrier/rear annulus assembly
stationary. The front carrier is being held by the L/R clutch so the pinions are forced to rotate the front annulus/rear
carrier assembly in the reverse direction. Output torque is provided, in reverse, with a gear ratio of 2.21:1.

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION: Before attempting any repair on the 42RLE Four Speed Automatic Transmission, always check
for proper shift cable adjustment. Also check for diagnostic trouble codes with the scan tool and the 42RLE
Transmission Diagnostic information.

42RLE automatic transmission malfunctions may be caused by these general conditions:

Poor engine performance
Improper adjustments
Hydraulic malfunctions
Mechanical malfunctions
Electronic malfunctions
When diagnosing a problem always begin with recording the complaint. The complaint should be defined as specific
as possible. Include the following checks:
Temperature at occurrence (cold, hot, both)
Dynamic conditions (acceleration, deceleration, upshift, cornering)
Elements in use when condition occurs (what gear is transmission in during condition)
Road and weather conditions
Any other useful diagnostic information.
After noting all conditions, check the easily accessible variables:
Fluid level and condition
Shift cable adjustment
Diagnostic trouble code inspection
Then perform a road test to determine if the problem has been corrected or that more diagnosis is necessary. If the
problem exists after the preliminary tests and corrections are completed, hydraulic pressure checks should be per-
formed.

ROAD TEST
Prior to performing a road test, verify that the fluid level, fluid condition, and linkage adjustment have been
approved.
During the road test, the transmission should be operated in each position to check for slipping and any variation in
shifting.
If the vehicle operates properly at highway speeds, but has poor acceleration, the converter stator overrunning
clutch may be slipping. If acceleration is normal, but high throttle opening is needed to maintain highway speeds,
ProCarManuals.com

the converter stator clutch may have seized. Both of these stator defects require replacement of the torque con-
verter and thorough transmission cleaning.
Slipping clutches can be isolated by comparing the “Elements in Use” chart with clutch operation encountered on a
road test. This chart identifies which clutches are applied at each position of the selector lever.
A slipping clutch may also set a DTC and can be determined by operating the transmission in all selector positions.

ELEMENTS IN USE AT EACH POSITION OF SELECTOR LEVER

Shift Lever INPUT CLUTCHES HOLDING CLUTCHES

Position Underdrive Overdrive Reverse 2/4 Low/Reverse
P - PARK X
R - REVERSE X X
N - NEUTRAL X
OD -
OVERDRIVE
First X X
Second X X
Direct X X
Overdrive X X
D - DRIVE*
First X X
Second X X
Direct X X
L - LOW*
First X X
Second X X
Direct X X
* Vehicle upshift and downshift speeds are increased when in these selector positions.
The process of elimination can be used to detect any unit which slips and to confirm proper operation of good units.
Road test analysis can diagnose slipping units, but the cause of the malfunction cannot be determined. Practically
any condition can be caused by leaking hydraulic circuits or sticking valves.

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TESTS

Pressure testing is a very important step in the diag-

nostic procedure. These tests usually reveal the cause
of most transmission problems.
Before performing pressure tests, be certain that fluid
level and condition, and shift cable adjustments have
been checked and approved. Fluid must be at operat-
ing temperature (150 to 200 degrees F.).
Install an engine tachometer, raise vehicle on hoist
which allows the wheels to turn, and position tachom-
eter so it can be read.
Using special adapters L-4559, attach 300 psi
gauge(s) C-3293SP to the port(s) required for test
being conducted.
Test port locations are shown in the Pressure Taps
graphic.
ProCarManuals.com

Pressure Taps

1 - TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH OFF

2 - REVERSE
3 - LOW/REVERSE
4 - 2/4
5 - UNDERDRIVE
6 - TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ON
7 - OVERDRIVE

TEST ONE - SELECTOR IN MANUAL 1 (1st Gear)

Note: This test checks pump output, pressure regulation and condition of the low/reverse clutch hydraulic
circuit and shift schedule.

1. Attach pressure gauge to the low/reverse clutch tap.

2. Move selector lever to the MANUAL 1 position.
3. Allow vehicle wheels to turn and increase throttle opening to achieve an indicated vehicle speed to 20 mph.
4. Low/reverse clutch pressure should read 115 to 145 psi.

TEST TWO - SELECTOR IN MANUAL 2 (Second Gear)

Note: This test checks the underdrive clutch hydraulic circuit as well as the shift schedule.

1. Attach gauge to the underdrive clutch tap.

2. Move selector lever to the MANUAL 2 position.
3. Allow vehicle wheels to turn and increase throttle opening to achieve an indicated vehicle speed of 30 mph.
4. In second gear the underdrive clutch pressure should read 110 to 145 psi.

TEST TWO A - SELECTOR IN DRIVE (OD ON - Fourth Gear)

Note: This test checks the underdrive clutch hydraulic circuit as well as the shift schedule.

1. Attach gauge to the underdrive clutch tap.

2. Move selector lever to the DRIVE position. Verfy that the OD switch is ON.
3. Allow wheels to rotate freely and increase throttle opening to achieve an indicated speed of 40 mph.
4. Underdrive clutch pressure should read below 5 psi. If not, than either the solenoid assembly or controller is at
fault.

TEST THREE - SELECTOR IN DRIVE (OD OFF - Third and Second Gear)
Note: This test checks the overdrive clutch hydraulic circuit as well as the shift schedule.

1. Attach gauge to the overdrive clutch tap.

2. Move selector lever to the DRIVE position.
3. Allow vehicle wheels to turn and increase throttle opening to achieve an indicated vehicle speed of 20 mph.
4. Overdrive clutch pressure should read 74 to 95 psi.
5. Move selector lever to the DRIVE position and increase indicated vehicle speed to 30 mph.
6. The vehicle should be in second gear and overdrive clutch pressure should be less than 5 psi.

TEST FOUR - SELECTOR IN DRIVE (OD ON - Fourth Gear)

Note: This test checks the 2/4 clutch hydraulic circuit.

1. Attach gauge to the 2/4 clutch tap.

2. Move selector lever to the DRIVE position.
ProCarManuals.com

3. Allow vehicle front wheels to turn and increase throttle opening to achieve an indicated vehicle speed of 30 mph.
Vehicle should be in fourth gear.
4. The 2/4 clutch pressure should read 75 to 95 psi.

TEST FIVE-SELECTOR IN DRIVE (OD ON - Fourth Gear, CC on)

Note: These tests check the torque converter clutch hydraulic circuit.

1. Attach gauge to the torque converter clutch off pressure tap.

2. Move selector lever to the DRIVE position.
3. Allow vehicle wheels to turn and increase throttle opening to achieve an indicated vehicle speed of 50 mph.
Vehicle should be in 4th gear, CC on.

CAUTION: Both wheels must turn at the same speed.

4. Torque converter clutch off pressure should be less than 5 psi.

5. Now attach the gauge to the torque converter clutch on pressure tap.
6. Move selector to the OD position.
7. Allow vehicle wheels to turn and increase throttle opening to achieve an indicated vehicle speed of 50 mph.
8. Verify the torque converter clutch is applied mode using the RPM display of the scan tool.
9. Torque converter clutch on pressure should be 60-90 psi.

TEST SIX-SELECTOR IN REVERSE

Note: This test checks the reverse clutch hydraulic circuit.

1. Attach gauge to the reverse and low/reverse clutch tap.

2. Move selector lever to the REVERSE position.
3. Read reverse clutch pressure with output stationary (foot on brake) and throttle opened to achieve 1500 rpm.
4. Reverse and low/reverse clutch pressure should read 165 to 235 psi.

TEST RESULT INDICATIONS

1. If proper line pressure is found in any one test, the pump and pressure regulator are working properly.
2. Low pressure in all positions indicates a defective pump, a clogged filter, or a stuck pressure regulator valve.
3. Clutch circuit leaks are indicated if pressures do not fall within the specified pressure range.
4. If the overdrive clutch pressure is greater than 5 psi in Step 6 of Test Three, a worn reaction shaft seal ring or
a defective solenoid assembly is indicated.
5. If the underdrive clutch pressure is greater than 5 psi in Step 4 of Test Two-A, a defective solenoid/pressure
switch assembly or controller is the cause.

ALL PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS ARE PSI (on hoist, with wheels free to turn)

Gear Selector Actual Gear PRESSURE TAPS

Position Under- Over- Reverse Torque Torque 2/4 Low/
drive drive Clutch Converter Converter Clutch Reverse
Clutch Clutch Clutch Off Clutch On Clutch
PARK - 0 mph * PARK 0-2 0-5 0-2 60-110 45-100 0-2 115-145
REVERSE - 0 REVERSE 0-2 0-7 165- 50-100 35-85 0-2 165-235
mph * 235
NEUTRAL - 0 NEUTRAL 0-2 0-5 0-2 60-110 45-100 0-2 115-145
mph *
Low - 20 mph # FIRST 110- 0-5 0-2 60-110 45-100 0-2 115-145
145
Third - 30 mph # SECOND 110- 0-5 0-2 60-110 45-100 115- 0-2
ProCarManuals.com

145 145
Third - 45 mph # DIRECT 75-95 75-95 0-2 60-90 45-80 0-2 0-2
OD - 30 mph # OVERDRIVE 0-2 75-95 0-2 60-90 45-80 75-95 0-2
OD - 50 mph # OVERDRIVE 0-2 75-95 0-2 0-5 60-95 75-95 0-2
WITH TCC
* Engine Speed at 1500 rpm
# CAUTION: Both wheels must be turning at same speed.

CLUTCH AIR PRESSURE TESTS

Inoperative clutches can be located by substituting air

pressure for fluid pressure. The clutches may be
tested by applying air pressure to their respective pas-
sages after the valve body has been removed. Use
Special Tool 6599-1 (1) and 6599-2 (1) to perform test.
To make air pressure tests, proceed as follows:

Note: The compressed air supply must be free of

all dirt and moisture. Use a pressure of 30 psi.

1. Remove oil pan and valve body.(Refer to 21 -

TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE/VALVE
BODY - REMOVAL)
2. Apply air pressure to the holes in the special tool
(1), one at a time.
3. Listen for the clutch to apply. It will give a slight
thud sound. If a large amount of air is heard escap- Air Pressure Test Plate
ing, the transmission must be removed from vehi-
1 - AIR PRESSURE TEST PLATES
cle, disassembled and all seals inspected. 2 - 2/4 CLUTCH RETAINER HOLE
2/4 CLUTCH
Apply air pressure to the feed hole located on the 2/4 clutch retainer (2). Look in the area where the 2/4 piston
contacts the first separator plate and watch carefully for the 2/4 piston to move rearward. The piston should return
to its original position after the air pressure is removed.

OVERDRIVE CLUTCH
Apply air pressure to the overdrive clutch apply passage and watch for the push/pull piston to move forward. The
piston should return to its starting position when the air pressure is removed.

REVERSE CLUTCH
Apply air pressure to the reverse clutch apply passage and watch for the push/pull piston to move rearward. The
piston should return to its starting position when the air pressure is removed.

LOW/REVERSE CLUTCH
Apply air pressure to the low/reverse clutch feed hole passage. Look in the area where the low/reverse piston con-
tacts the first separator plate. Watch carefully for the piston to move forward. The piston should return to its original
position after the air pressure is removed.

UNDERDRIVE CLUTCH

Because this clutch piston cannot be seen, its opera-

ProCarManuals.com

tion is checked by function. Use an air nozzle (2) to

apply air pressure is to the low/reverse or the 2/4
clutch opening in Test Plate 6599-1 (2). This locks the
output shaft. Use a piece of rubber hose wrapped
around the input shaft and a pair of clamp-on pliers to
turn the input shaft. Next apply air pressure to the
underdrive clutch. The input shaft should not rotate
with hand torque. Release the air pressure and con-
firm that the input shaft will rotate.
FLUID LEAKAGE
FLUID LEAKAGE - TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING AREA

When diagnosing converter housing (5) fluid leaks,

three actions must be taken before repair:
1. Verify proper transmission fluid level.
2. Verify that the leak originates from the converter
housing area and is transmission fluid.
3. Determine the true source of the leak.
Fluid leakage at or around the torque converter area
may originate from an engine oil leak (7). The area
should be examined closely. Factory fill fluid is red
and, therefore, can be distinguished from engine oil.
Some suspected converter housing fluid leaks may
not be leaks at all. They may only be the result of
residual fluid in the converter housing, or excess fluid
spilled during factory fill, or fill after repair. Converter
housing leaks have several potential sources. Through
careful observation, a leak source can be identified
before removing the transmission for repair.
ProCarManuals.com

Pump seal (1) leaks tend to move along the drive hub and onto the rear of the converter. Pump o-ring or pump
body leaks follow the same path as a seal leak. Pump attaching bolt (3) leaks are generally deposited on the inside
of the converter housing (5) and not on the converter itself. Pump seal (1) or gasket (4) leaks usually travel down
the inside of the converter housing.

TORQUE CONVERTER LEAKAGE

Possible sources of torque converter leakage are:

Torque converter weld leaks at the outside diam-
eter weld (1).
Torque converter hub weld (2).

STANDARD PROCEDURE - ALUMINUM THREAD REPAIR

Damaged or worn threads in the aluminum transmission case and valve body can be repaired by the use of Heli-
Coils , or equivalent. This repair consists of drilling out the worn-out damaged threads. Then tap the hole with a
special Heli-Coil tap, or equivalent, and installing a Heli-Coil insert, or equivalent, into the hole. This brings the
hole back to its original thread size.
Heli-Coil , or equivalent, tools, and inserts are readily available from most automotive parts suppliers.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Mark propeller shaft (1) and the transmission
flange (4) for assembly alignment.
4. Remove the bolts (2) holding the rear propeller
shaft coupler (3) to the transmission flange (4).
5. Slide the propeller shaft (1) rearward until the cou-
pler clears the propeller shaft pilot (5) on the trans-
mission output shaft.

6. Remove the bolts (2) holding the starter motor (1)

to the transmission. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
ProCarManuals.com

STARTING/STARTER MOTOR - REMOVAL)

7. Remove the starter (1) from the transmission
starter pocket and safely relocate.

8. Remove the bolt (2) holding the torque converter

access cover (1) to the transmission, 3.5L engines.
9. Remove the torque converter access cover (1)
from the transmission.
10. Remove the structural collar bolts (3, 4) and stuc-
tural collar (2) on vehicles equipped with 2.7L
engines. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - 2.7L/ENGINE
BLOCK/STRUCTURAL COVER - REMOVAL)
ProCarManuals.com

11. Rotate crankshaft in clockwise direction until con-

verter bolts (1) are accessible. Then remove bolts
(1) one at a time. Rotate crankshaft with socket
wrench on dampener bolt.
12. Disconnect the gearshift cable (1) from the trans-
mission manual valve lever (3).
13. Loosen the bolts holding the shift cable retaining
strap (2) to the transmission.
14. Remove the shift cable (1) from the transmission.
ProCarManuals.com

15. Disconnect wires from the input (1) and output (2)
speed sensors.
16. Disconnect wires from the transmission range sensor (3).

17. Disconnect wires from the solenoid/pressure

switch assembly (1).

18. Remove the crankshaft position sensor. (Refer to

14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL INJECTION/CRANK-
ProCarManuals.com

SHAFT POSITION SENSOR - REMOVAL)

19. Remove the bolt (3) holding the transmission fill

tube (2) to the transmission (1).
20. Remove the transmission fill tube (2).

21. Disconnect transmission fluid cooler lines (1) at

transmission fittings (2) and clips (3).
22. Disconnect the transmission vent hose from the
transmission.

23. Support rear of engine with safety stand or jack.

24. Raise transmission slightly with service jack to
ProCarManuals.com

relieve load on crossmember and supports.

25. Remove bolts (2) securing rear support and cush-
ion (3) to transmission crossmember (1).
26. Remove bolts attaching crossmember (1) to frame and remove crossmember.

27. Remove the bolts (1) holding the engine oil pan
(2) to the transmission (3).

28. Remove all remaining bolts (2) holding the engine

(1) to the transmission (3).
ProCarManuals.com

29. Carefully work transmission and torque converter

assembly rearward off engine block dowels.
30. Hold torque converter in place during transmission
removal.
31. Lower transmission and remove assembly from
under the vehicle.
32. To remove torque converter, carefully slide torque
converter out of the transmission.

DISASSEMBLY
Note: If the transmission is being reconditioned (clutch/seal replacement) or replaced, it is necessary to
perform the Quick Learn Procedure using the scan tool (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

Note: Tag all clutch pack assemblies, as they are removed, for reassembly identification.

CAUTION: Do not intermix clutch discs or plates as the unit might then fail.

Before disassembling transmission, move the shift lever clockwise as far as it will go and then remove the shift
lever.
1. Remove the torque converter (1) from the transmis-
sion input shaft (3).

2. Measure input shaft end play using Tool 8266 (1,

2). Set up Tool 8266 and a dial indicator as shown.
3. Move input shaft in and out to obtain end play
reading. End play specifications are 0.13 to 0.64
mm (0.005 to 0.025 inch). Record indicator reading
ProCarManuals.com

for reference when reassembling the transmission.

If endplay exceeds the specified range, the #4
thrust plate needs to be inspected and changed if
necessary.

Note: It is not necessary to remove the output

shaft flange to dissassemble the transmission.
Perform the following steps only if it necessary to
replace a component in the extension housing
assembly.

4. Place the transmission in PARK to prepare for the

removal of the output shaft nut.
5. Remove the nut holding the propeller shaft flange
to the output shaft and remove the flange.
6. Remove the transmission rear oil seal with a suit-
able slide hammer and screw.
7. Remove the transmission output shaft washer.
8. Remove the transmission rear output shaft bearing retaining ring (1).

9. Position Bearing Remover 9082 (1) over the inner

race of the output shaft bearing (3).
ProCarManuals.com

10. Slide the collar (3) on the Bearing Remover 9082

(1) downward over the fingers (4) of the tool.
11. Remove the output shaft bearing (3).
12. Remove the geartrain end-play shim from the out-
put shaft. Be sure to tag the shim since it is very
similar to the output shaft washer and they must
not be interchanged.
ProCarManuals.com

Note: The four bolts (3) along the bottom of the

extension housing (2) have a sealing patch applied
from the factory. Note the locations of these bolts
and separate these bolts for reuse.

13. Remove the bolts that hold the extension housing

(2) onto the transmission case.

14. Remove the extension (2) housing from the trans-

mission case. There are two pry slots located
near the bottom corners of the housing for sepa-
rating the housing from the transmission case.

15. Inspect the lube tube grommet (3) for damage. If

the grommet lip is damaged, it will need to be
replaced.
ProCarManuals.com

Note: The speed sensor bolts have a sealing patch

applied from the factory. Separate these bolts for
reuse.

16. Remove the input speed sensor bolt.

Note: The speed sensor bolts have a sealing patch
applied from the factory. Separate these bolts for
reuse.

(1). The oil pump bolts are not to be reused.
33. Remove oil pump using C-3752 Pullers (2).

34. Remove oil pump while pushing in on input shaft

(1).
ProCarManuals.com

35. Remove oil pump gasket (2).

CAUTION: By-pass valve must be replaced if
transmission failure occurs.

36. Remove the cooler by-pass valve (1).

37. Remove the #1 caged needle bearing (1).

38. Remove the input clutch assembly (1).

ProCarManuals.com
39. Remove the #4 thrust plate (2).

40. Remove the front sun gear assembly (1) and #4

thrust washer (if still in place).
ProCarManuals.com

41. Remove the front carrier/rear annulus (2) and #6

needle bearing (1).
42. Remove the rear sun gear (2) and #7 needle
bearing (1).

Note: The number seven needle bearing (1) has

three antireversal tabs and is common with the
number five and number two position. The orien-
tation should allow the bearing to seat flat against
ProCarManuals.com

the rear sun gear. A small amount of petrolatum

can be used to hold the bearing to the rear sun
gear.

Note: Verify that Tool 5058A (1) is centered prop-

erly over the 2/4 clutch retainer (4) before com-
pressing. If necessary, fasten the 5058A bar to the
bellhousing flange with any combination of lock-
ing pliers and bolts to center the tool properly.

43. Install and load Tool 5058A to remove the 2/4

clutch retainer snap ring (3).
Note: The 2/4 Clutch Piston has bonded seals
which are not individually serviceable. Seal
replacement requires replacement of the piston
assembly.

remove the output shaft nut.
55. Remove the output shaft (1) from case (3) using a
shop press (2).

56. Use special tool 6596 (2) with a shop press (1) to
remove the front output shaft bearing cup.
ProCarManuals.com
57. Use special tool 6597 (2) and handle C-4171 (1)
and C-4171-2 to press the rear output shaft bear-
ing cup rearward.
ProCarManuals.com

58. Remove the rear carrier front bearing cone (3).

59. Install and load compressor 5059A (4) as shown.

60. Remove the low/reverse belleville spring snap ring

(1).
ProCarManuals.com

61. Remove the low/reverse piston belleville spring

(1).
62. Remove the park sprag pivot retaining screw.
63. Drive out the anchor shaft using suitable punch
(1).

64. Remove the guide bracket pivot pin (1). Inspect

all components for wear and replace if necessary.
ProCarManuals.com

Note: The Low/Reverse Clutch Piston has bonded

seals which are not individually serviceable. Seal
replacement requires replacement of the piston
assembly.

65. Remove the low/reverse clutch piston (1).

66. Remove the low/reverse piston retainer screws.
67. Remove low/reverse piston retainer (1).

68. Remove the low/reverse piston retainer gasket

(2).
ProCarManuals.com

ASSEMBLY
Note: If the transmission assembly is being reconditioned (clutch/seal replacement) or replaced, it is nec-
essary to perform the Quick Learn Procedure using the scan tool (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

1. Install the output bearing cups using Special Tool -

5050A.
2. Install low/reverse piston retainer gasket (2).

3. Install low/reverse piston retainer (1).

ProCarManuals.com

4. Install low/reverse piston retainer-to-case screws

(3) and torque to 5 N·m (45 in. lbs.).
Note: The Low/Reverse Clutch Piston has bonded
seals which are not individually serviceable. Seal
replacement requires replacement of the piston
assembly.

5. Install low/reverse clutch piston (1).

6. Assemble guide bracket (1) assembly as shown, if

necessary.
ProCarManuals.com

CAUTION: When installing, be sure guide bracket

and split sleeve touch the rear of the transmission
case.

7. Install guide bracket pivot pin (1).

8. Install park sprag pivot retaining screw and torque
to 4.5 N·m (40 in. lbs.).
9. Install low/reverse piston belleville spring (1) into
position.

10. Install and load low/reverse spring compressor

tool (3, 4, 5) as shown to facilitate snap ring (2)
installation.
ProCarManuals.com

11. Install snap ring (1) and remove compressor tool.

12. Install rear carrier (4) front bearing cone.
ProCarManuals.com

Check output bearing preload. Output bearing pre-

load must be checked and/or adjusted if any of the
following items have been replaced:
Output shaft (rear carrier assembly)
Output shaft bearings
Transmission case
13. PRELOAD CHECK/SHIM SELECTION: Install
rear output shaft bearing cone and special tool
6618A (1).
14. Install special tool 6618A (1). Lightly tighten
retaining screws. Screws should be below the
plate surface, but do not snug screws.
15. Turn case over on arbor press so that the plate is
resting on the press base. CAUTION: The output
shaft will extend through the hole of tool
6618A. Ensure your press table has clearance
for the output shaft.

16. Install shim (1) on output shaft (2). Apply small

amount of petrolatum onto the shim to hold it in
place. Use the original shim as a starting point. If
original shim is not available, use the thickest
shim available.
ProCarManuals.com
17. Install output shaft/rear carrier into rear bearing.
The shaft must be pressed into position. Use spe-
cial tool MD-998911 (Disc) (2) and C- 4171 and
C4171-2 (Handle) (1) to press shaft into rear
bearing.
ProCarManuals.com

CAUTION: Do not re-use old output shaft nut

because the removed stake weakens the nut
flange. Using special tools 6497 and 6498-A, install
new output shaft nut. Tighten new output shaft nut
to 271 N·m (200 ft. lbs.).

18. Check the turning torque (1) of the output shaft.

The shaft should have 1 to 8 in. lbs. of turning
torque. If the turning torque is higher than 8 in.
lbs., install a thicker shim. If turning torque is less
than 1 in. lb., install a thinner shim. Make sure
there is no end play.
CAUTION: Failure to stake nut could allow the nut
to back-off during use.

19. The new nut (3) must be staked after the correct
turning torque is obtained. Use special tool 6639
(2) to stake output shaft nut.
ProCarManuals.com

20. Verify that the nut has been properly staked to the
output shaft.
21. Install low/reverse clutch pack (1, 2). Leave
uppermost disc out to facilitate snap ring
installation.

22. Install low/reverse reaction plate snap ring (2).

ProCarManuals.com

23. Install one low/reverse clutch disc (1).

24. Install low/reverse reaction plate (1) with flat side
up.

25. Install a new tapered snap ring (2) (tapered side

out).
ProCarManuals.com
26. Make sure that the snap ring ends are oriented as
shown.
ProCarManuals.com

27. Measure low/reverse clutch pack. Set up dial indi-

cator (1) as shown. Press down clutch pack with
finger and zero dial indicator. Record measure-
ment in four (4) places and take average reading.
Low/Reverse clutch pack clearance is 0.84 to
1.60 mm (0.033 to 0.063 inch).
28. Select the proper low/reverse reaction plate to
achieve specifications.
29. Install 2/4 clutch pack (1, 2).

Note: The 2/4 Clutch Piston has bonded seals

which are not individually serviceable. Seal
replacement requires replacement of the piston
assembly.
ProCarManuals.com

30. Install 2/4 clutch belleville spring (1).

31. Verify the proper orientation of the return spring

(2) to the 2/4 retainer (3).
32. Install 2/4 clutch retainer (1).

Note: Verify that Tool 5058A (1) is centered prop-

33. Set up Tool 5058 (1) as shown. Compress 2/4

clutch just enough to facilitate snap ring
installation.

34. Measure 2/4 clutch clearance: Set up dial indi-

cator (1) as shown. Press down clutch pack with
finger and zero dial indicator. Record measure-
ment in four (4) places and take average reading.
The 2/4 clutch pack clearance is 0.76 to 2.64
mm (0.030 to 0.104 inch). If not within specifica-
tions, the clutch is not assembled properly or is
excessively worn. There is no adjustment for
the 2/4 clutch clearance.
35. Install the #7 needle bearing (1) to the rear sun
gear (2). The number 7 needle bearing has
three antireversal tabs and is common with
the number 5 and number 2 position. The ori-
entation should allow the bearing to seat flat
against the rear sun gear. A small amount of
petrolatum can be used to hold the bearing to
the rear sun gear.

36. Install rear sun gear (2) and #7 needle bearing

(1).
ProCarManuals.com

37. Install front carrier/rear annulus assembly (2) and

#6 needle bearing (1).
38. Install front sun gear assembly (1) and #4 thrust
washer (2).

39. Determine proper #4 thrust plate thickness. Select

the thinnest available #4 thrust plate.
40. Install #4 thrust plate (2) using petrolatum to hold
into position.
41. Install input clutch assembly. Ensure the input
ProCarManuals.com

clutch assembly is completely seated by viewing

position through input speed sensor hole. If the
speed sensor tone wheel is not centered in
the opening, the input clutches assembly is
not seated properly.

42. Remove the oil pump o-ring (2) and install oil
pump and gasket to transmission. Use screw-in
dowels or phillips-head screwdrivers to align
pump to case. Be sure to reinstall O-ring on
oil pump after selecting the proper No. 4
thrust plate.
43. Measure the input shaft end play with the trans-
mission in the vertical position. This will ensure
that the measurement will be accurate.
44. Set up and measure endplay using End Play Set
8266 (1, 2) and Dial Indicator Set C3339 (3) as
shown.
45. Measure input shaft end play. Input shaft end
play must be 0.127 to 0.635 mm (0.005 to 0.025
inch). For example, if end play reading is 0.055
inch, select No. 4 Thrust Plate which is 0.071 to
0.074 thick. This should provide an input shaft
end play reading of 0.020 inch, which is within
specifications.

46. Remove oil pump, gasket, and input clutch

ProCarManuals.com

assembly to gain access to and install proper #4

thrust plate.
47. Install input clutch assembly (1) with proper thrust
plate.
48. Install #1 caged needle bearing (1).

CAUTION: By-pass valve MUST be replaced if

transmission failure occurs.

49. Replace cooler by-pass valve (1) if transmission

failure has occurred.
ProCarManuals.com

Note: To align oil pump, gasket, and case during installation, use threaded dowels or phillips screwdrivers.

50. Install oil pump gasket (2).

51. Install oil pump (2) and torque oil pump-to-case
bolts (1) to 30 N·m (265 in. lbs.). Do not reuse
original oil pump bolts.

52. Install low/reverse accumulator (1) as shown.

ProCarManuals.com

53. Install low/reverse accumulator plug (2).

54. Install low/reverse accumulator snap ring (1).

55. Install underdrive (2) and overdrive (1) accumula-

tors and springs.
ProCarManuals.com

CAUTION: Do not handle the valve body by the

manual shaft. Damage could result.

56. Install valve body (1) into place as shown.

57. Install seven (7) valve body-to-case bolts (1) and
torque to 12 N·m (105 in. lbs.).

58. Install transmission oil filter (1) and o-ring. Tighten

the bolts to 5 N·m (45 in. lbs.).
59. If necessary, install a new transmission fill tube
grommet and extension into the transmission case
with Installer 8254.
ProCarManuals.com

60. Install transmission oil pan (1) with a bead of

Mopar ATF RTV.
Note: Before installing the oil pan bolt in the bolt
hole located between the torque converter clutch
on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits , it will be
necessary to replentish the sealing patch on the
bolt using Mopar Lock & Seal Adhesive.

61. Install and torque the oil pan-to-case bolts to 20

N·m (14.5 ft. lbs.).
ProCarManuals.com

Note: Before installing either speed sensor bolt, it

will be necessary to replentish the sealing patch
on the bolt using Mopar Lock & Seal Adhesive.

62. Install both speed sensors (1, 2) into the transmis-

sion case. Torque the speed sensor bolts to 9
N·m (80 in. lbs.).
63. As a final check of the transmission, measure the
input shaft end play. This will indicate when a #4
thrust plate change is required. The #4 thrust
plate is located behind the overdrive clutch hub.
Attach a dial indicator to transmission bell housing
with its plunger seated against end of input shaft.
Move input shaft in and out to obtain end play
reading. Input shaft end play must be 0.127 to
0.635 mm (0.005 to 0.025 inch). If not within
specifications, make the necessary thrust plate
adjustment.

64. Inspect the lube tube grommet (2) for damage. If

ProCarManuals.com

the grommet lip is damaged, it will need to be

replaced.
65. Install output shaft bearing in the rear transmis-
sion housing. Using Bearing Installer 9287 (1),
install the output shaft bearing (2) into the trans-
mission housing. The closed side of the plastic
cage must point towards the transmission.

66. Install the snap-ring into the groove in the output

shaft.
67. Install the output shaft into the output shaft bear-
ing.
68. Install the retaining ring (1). Ensure that the
ProCarManuals.com

retaining ring is seated correctly in the groove.

69. Install the output shaft washer onto the output
shaft.

70. Install a new transmission rear seal into the trans-

mission case with Seal Installer 8902A (1).
71. Install the propeller shaft flange onto the output
shaft and install an new flange nut finger tight.
72. Install the extension housing (2) onto the trans-
mission case.

Note: Before installing the lowermost four exten-

sion housing bolts, it will be necessary to replen-
tish the sealing patch on the bolts using Mopar
Lock & Seal Adhesive.
ProCarManuals.com

73. Install the bolts that hold the extension housing onto the transmission case. Be sure to install any stud bolts to
their original locations. Tighten the bolts to 54 N·m (40 ft.lbs.).

74. Verify that the transmission is in PARK in order to

prepare for the installation of the output shaft nut.
Tighten the flange nut to 120 N·m (88.5 ft.lbs.).
75. Stake the output shaft nut to the output shaft as
follows.Place the Staking Tool 9078 (2) and Driver
Handle C-4171 onto the output shaft.
76. Rotate the Staking Tool 9078 (2) until the align-
ment pin (3) engages the output shaft notch (4).
77. Press downward on the staking tool (1) until the
staking pin (3) contacts the output shaft nut flange
(2).
78. Strike the Driver handle C-4171 with a suitable
hammer until the output shaft nut is securely
staked to the output shaft.

3. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid.

4. Place torque converter (1) in position in transmis-

sion (2).

CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or con-

verter hub while inserting torque converter into
the front of the transmission.

5. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening.

6. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump.
7. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate con-
verter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump
gears.
8. Check converter seating with a scale and straight-
edge (A). Surface of converter lugs should be at
least 19 mm (3/4 in.) to rear of straightedge when
converter is fully seated.
9. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing.
10. Check condition of converter driveplate. Replace
the plate if cracked, distorted or damaged. Also
be sure transmission dowel pins are seated in
engine block and protrude far enough to hold
transmission in alignment.
11. Apply a light coating of Mopar High Temp
Grease to the torque converter hub pocket in the
rear pocket of the engine’s crankshaft.
12. Raise transmission (3) and align the torque con-
verter with the drive plate and the transmission
converter housing with the engine block (1).
13. Move transmission forward. Then raise, lower, or
tilt transmission to align the converter housing
with the engine block dowels.
14. Carefully work transmission forward and over
engine block dowels until converter hub is seated
in crankshaft. Verify that no wires, or the transmis-
sion vent hose, have become trapped between
the engine block and the transmission.
15. Install two bolts (2) to attach the transmission to
the engine.
ProCarManuals.com

16. Install remaining torque converter housing to engine bolts (2). Tighten to 39 N·m (29 ft.lbs.).

17. Install rear transmission crossmember (1). Tighten

22. Connect input (1) and output (2) speed sensor

wires and the transmission range sensor (3).
ProCarManuals.com

23. Connect wires to the solenoid/pressure switch

assembly (1).
24. Install the crankshaft position sensor. (Refer to 14
- FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL INJECTION/CRANK-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR - INSTALLATION)

25. Connect the gearshift cable (1) to the transmis-

sion manual shift lever (3).
ProCarManuals.com
CAUTION: It is essential that correct length bolts
be used to attach the converter to the driveplate.
Bolts that are too long will damage the clutch sur-
face inside the converter.

26. Install all torque converter-to-driveplate bolts (1)

by hand.
27. Verify that the torque converter is pulled flush to
the driveplate. Tighten bolts to 42 N·m (30.5 ft.
lbs.).

28. Install the torque converter bolt access cover (1)

onto the transmission, for vehicles equipped with
3.5L engines. Install the access cover bolt (2) and
tighten to 11 N·m (8 ft.lbs.).
ProCarManuals.com

29. Install the structural collar (2) and bolts (3, 4) for
vehicles equipped with a 2.7L engine.(Refer to 9 -
ENGINE - 2.7L/ENGINE BLOCK/STRUCTURAL
COVER - INSTALLATION)

30. Install starter motor (1). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-

CAL/STARTING/STARTER MOTOR -
INSTALLATION)

31. Connect the cooler line fittings (2) and cooler lines
(1) to the transmission.
ProCarManuals.com

32. Install the transmission fill tube (2).

33. Install exhaust components.
34. Align and connect the propeller shaft (1). (Refer to
3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER
SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
35. Adjust gearshift cable if necessary.
36. Lower vehicle.
37. Connect negative battery cable.
38. Fill transmission with appropriate transmission
fluid (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/
FLUID TYPES - DESCRIPTION) according to the
standard procedure (Refer to 21 - TRANSMIS-
SION/AUTOMATIC - NAG1/FILTER - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
39. Verify proper operation.
ProCarManuals.com
ProCarManuals.com

SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS - 42RLE TRANSMISSION

Park/Neutral (Speed Under 8 mph)

ProCarManuals.com

Neutral (Speed Over 8 mph)

ProCarManuals.com

Reverse
ProCarManuals.com

Reverse Block (Shift to Reverse w/Speed Over 8 mph)

ProCarManuals.com

First Gear
ProCarManuals.com

Second Gear
ProCarManuals.com

Second Gear (EMCC)

ProCarManuals.com

Direct Gear
ProCarManuals.com

Direct Gear (EMCC)

ProCarManuals.com

Direct Gear (CC On)

ProCarManuals.com

Overdrive
ProCarManuals.com

Overdrive (EMCC)
ProCarManuals.com

Overdrive (CC On)

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Description N·m Ft. Lbs. In. Lbs.

Bolt, Torque Converter Housing to Engine 68 50 -
Bolt, Converter-to-Driveplate 88 65 -
Bolt, Fluid Filter-to-Valve Body 5 - 45
Bolt, L/R Clutch Retainer-to-Case 5 - 45
Bolt, Adapter/Extension Housing 54 40 -
Bolt, Manual Valve Lever-to-Manual Valve 5 - 45
Bolt, Oil Pan-to-Case 20 14.5 -
Bolt, Oil Pump-to-Case 30 - 265
Bolt, Park Sprag Retainer 4.5 - 40
Bolt, Reaction Shaft Support Halves 28 - 250
Bolt, Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assy-to-
5.5 - 50
Valve Body
ProCarManuals.com

Bolt, Valve Body-to-Case 12 - 105

Bolt, Valve Body-to-Transfer Plate 5 - 45
Fitting, Cooler Line 47.5 35 -
Nut, Output Shaft 271 200 -
Plug, Pressure Tap 5 - 45
Bolt, Input Speed-to-Case Sensor 9 - 80
Bolt, Output Speed-to-Case Sensor 9 - 80
SPECIAL TOOLS
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION – 42RLE

Handle, Universal - C-4171

Gauge , Pressure (High) - C-3293SP

ProCarManuals.com

Extension, Handle - C-4171-2

Indicator, Dial - C-3339

Adapter Set - L-4559

Hammer, Slide - C-3752

Puller Set - 5048

Puller, Seal - C-3981B

Installer - 5050A Installer - 6052
ProCarManuals.com

Compressor - 5058A Disk - 6057

Compressor - 5059-A Tip - 6268

Installer - 5067 Remover/Installer - 6301

Puller Jaws - 6545
Remover/Installer - 6302

Remover - 6596
Remover - 6310
ProCarManuals.com

Remover - 6597

Wrench - 6497

Plate Set - 6599

Wrench - 6498-A

Plate, Support - 6618A

Tool, Staking - 6639

Installer, Seal - 8902A

ProCarManuals.com

Tool, Staking - 9078

End Play Set - 8266

Remover, Bearing - 9082

Fixture, Pressure - 8391

Installer, Bearing - 9287
ProCarManuals.com
ACCUMULATOR
DESCRIPTION

The 42RLE underdrive, overdrive, low/reverse, and

2/4 clutch hydraulic circuits each contain an accumu-
lator. An accumulator typically consists of a piston,
return spring(s), and a cover or plug. The overdrive (1)
and underdrive (2) accumulators are located within the
transmission case, and are retained by the valve body.
ProCarManuals.com

The low reverse (1) accumulator is also located within

the transmission case, but the assembly is retained by
a cover and a snap-ring.
The 2/4 accumulator (5) is located in the valve body. It
is retained by a cover and retaining screws.

OPERATION
The function of an accumulator is to cushion the application of a frictional clutch element. When pressurized fluid is
applied to a clutch circuit, the application force is dampened by fluid collecting in the respective accumulator cham-
ber against the piston and springs. The intended result is a smooth, firm clutch application.
ProCarManuals.com

BEARINGS
ADJUSTMENTS
BEARING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
Take extreme care when removing and installing bearing cups and cones. Use only an arbor press for installa-
tion, as a hammer may not properly align the bearing cup or cone. Burrs or nicks on the bearing seat will give a
false end play reading, while gauging for proper shims. Improperly seated bearing cup and cones are subject to
low-mileage failure.
Bearing cups and cones should be replaced if they show signs of pitting or heat distress.
If distress is seen on either the cup or bearing rollers, both cup and cone must be replaced.

Note: Bearing drag torque specifications must be maintained to avoid premature bearing failures.

Used (original) bearing may lose up to 50 percent of the original drag torque after break-in.

Note: All bearing adjustments must be made with no other component interference or gear inter-mesh.

Oil all bearings before checking turning torque.

MECHANISM-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
DESCRIPTION

The Brake Transmission Shifter/Ignition Interlock

(BTSI) is a cable operated system that prevents the
transmission gear shifter from being moved out of
PARK without the proper driver inputs. The system
also contains a solenoid that is integral to the shifter
assembly. The solenoid works in conjunction with the
park lock cable to permit shifter movement out of
PARK when the brake is depressed.
A BTSI override (2) is provided on the side of the
shifter mechanism (1) to allow the vehicle to be shifted
out of PARK in the event of an electrical failure.
ProCarManuals.com

OPERATION

The Brake Transmission Shifter/Ignition Interlock

(BTSI) is engaged whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (1) position. An additional electrically acti-
vated feature will prevent shifting out of the PARK
position unless the brake pedal is depressed at least
one-half inch. A solenoid in the shifter assembly is
energized when the brake pedal is depressed. When
the key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed, the shifter is unlocked and will move into
any position. The interlock system also prevents the
ignition switch from being turned to the LOCK position,
unless the shifter is in the gated PARK position.
The following chart describes the normal operation of the Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system. If the
“expected response” differs from the vehicle’s response, then system repair and/or adjustment is necessary.

ACTION EXPECTED RESPONSE

1. Turn key to the ACC position and depress brake 1. Shifter CAN be shifted out of park.
pedal.
2. Turn key to the ON position, with foot off of brake 2. Shifter CANNOT be shifted out of park.
pedal.
3. Turn key to the ON position and depress the brake 3. Shifter CAN be shifted out of park.
pedal.
4. Leave shifter in any gear position, except PARK, and 4. Key cannot be returned to the LOCK position.
try to return key to the LOCK position.
5. Return shifter to PARK and try to remove the key. 5. Key can be removed (after returning to LOCK
position).
6. With the key removed, and the brake depressed, try 6. Shifter cannot be shifted out of PARK .
to shift out of PARK .
NOTE: Any failure to meet these expected responses requires system adjustment or repair.

BTSI Override

In the event of an electrical failure, the vehicle can be

ProCarManuals.com

shifted out of PARK by using the following procedure.

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK

DIAGNOSTIC CHART

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

several times to verify operation.

ADJUSTMENTS - BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK

Note: If the key will not turn to the LOCK position, pull up on the cable lock button and manually move the
cable in and out until the key can be turned to the LOCK position.

4. Pull cable lock button up to release cable, if necessary.

NEUTRAL position, engine running and brakes applied- Apply forward force on center of shift handle. Trans-
mission should not be able to shift into REVERSE detent.

CLUTCHES-DRIVING
DESCRIPTION

Three hydraulically applied input clutches are used to

drive planetary components. The underdrive (2), over-
drive (3), and reverse (4) clutches are considered
input/driving clutches and are contained within the
input clutch assembly. The input clutch assembly also
contains:
Input shaft
Input hub
Clutch retainer
Underdrive piston
Overdrive/reverse piston
Overdrive hub
Underdrive hub
OPERATION
The three input clutches are responsible for driving different components of the planetary geartrain.

Note: (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for a collective view
of which clutch elements are applied at each position of the selector lever.

UNDERDRIVE CLUTCH
The underdrive clutch is hydraulically applied in first, second, and third (direct) gears by pressurized fluid against the
underdrive piston. When the underdrive clutch is applied, the underdrive hub drives the rear sun gear.

OVERDRIVE CLUTCH
The overdrive clutch is hydraulically applied in third (direct) and overdrive gears by pressurized fluid against the
overdrive/reverse piston. When the overdrive clutch is applied, the overdrive hub drives the front planet carrier.

REVERSE CLUTCH
The reverse clutch is hydraulically applied in reverse gear only by pressurized fluid against the overdrive/reverse
piston. When the reverse clutch is applied, the front sun gear assembly is driven.

FLUID AND FILTER

ProCarManuals.com

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID
Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has two primary causes.
1. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a
faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines
caused by debris or kinked lines.
2. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high
load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should
have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination
needed to handle heavy loads.

EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL

A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be
low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aer-
ates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid
overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes
fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be
mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful.

STANDARD PROCEDURE
CHECK OIL LEVEL
1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
2. Remove the dipstick tube cap.

3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position P .
ProCarManuals.com

4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling
5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil
Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil
level, repeat if necessary.

Note: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed.
ProCarManuals.com

42RLE Fluid Temperature Chart

6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool.
7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the
dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the
transmission oil level is correct.
8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level.
9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap.

FLUID/FILTER SERVICE
Note: Only fluids of the type labeled Mopar ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, should be used in the
transmission sump. A filter change should be made at the time of the transmission oil change. The magnet
(on the inside of the oil pan) should also be cleaned with a clean, dry cloth.

Note: If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed.

1. Raise vehicle on a hoist. Place a drain container with a large opening, under transmission oil pan.
Note: One of the oil pan bolts (5) has a sealing
patch applied from the factory. Separate this bolt
for reuse.

2. Loosen pan bolts and tap the pan at one corner to

break it loose allowing fluid to drain, then remove
the oil pan.
3. Install a new filter and o-ring on bottom of the valve
body and tighten retaining screws to 5 N·m (40 in.
lbs.).

Note: Before installing the oil pan bolt (5) in the

bolt hole located between the torque converter
clutch on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits, it
will be necessary to replentish the sealing patch
on the bolt using Mopar Lock & Seal Adhesive.

4. Clean the oil pan and magnet. Reinstall pan using

new Mopar Silicone Adhesive sealant. Tighten oil
pan bolts to 19 N·m (165 in. lbs.).
5. Pour four quarts of Mopar ATF+4, Automatic
Transmission Fluid, through the dipstick opening.
6. Start engine and allow to idle for at least one minute. Then, with parking and service brakes applied, move selec-
ProCarManuals.com

tor lever momentarily to each position, ending in the park or neutral position.
7. Check the transmission fluid level and add an appropriate amount to bring the transmission fluid level to 3mm
(1/8 in.) below the lowest mark on the dipstick.
8. Recheck the fluid level after the transmission has reached normal operating temperature (180°F.).
9. To prevent dirt from entering transmission, make certain that dipstick is fully seated into the dipstick opening.

TRANSMISSION FILL
To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure:
1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube.
2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, to transmission:
a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 3 pints (1-1/2 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission.
b. If transmission was completely overhauled, or torque converter was replaced or drained, add 12 pints (6
quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission.
3. Apply parking brakes.
4. Start and run engine at normal curb idle speed.
5. Apply service brakes, shift transmission through all gear ranges then back to NEUTRAL, set parking brake, and
leave engine running at curb idle speed.
6. Remove funnel, insert dipstick and check fluid level. If level is low, add fluid to bring level to MIN mark on
dipstick. Check to see if the oil level is equal on both sides of the dipstick. If one side is noticably higher than
the other, the dipstick has picked up some oil from the dipstick tube. Allow the oil to drain down the dipstick tube
and re-check.
7. Drive vehicle until transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature.
8. With the engine running at curb idle speed, the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and the parking brake applied, check
the transmission fluid level.

CAUTION: Do not overfill transmission, fluid foaming and shifting problems can result.

9. Add fluid to bring level up to MAX arrow mark.

When fluid level is correct, shut engine off, release park brake, remove funnel, and install dipstick in fill tube.
CABLE-GEARSHIFT
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE
1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be
possible in any other gear position.
2. With the shift lever in the:
a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible.
b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be pos-
sible.
c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible.
d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission
shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse.

REMOVAL
1. Shift transmission into PARK.
2. Raise vehicle.
3. Disengage the gearshift cable (1) eyelet at trans-
mission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable out of
ProCarManuals.com

mounting bracket (2).

4. Lower the vehicle.

5. Remove the floor console (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
TERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - REMOVAL) as nec-
essary to access the shift mechanism and cables.
6. If necessary, remove the bolts holding the shield,
covering the gearshift and park lock cables, to the
floorpan and remove the shield.
7. Remove the gearshift cable (1) from the shift lever
pin (3).
8. Remove the gearshift cable retainer (2) from the notch (2) in the shifter assembly.

9. From under the hood, remove the shift cable grom-

met (2) from the dash panel.
10. Remove gearshift cable (1) from vehicle.
ProCarManuals.com

INSTALLATION
1. From under the hood, route the gearshift cable (1)
through the dash panel and toward the shifter
assembly.
2. Install the grommet (2) to the dash panel.
3. Engage the gearshift cable retainer (2) into the
notch (2) in the shifter assembly.
4. Install the gearshift cable (1) onto the shift lever pin
(3).
5. Loosen the cable adjustment screw (5), if
necessary.

6. From under the hood, route the gearshift cable (1)

forward of the air conditioning lines and the heater
hoses (2) and toward the transmission (3) manual
lever.
ProCarManuals.com
7. Raise vehicle.
8. Verify that the transmission is in the PARK position
by trying to rotate the propeller shaft. If the propel-
ler shaft rotates, move the transmission manual
shift lever until the PARK system is engaged.
9. Route the gearshift cable (1) through the mounting
bracket (2).
10. Engage the gearshift cable (1) eyelet onto the
transmission manual shift lever (3).
ProCarManuals.com

11. Lower vehicle.

12. Verify that the shifter is in the PARK position and
tighten the adjustment screw (5) to 7 N·m (65
in.lbs.).
13. Verify correct shifter operation.
14. If necessary, install the shield, covering the gear-
shift and park lock cables, to the floorpan and
install the bolts to hold the shield to the floorpan.
15. Install the floor console (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
TERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION) as
necessary.

ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE

Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only
in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts
in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the park/neutral position contact
may be faulty.
1. Shift transmission into PARK.
2. Remove floor console as necessary for access to
the shift cable adjustment. (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
TERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - REMOVAL)
3. Loosen the shift cable adjustment screw (5).

when park lock is engaged.

8. Snap cable eyelet onto transmission shift lever.

Two hydraulically applied multi-disc clutches are used

to hold planetary geartrain components stationary
while the input clutches drive others. The 2/4 (2) and
Low/Reverse (3) clutches are considered holding
clutches and are contained at the rear of the transmis-
sion case.
ProCarManuals.com

OPERATION
Note: (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for a collective view
of which clutch elements are applied at each position of the selector lever.

2/4 CLUTCH
The 2/4 clutch is hydraulically applied in second and fourth gears by pressurized fluid against the 2/4 clutch piston.
When the 2/4 clutch is applied, the front sun gear assembly is held or grounded to the transmission case.

LOW/REVERSE CLUTCH
The Low/Reverse clutch is hydraulically applied in park, reverse, neutral, and first gears by pressurized fluid against
the Low/Reverse clutch piston. When the Low/Reverse clutch is applied, the front planet carrier/rear annulus assem-
bly is held or grounded to the transmission case.
ASSEMBLY-INPUT CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
1. Mount input clutch assembly to Input Clutch Pres-
sure Fixture (Tool 8391).
2. Tap down (2) reverse clutch reaction plate (4) to
release pressure from snap ring.

3. Remove reverse clutch snap ring (3).

ProCarManuals.com

4. Pry up reverse clutch reaction plate (1).

5. Remove reverse clutch reaction plate (1).

Note: Tag reverse clutch pack for reassembly iden-

tification.

6. Remove the reverse clutch pack (two fibers/one

steel) (1, 2).
ProCarManuals.com

7. Remove the OD/Reverse reaction plate (1) snap

ring (3).
8. Remove OD/Reverse pressure plate (1).

9. Remove OD/Reverse reaction plate wave snap ring

(2).
ProCarManuals.com

10. Remove OD shaft/hub and OD clutch pack (1).

Note: Tag overdrive clutch pack for reassembly
identification.

11. Remove the overdrive clutch (1, 3) from the over-

drive hub/shaft (2).

12. Remove and inspect number 3 and 4 thrust plates

(1, 3).
ProCarManuals.com

13. Remove the underdrive shaft assembly (2).

14. Remove the number 2 needle bearing (1).

15. Remove the OD/UD reaction plate tapered snap

ring (1).
ProCarManuals.com

Note: The OD/UD clutch reaction plate has a step

on both sides. The OD/UD clutches reaction plate
goes tapered step side up.

16. Remove the OD/UD reaction plate (1).

17. Remove the first UD clutch disc (1).

18. Remove the UD clutch flat snap ring (1).

ProCarManuals.com

Note: Tag underdrive clutch pack for reassembly

identification.

19. Remove the UD clutch pack (1, 3).

CAUTION: Compress return spring just enough to
remove or install snap ring.

20. Using Tool 5059A (4) and an arbor press (2),

compress UD clutch piston enough to remove
snap ring (3).

21. Remove the underdrive spring retainer snap ring

(2), spring retainer (1), and spring (4).
ProCarManuals.com

22. Remove the UD clutch piston (1).

23. Remove the input hub tapered snap ring (2).

24. Tap on input hub (1) with soft faced hammer (2)
and separate input hub from OD/Reverse piston
and clutch retainer.
ProCarManuals.com

25. Separate the input hub from OD/Reverse piston

(5) and clutch retainer (2).
26. Separate clutch retainer (2) from OD/Reverse pis-
ton (1).

27. Using Tool 6057 (4) and an arbor press(1), com-

press OD/Reverse piston (5) return spring just
enough to remove snap ring (3).
ProCarManuals.com

28. Remove the OD/Reverse piston (5) return spring

and snap ring (3).
29. Remove input shaft (1) to input clutch hub snap
ring (3).

30. Using a suitably sized socket (2) and an arbor

press (1), remove input shaft (5) from input shaft
hub.
ProCarManuals.com

ASSEMBLY
Use petrolatum on all seals to ease assembly of components.

1. Using an arbor press(2), install input shaft (1) to

input shaft hub (2).
2. Install input shaft snap ring (3).

3. Position the OD/Reverse piston return spring (2)

and snap ring (3) onto the OD/Reverse piston (1).
ProCarManuals.com

4. Using an arbor press (1) and Tool 6057 (4), install

the OD/Reverse piston return spring (6) and snap
ring (3).
5. Install the OD/Reverse piston (1) assembly to the
input clutch retainer (2).

6. Install the input hub/shaft assembly (1) to the

OD/Reverse piston/clutch retainer assembly (2).
ProCarManuals.com

7. Install input hub tapered snap ring (2). Make sure

snap ring is fully seated.
8. Install the UD clutch piston (1).

9. Install UD piston return spring (1)and Tool 5067 (2).

ProCarManuals.com

10. Position the UD spring retainer (1) and snap ring

(2) on the piston return spring (4).
CAUTION: Compress return spring just enough to
install snap ring.

11. Using Tool 5059A (6) and an arbor press (1),

install the UD spring retainer and snap ring (3).

12. Install the UD clutch pack (four fibers/four steels)

(1, 3). Leave the top disc (2) out until after the
snap ring is installed.
ProCarManuals.com

13. Install the UD clutch flat snap ring (1).

14. Install the last UD clutch disc (1).

15. Install the OD/UD clutch reaction plate (1). The

OD/UD clutches reaction plate has a step on both
sides. Install the OD/UD clutches reaction plate
tapered step side up.
ProCarManuals.com

Note: Snap ring ends must be located within one

finger of the input clutch hub. Be sure that snap
ring is fully seated, by pushing with screwdriver,
into snap ring groove all the way around.

16. Install the UD/OD tapered snap ring (1).

17. Seat tapered snap ring (1) to ensure proper
installation.

18. Install input clutch assembly (1) to the Input

Clutch Pressure Fixture 8391 (2).
ProCarManuals.com
19. Set up dial indicator (1) on the UD clutch pack
(2).
ProCarManuals.com

20. Using moderate pressure, press down and hold

(near indicator) the UD clutch pack (2) with screw-
driver or suitable tool and zero dial indicator (1).
When releasing pressure on clutch pack, indicator
reading should advance 0.005-0.010 inches.

CAUTION: Do not apply more than 30 psi (206

kPa) to the underdrive clutch pack.

21. Apply 30 psi (206 kPa) to the underdrive hose on

Tool 8391 and measure UD clutch clearance.
Measure and record UD clutch pack measure-
ment in four (4) places, 90° apart.
22. Take average of four measurements and compare
with UD clutch pack clearance specification.
Underdrive clutch pack clearance must be
0.94-1.50 mm (0.037-0.059 in.).
23. If necessary, select the proper reaction plate to
achieve specifications.
24. Install the OD clutch pack (four fibers/three steels)
(1).

25. Install OD reaction plate waved snap ring (1).

ProCarManuals.com

26. Install the OD/Reverse reaction plate (1) with

large step down (towards OD clutch pack).
27. Install OD reaction plate flat snap ring (3).

28. Measure OD clutch pack clearance. Set up dial

indicator (1) on top of the OD/Reverse reaction
plate (2).
29. Zero dial indicator and apply 30 psi (206 kPa) air
pressure to the overdrive clutch hose on Tool
8391. Measure and record OD clutch pack mea-
ProCarManuals.com

surement in four (4) places, 90° apart.

30. Take average of four measurements and compare
with OD clutch pack clearance specification. The
overdrive (OD) clutch pack clearance is
1.07-3.25 mm (0.042-0.128 in.).
If not within specifications, the clutch is not assembled
properly. There is no adjustment for the OD clutch
clearance.

31. Install reverse clutch pack (two fibers/one steel)

(1, 2).
32. Install reverse clutch reaction plate (1) with the
flat side down towards reverse clutch.

33. Tap reaction plate (3) down to allow installation of

the reverse clutch snap ring (1). Install reverse
clutch snap ring (1).
ProCarManuals.com

34. Pry up reverse reaction plate (4) to seat against

snap ring (2).
35. Set up a dial indicator (1) on the reverse clutch
pack (2).
ProCarManuals.com

36. Using moderate pressure, press down and hold

(near indicator) reverse clutch disc (2) with screw-
driver or suitable tool and zero dial indicator (1).
When releasing pressure, indicator should
advance 0.005-0.010 inches as clutch pack
relaxes.
37. Apply 30 psi (206 kPa) air pressure to the reverse
clutch hose on Tool 8391. Measure and record
reverse clutch pack measurement in four (4)
places, 90° apart.
38. Take average of four measurements and compare
with reverse clutch pack clearance specification.
The reverse clutch pack clearance is 0.89-1.37
mm (0.035-0.054 in.). Select the proper reverse
clutch snap ring to achieve specifications.
39. To complete the assembly, reverse clutch and
overdrive clutch must be removed.
40. Install the number 2 needle bearing (1).

41. Install the underdrive shaft assembly (1).

ProCarManuals.com

42. Install the number 3 thrust washer (1) to the

underdrive shaft assembly (2). Be sure five tabs
are seated properly.
43. Install the number 3 thrust plate (3) to the bottom
of the overdrive shaft assembly (1). Retain with
petrolatum or transmission assembly gel (2).

44. Install the overdrive shaft assembly (1).

ProCarManuals.com

45. Reinstall overdrive and reverse clutch. Recheck-

ing these clutch clearances is not necessary.
SENSOR-INPUT SPEED
DESCRIPTION

OPERATION
ProCarManuals.com

The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch
hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information
as input shaft rpm.
The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the
rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm.
The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following:
Transmission gear ratio
Speed ratio error detection
CVI calculation
The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following:
Torque converter clutch slippage
Torque converter element speed ratio

REMOVAL
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmis-
sion.
3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed
sensor 91).

Note: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch

applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the
same bolt.

4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor (1)

to the transmission case.
5. Remove the input speed sensor (1) from the trans-
mission case.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the input speed sensor (1) into the transmis-
sion case.

Note: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it

will be necessary to replentish the sealing patch
on the bolt using Mopar Lock & Seal Adhesive.

2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (1)

into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9
N·m (80 in.lbs.).
3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed
sensor
4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as nec-
essary. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION - 42RLE/FLUID -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
5. Lower vehicle.

PUMP-OIL
ProCarManuals.com

DESCRIPTION

The oil pump is located in the pump housing inside

the bell housing of the transmission case. The oil
pump assembly consists of an inner (3) and outer (2)
gear, a housing (1), and a cover that also serves as
the reaction shaft support (6).

OPERATION
As the torque converter rotates, the converter hub rotates the inner and outer gears. As the gears rotate, the clear-
ance between the gear teeth increases in the crescent area, and creates a suction at the inlet side of the pump.
This suction draws fluid through the pump inlet from the oil pan. As the clearance between the gear teeth in the
crescent area decreases, it forces pressurized fluid into the pump outlet and to the valve body.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the reaction shaft support bolts.
2. Remove the reaction shaft support(2) from the
pump housing (1).

3. Remove the pump gears (2, 3) and check for wear

and damage on pump housing (1) and gears (2, 3).
ProCarManuals.com

4. Re-install the gears and check clearances.

5. Measure the clearance between the outer gear (1)
and the pump pocket (2). Clearance should be
0.089-0.202 mm (0.0035-0.0079 in.).
6. Measure clearance between outer gear and cres-
cent. Clearance should be 0.060-0.298 mm
(0.0023-0.0117 in.).
7. Measure clearance between inner gear and cres-
cent. Clearance should be 0.093-0.385 mm
(0.0036-0.0151 in.).
8. Position an appropriate piece of Plastigage across
both pump gears.
9. Align the Plastigage to a flat area on the reaction
shaft support housing.
10. Install the reaction shaft to the pump housing. Tighten the bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
11. Remove bolts and carefully separate the housings. Measure the Plastigage following the instructions supplied.
12. Clearance between outer gear side and the reaction shaft support should be 0.020-0.046 mm (0.0008-0.0018
in.). Clearance between inner gear side and the reaction shaft support should be 0.020-0.046 mm (0.0008-
0.0018 in.).

ASSEMBLY
1. Assemble oil pump as shown
2. Install and torque reaction shaft support-to-oil pump
housing bolts to 28 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
ProCarManuals.com

BEARING-OUTPUT SHAFT
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support vehicle.
2. Remove the propeller shaft (Refer to 3 - DIFFER-
ENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT/PRO-
PELLER SHAFT - REMOVAL).
3. Verify that the transmission is in PARK in order to
prepare for the removal of the output shaft nut.
4. Remove the nut holding the propeller shaft flange
to the output shaft and remove the flange.
5. Remove the transmission rear oil seal with a suit-
able slide hammer and screw.
6. Remove the transmission rear output shaft bearing
retaining ring (1).
7. Position Bearing Remover 9082 (1) over the inner
race of the output shaft bearing.
ProCarManuals.com

8. Slide the collar (3) on the Bearing Remover 9082

(1) downward over the fingers (3) of the tool.
9. Remove the output shaft bearing (3).

INSTALLATION
ProCarManuals.com

1. Install output shaft bearing in the rear transmission

housing. Using Bearing Installer 9287 (1), install
the output shaft bearing (2) into the transmission
housing. The closed side of the plastic cage
must point towards the transmission.
2. Install the retaining ring (1). Ensure that the retain-
ing ring is seated correctly in the groove.
3. Install the output shaft washer onto the output
shaft.

4. Install a new transmission rear seal into the trans-

mission case with Seal Installer 8902A (1).
5. Verify that the transmission is in PARK in order to
prepare for the installation of the output shaft nut.
6. Install the propeller shaft flange onto the output
ProCarManuals.com

shaft and install an new flange nut. Tighten the

flange nut to 120 N·m (88.5 ft.lbs.).

7. Stake the output shaft nut to the output shaft as

follows.Place the Staking Tool 9078 (2) and Driver
Handle C-4171 onto the output shaft.
8. Rotate the Staking Tool 9078 (2) until the alignment
pin (3) engages the output shaft notch (4).
9. Press downward on the staking tool (1) until the
staking pin (3) contacts the output shaft nut flange
(2).
10. Strike the Driver handle C-4171 with a suitable
hammer until the output shaft nut is securely
staked to the output shaft.
11. Install the propeller shaft (Refer to 3 - DIFFEREN-
TIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT/PRO-
PELLER SHAFT - INSTALLATION).

7. Press downward on the staking tool until the stak-

ing pin (3) contacts the output shaft nut flange (2).
8. Strike the Driver handle C-4171 with a suitable
hammer until the output shaft nut is securely
staked to the output shaft.
ProCarManuals.com

9. Install the propeller shaft (Refer to 3 - DIFFEREN-

TIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT/PRO-
PELLER SHAFT - INSTALLATION).

SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED
DESCRIPTION

The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-
wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals
as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side
of the transmission case and are considered primary
inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM).
OPERATION
The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch
hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information
as input shaft rpm.
The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the
rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm.
The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following:
Transmission gear ratio
Speed ratio error detection
CVI calculation
The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following:
Torque converter clutch slippage
Torque converter element speed ratio

REMOVAL
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmis-
sion.
3. Remove the wiring connector from the output
ProCarManuals.com

speed sensor (2).

Note: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch

applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the
same bolt.

4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor

(2) to the transmission case.
5. Remove the output speed sensor (2) from the
transmission case.

INSTALLATION
1. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the trans-
mission case.

Note: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it

will be necessary to replentish the sealing patch
on the bolt using Mopar Lock & Seal Adhesive.

2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (2)

into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9
N·m (80 in.lbs.).
3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed
sensor (2).
4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as nec-
essary. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION - 42RLE/FLUID -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
5. Lower vehicle.
CABLE-PARK LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Place ignition key in the ACC (2) position.
ProCarManuals.com

2. Remove the lower instrument panel trim as neces-

INSTALLATION
ProCarManuals.com

1. Verify that ignition key is in ACC (2) position.

4. Route park lock cable towards shift mechanism.

5. Connect the park lock cable core to shift mecha-
nism cam (3), and then secure cable housing to
shift mechanism.

6. Adjust the park lock cable. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/SHIFT INTERLOCK

The planetary geartrain is located between the input

clutch assembly and the rear of the transmission case.
The planetary geartrain consists of two sun gears, two
planetary carriers, two annulus (ring) gears, and one
output shaft.

OPERATION
ProCarManuals.com

The planetary geartrain utilizes two planetary gear sets that connect the transmission input shaft to the output shaft.
Input and holding clutches drive or lock different planetary members to change output ratio or direction.

SEAL-OIL PUMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - REMOVAL).
2. Remove the torque converter from the transmission bellhousing.
3. Use special tool C-3981B to remove oil pump seal.

INSTALLATION
1. Clean and inspect oil pump seal seat. Then install seal using special tool C-4193-A.
2. Clean and inspect torque converter hub. If nicks, scratches or hub wear are found, torque converter replacement
will be required.

CAUTION: If the torque converter is being replaced, apply a light coating of grease to the crankshaft pilot
hole. Also inspect the engine drive plate for cracks. If any cracks are found replace the drive plate. Do not
attempt to repair a cracked drive plate. Always use new torque converter to drive plate bolts.

3. Apply a light film of transmission oil to the torque converter hub and oil seal lips. Then install torque converter
into transmission. Be sure that the hub lugs mesh with the front pump lugs when installing.
4. Reinstall the transmission into the vehicle.(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE -
INSTALLATION)
MECHANISM-SHIFT
DESCRIPTION

The automatic transmission is operated with the help

of a shift lever assembly (SLA) (1) located in the floor
console. There are six positions to which the selection
lever can be shifted: P, R, N, D, 3, L.
All selector lever positions are identified by the SLA
and transmitted by a shift cable to the selector shaft in
the transmission.
ProCarManuals.com

The SLA is comprised of the following functions:

OPERATION
With the selector lever in position D , the transmission control module (TCM) automatically shifts the gears that are
best-suited to the current operating situation. This means that shifting of gears is continuously adjusted to current
driving and operating conditions in line with the selected shift range and the accelerator pedal position. Starting off
is always performed in 1st gear.
The current selector lever position or, if the shift range has been limited, the current shift range is indicated in the
instrument cluster display.
The permissible shifter positions and transmission operating ranges are:
P = Parking lock and engine starting.
R = Reverse.
N = Neutral and engine starting (no power is transmitted to the axles).
D = The shift range includes all forward gears.
3= Shift range is limited to gears 1 to 3.
1= Shift range is limited to the 1st gear.
REMOVAL
1. Remove any necessary console parts for access to
shift lever assembly and shifter cables. (Refer to 23
- BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE -
REMOVAL)
2. If necessary, remove the bolts holding the shield,
covering the gearshift and park lock cables, to the
floorpan and remove the shield.
3. Shift transmission into PARK.
4. Disconnect the transmission shift cable (1) at shift
lever (3) and shifter assembly bracket (2).
5. Remove the shift cable retainer (2) from the notch
in the shifter assembly (2).

6. Verify the key is in the LOCK position and discon-

nect the park lock cable (1) from the shifter
ProCarManuals.com

mechansim cam (3) and the notch in the shifter

assembly (3).
7. Disengage all wiring connectors (2) from the shifter
assembly (1).

8. Remove all nuts (2) holding the shifter assembly

(1) to the floor pan.
ProCarManuals.com

9. Remove the shifter assembly (1) from the vehicle.

INSTALLATION
1. Install shifter assembly (1) onto the shifter assem-
bly studs on the floor pan.
2. Install the nuts (2) to hold the shifter assembly (1)
onto the floor pan. Tighten nuts to 7 N·m (652
in.lbs.).
ProCarManuals.com

3. Place the floor shifter lever in PARK position.

4. Loosen the adjustment screw (5) on the gearshift
cable (1).
5. Install the gearshift cable (1) to the shift lever pin
(3).
6. Install the park lock cable (1) to the shift mecha-
nism cam (3) and the notch in the shifter assembly
(2).
7. Verify that the key is in the LOCK position and
remains there until the cable is fully adjusted.
8. Verify that the park lock cable adjustment tab is
pulled upward to the unlocked position.
ProCarManuals.com

9. Install the wiring harness connectors (2) to the

shifter assembly.
10. Verify that the shift lever is in the PARK position.
11. Tighten the adjustment screw to 7 N·m (65
in.lbs.).
12. Verify that the key in the LOCK position and the
shifter is in PARK.
13. Push downward on the park lock cable adjust-
ment tab to lock the adjustment.
14. Verify correct shifter, park lock, and BTSI opera-
tion.
15. If necessary, install the shield, covering the gear-
shift and park lock cables, to the floorpan and
install the bolts to hold the shield to the floorpan.
16. Install any console parts removed for access to
shift lever assembly and shift cables. (Refer to 23
- BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTAL-
LATION)

SOLENOID
DESCRIPTION
The typical electrical solenoid used in automotive applications is a linear actuator. It is a device that produces
motion in a straight line. This straight line motion can be either forward or backward in direction, and short or long
distance.
A solenoid is an electromechanical device that uses a magnetic force to perform work. It consists of a coil of wire,
wrapped around a magnetic core made from steel or iron, and a spring loaded, movable plunger, which performs
the work, or straight line motion.
The solenoids used in transmission applications are
attached to valves which can be classified as nor-
mally open or normally closed. The normally open
solenoid valve is defined as a valve which allows
hydraulic flow when no current or voltage is applied to
the solenoid. The normally closed solenoid valve is
defined as a valve which does not allow hydraulic flow
when no current or voltage is applied to the solenoid.
These valves perform hydraulic control functions for
the transmission and must therefore be durable and
tolerant of dirt particles. For these reasons, the valves
have hardened steel poppets and ball valves. The
solenoids operate the valves directly, which means
that the solenoids must have very high outputs to
close the valves against the sizable flow areas and
line pressures found in current transmissions. Fast
response time is also necessary to ensure accurate 1 - MANUAL VALVE
2 - LINE PRESSURE
control of the transmission. 3 - 2/4 - LOW REVERSE SOLENOID ENERGIZED
4 - UNDERDRIVE SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED
5 - UNDERDRIVE CLUTCH
ProCarManuals.com

The strength of the magnetic field is the primary force

that determines the speed of operation in a particular
solenoid design. A stronger magnetic field will cause
the plunger to move at a greater speed than a weaker
one. There are basically two ways to increase the
force of the magnetic field:
1. Increase the amount of current applied to the
coil or
2. Increase the number of turns of wire in the coil.
The most common practice is to increase the number
of turns by using thin wire that can completely fill the
available space within the solenoid housing. The
strength of the spring and the length of the plunger
also contribute to the response speed possible by a
particular solenoid design.
A solenoid can also be described by the method by
1 - OVERDRIVE CLUTCH
which it is controlled. Some of the possibilities include 2 - NO VENT
variable force, pulse-width modulated, constant ON, or 3 - OVERDRIVE SOLENOID ENERGIZED
duty cycle. The variable force and pulse-width modu- 4 - MANUAL VALVE
5 - LOW REVERSE/CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID DE-
lated versions utilize similar methods to control the ENERGIZED
current flow through the solenoid to position the sole- 6 - SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
noid plunger at a desired position somewhere 7 - TAPER
8 - VENT TO SUMP
between full ON and full OFF. The constant ON and 9 - ORIFICE
duty cycled versions control the voltage across the 10 - CHECK BALL
solenoid to allow either full flow or no flow through the
solenoid’s valve.

ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside

the transmission and mounted to the valve body
assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids
that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD,
and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and
the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is con-
trolled by line pressure from the manual valve in the
valve body. The solenoids are contained within the
Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be
serviced by replacing the assembly.
The solenoid assembly also contains pressure
switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit infor-
mation to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches
ProCarManuals.com

can only be service by replacing the assembly.

OPERATION
SOLENOIDS
The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM ener-
gizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid
is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on
its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element.
The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or “off” state. By
design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure.
The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on
its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the
circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a
speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs.

PRESSURE SWITCHES
The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The
primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range
for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approxi-
mately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The
switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in
the following chart:
PRESSURE SWITCH STATES

GEAR L/R 2/4 OD

R OP OP OP
P/N CL OP OP
1st CL OP OP
2nd OP CL OP
D OP OP CL
OD OP CL CL
OP = OPEN
CL = CLOSED
A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given
gear.
The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st
gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed
state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine
speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to
identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn’t close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the
second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set.
ProCarManuals.com

REMOVAL
Note: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be per-
formed. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)

1. Raise vehicle on hoist.

2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission.
(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC -
42RLE/VALVE BODY - REMOVAL)
3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly
retaining screws (2) from solenoid.
4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1)
and screen from valve body (2).

INSTALLATION
Note: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be per-
formed. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
ProCarManuals.com

1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and

screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates.

2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 N·m

(50 in. lbs.) torque.
3. Install valve body. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/
AUTOMATIC - 42RLE/VALVE BODY - INSTALLA-
TION)
CONVERTER-TORQUE
DESCRIPTION

The torque converter is a hydraulic device that cou-

ples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The
torque converter consists of an outer shell with an
internal turbine, a stator, an overrunning clutch, an
impeller and an electronically applied converter clutch.
The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed
and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch
engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid
temperatures. The torque converter hub drives the
transmission oil (fluid) pump.
The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is
not repairable and is serviced as an assembly.

CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced

if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts
of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid.
ProCarManuals.com
IMPELLER
ProCarManuals.com

Impeller

1 - ENGINE FLEXPLATE 4 - ENGINE ROTATION

2 - OIL FLOW FROM IMPELLER SECTION INTO TURBINE 5 - ENGINE ROTATION
SECTION
3 - IMPELLER VANES AND COVER ARE INTEGRAL

The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially
along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the
engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system.
TURBINE
ProCarManuals.com

Turbine

1 - TURBINE VANE 4 - PORTION OF TORQUE CONVERTER COVER

2 - ENGINE ROTATION 5 - ENGINE ROTATION
3 - INPUT SHAFT 6 - OIL FLOW WITHIN TURBINE SECTION

The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite
the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and
splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are
curved in the opposite direction.
STATOR

The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft

which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator (1)
is located between the impeller (2) and the turbine (4)
within the torque converter case.
ProCarManuals.com

The stator contains an over-running clutch (1-4), which

allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction.
When the stator is locked against the over-running
clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque
converter is operational.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)

The TCC was installed to improve the efficiency of the

torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the fluid
coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides smooth,
shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all fluid cou-
plings to slip. If the impeller (3) and turbine (5) were
mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condi-
tion could be obtained. A hydraulic piston (6) with fric-
tion material (7) was added to the turbine assembly
(5) to provide this mechanical lock-up.
In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission
and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations,
the TCM can duty cycle the L/R-CC Solenoid to
achieve a smooth application of the torque converter
clutch. This function, referred to as Electronically Mod-
ulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) can occur at various
times depending on the following variables:
Shift lever position
Current gear range
Transmission fluid temperature
Engine coolant temperature
ProCarManuals.com

Input speed
Throttle angle
Engine speed
OPERATION
ProCarManuals.com

Torque Converter Fluid Operation - Typical

1 - APPLY PRESSURE 3 - RELEASE PRESSURE

2 - THE PISTON MOVES SLIGHTLY FORWARD 4 - THE PISTON MOVES SLIGHTLY REARWARD

The converter impeller (driving member), which is integral to the converter housing and bolted to the engine drive
plate, rotates at engine speed. The converter turbine (driven member), which reacts from fluid pressure generated
by the impeller, rotates and turns the transmission input shaft.

Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the sta-

tor’s over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall condi-
tions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the
turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and
tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction.
When this happens the over-running clutch of the sta-
tor locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the
stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is
redirected into a “helping” direction before it enters the
impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine,
turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a
maximum torque multiplication of about 2.4:1. As the
turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the
fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to
cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this con-
dition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and
the converter acts as a fluid coupling. 1 - DIRECTION STATOR WILL FREE WHEEL DUE TO OIL
PUSHING ON BACKSIDE OF VANES
2 - FRONT OF ENGINE
3 - INCREASED ANGLE AS OIL STRIKES VANES
4 - DIRECTION STATOR IS LOCKED UP DUE TO OIL PUSHING
AGAINST STATOR VANES
ProCarManuals.com

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)

In a standard torque converter, the impeller and turbine are rotating at about the same speed and the stator is
freewheeling, providing no torque multiplication. By applying the turbine’s piston and friction material to the front
cover, a total converter engagement can be obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1 mechanical link
between the engine and the transmission.
The clutch can be engaged in second, third, and fourth gear ranges depending on overdrive control switch position.
If the overdrive control switch is in the normal ON position, the clutch will engage after the shift to fourth gear. If the
control switch is in the OFF position, the clutch will engage after the shift to third gear.
The TCM controls the torque converter by way of internal logic software. The programming of the software provides
the TCM with control over the L/R-CC Solenoid. There are four output logic states that can be applied as follows:
No EMCC
Partial EMCC
Full EMCC
Gradual-to-no EMCC

NO EMCC

Under No EMCC conditions, the L/R Solenoid is OFF. There are several conditions that can result in NO EMCC
operations. No EMCC can be initiated due to a fault in the transmission or because the TCM does not see the need
for EMCC under current driving conditions.

PARTIAL EMCC

Partial EMCC operation modulates the L/R Solenoid (duty cycle) to obtain partial torque converter clutch application.
Partial EMCC operation is maintained until Full EMCC is called for and actuated. During Partial EMCC some slip
does occur. Partial EMCC will usually occur at low speeds, low load and light throttle situations.

FULL EMCC

During Full EMCC operation, the TCM increases the L/R Solenoid duty cycle to full ON after Partial EMCC control
brings the engine speed within the desired slip range of transmission input speed relative to engine rpm.
GRADUAL-TO-NO EMCC

This operation is to soften the change from Full or Partial EMCC to No EMCC. This is done at mid-throttle by
decreasing the L/R Solenoid duty cycle.

REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle.(Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 545RFE/
42RLE - REMOVAL)
2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission.

3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal.
4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission.

INSTALLATION
Note: Check converter hub and drive notches for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub
and notches with 320/400 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. The hub must be smooth to avoid dam-
aging the pump seal at installation.
ProCarManuals.com

1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid.

2. Place torque converter in position on transmission.

CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or bush-

ing while inserting torque converter into the front
of the transmission.

3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening.

RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack
when the transmission is in normal operating mode.

OPERATION
When the relay is “off”, no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in “limp-in” mode. After a
controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking
for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure
switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater
than 3 volts.

SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE
DESCRIPTION

The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted

to the top of the valve body inside the transmission
and can only be serviced by removing the valve body
assembly. The electrical connector extends through
the transmission case.
The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four
switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and
send the information to the PCM.
ProCarManuals.com

OPERATION
The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of
open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that
the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate
transmission gear position and shift schedule.
Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of
these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as “between gear” codes. This results in six
codes which should never occur. These are called “invalid” codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM
will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmis-
sion operation with a TRS failure.
TRS SWITCH STATES

SLP T42 T41 T3 T1

P CL CL CL OP
R CL OP OP OP
N CL CL OP CL
D OP OP OP CL
2 OP OP CL OP
1 CL OP CL CL
REMOVAL
1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle.(Refer
to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE/
VALVE BODY - REMOVAL)
2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1).
ProCarManuals.com

3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1).

4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure
TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot.
2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1)
and torque to 5 N·m (45 in. lbs.) torque.
ProCarManuals.com

3. Install the manual shaft seal (1).

4. Install valve body to the transmission.(Refer to 21 -
TRANSMISSION//AUTOMATIC - 42RLE/VALVE
BODY - INSTALLATION)
SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION

The transmission temperature sensor (2) is located in

the transmission range sensor (1) and communicates
transmission sump temperature to the TCM.
ProCarManuals.com

OPERATION
The transmission range sensor (TRS) has an integrated thermistor that the TCM uses to monitor the transmission’s
sump temperature. Since fluid temperature can affect transmission shift quality and convertor lock up, the TCM
requires this information to determine which shift schedule to operate in. The TCM also monitors this temperature
data so it can energize the vehicle cooling fan(s) when a transmission “overheat” condition exists. If the thermistor
circuit fails, the TCM will revert to calculated oil temperature usage.

CALCULATED TEMPERATURE
A failure in the temperature sensor or circuit will result in calculated temperature being substituted for actual tem-
perature. Calculated temperature is a predicted fluid temperature which is calculated from a combination of inputs:
Battery (ambient) temperature
Engine coolant temperature
In-gear run time since start-up
BODY-VALVE
DESCRIPTION

The valve body assembly consists of a cast aluminum

valve body (5),separator plate (4), and transfer plate
(3). The valve body contains valves and check balls
that control fluid delivery to the torque converter
clutch, solenoid/pressure switch assembly, and fric-
tional clutches.
Also mounted to the valve body assembly are the
solenoid/pressure switch assembly and the transmis-
sion range sensor (2).
ProCarManuals.com
ProCarManuals.com

Valve Body - Exploded

1 - VALVE BODY
2 - T/C REGULATOR VALVE
3 - L/R SWITCH VALVE
4 - CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
5 - MANUAL VALVE
6 - CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH VALVE
7 - SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
8 - REGULATOR VALVE

The valves contained within the valve body (1) include the following :
Regulator valve(2)
Solenoid switch valve(7)
Manual valve(5)
Converter clutch switch valve(6)
Converter clutch control valve(4)
Torque converter regulator valve(2)
Low/Reverse switch valve(3)
In addition, the valve body also contains the thermal valve, #2, 3, 4 & 5 check balls and the 2/4 accumulator
assembly.

OPERATION
Note: (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS) for a visual aid
in determining valve location, operation and design.
THERMAL VALVE

The thermal valve (1) is a bi-metallic shudder valve

that helps control the venting rate of oil pressure in
the underdrive clutch passage during release of the
clutch. When the oil temperature is approximately 20
degrees Fahrenheit or less, the valve is fully open to
assist in venting oil past the U1 orifice (2). At temper-
atures above 20 degrees, the valve starts to close and
becomes fully closed at approximately 140 degrees.
The thermal valve is located in the transfer plate of
the valve body.

REGULATOR VALVE
ProCarManuals.com

The regulator valve (9) controls hydraulic pressure in

the transmission. It receives unregulated pressure
from the pump (6), which works against spring tension
(8) to maintain oil at specific pressures. A system of
sleeves and ports allows the regulator valve to work at
one of three predetermined pressure levels. Regulated
oil pressure is also referred to as “line pressure.”

1 - FROM OVERDRIVE CLUTCH CIRCUIT

2 - FROM MANUAL VALVE
3 - HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
4 - FILTER
5 - PUMP INLET
6 - PUMP OUTLET
7 - OIL PRESSURE REGULATED AT THIS POINT
8 - SPRING TENSION
9 - REGULATOR VALVE
10 - TORQUE CONVERTER CONTROL VALVE
SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE

The solenoid switch valve controls line pressure from

the LR/CC solenoid (4). In one position, it allows the
low/reverse clutch to be pressurized. In the other, it
directs line pressure to the converter control and con-
verter clutch valves (7).
ProCarManuals.com

1 - 2/4 CLUTCH
2 - MANUAL VALVE
3 - UD CLUTCH
4 - LR/CC SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED
5 - MANUAL VALVE
6 - LINE PRESSURE
7 - CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH AND CONTROL VALVES
8 - LR CLUTCH
MANUAL VALVE

The manual valve (4) is operated by the mechanical

shift linkage. Its primary responsibility is to send line
pressure to the appropriate hydraulic circuits and sole-
noids. The valve has three operating ranges or
positions.

1 - UD CLUTCH
2 - LR/CC CLUTCH
3 - REVERSE CLUTCH
4 - MANUAL VALVE
5 - REGULATOR VALVE
ProCarManuals.com

6 - REGULATOR VALVE
7 - CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
8 - 2/4 CLUTCH
9 - 2/4 - L/R SOLENOID
10 - L/R CLUTCH

CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH VALVE

The main responsibility of the converter clutch switch

valve (10) is to control hydraulic pressure applied to
the front (off) side of the converter clutch piston. Line
pressure from the regulator valve (5) is fed to the
torque converter regulator valve (8). The pressure is
then directed to the converter clutch switch valve (10)
and to the front side of the converter clutch piston.
This pressure pushes the piston back and disengages
the converter clutch.

1 - CONVERTER CLUTCH
2 - TORQUE CONVERTER
3 - LR CLUTCH
4 - DRIBBLERS
5 - REGULATOR VALVE
6 - SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
7 - CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
8 - TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR VALVE
9 - CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
10 - CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH VALVE
11 - BYPASS VALVE
12 - LUBE
13 - COOLER
CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE

The converter clutch control valve (5) controls the

back (on) side of the torque converter clutch (1).
When the controller energizes or modulates the
LR/CC solenoid to apply the converter clutch piston,
both the converter clutch control valve (5) and the
converter control valve move, allowing pressure to be
applied to the back side of the clutch.
ProCarManuals.com

1 - CONVERTER CLUTCH
2 - TORQUE CONVERTER
3 - LR/CC SOLENOID
4 - FROM MANUAL VALVE
5 - CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
6 - TORQUE CONVERTER REGULATOR VALVE
7 - CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH VALVE
8 - BYPASS VALVE
9 - COOLER

T/C REGULATOR VALVE

The torque converter regulator valve slightly regulates the flow of fluid to the torque converter.

LOW/REVERSE SWITCH VALVE

The low/reverse clutch is applied from different sources, depending on whether low (1st) gear or reverse is selected.
The low/reverse switch valve alternates positions depending on from which direction fluid pressure is applied. By
design, when the valve is shifted by fluid pressure from one channel, the opposing channel is blocked. The switch
valve alienates the possibility of a sticking ball check, thus providing consistent application of the low/reverse clutch
under these operating conditions.

REMOVAL
Note: If valve body is being reconditioned or replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick Learn Proce-
dure.(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the TRS and solenoid wiring connec-
tors.
2. Disconnect the shift cable from the shift lever (at
the transmission).
3. Move the manual shift lever clockwise as far as it
will go. This should be one position past the L posi-
tion. Then remove the manual shift lever.

Note: One of the oil pan bolts has a sealing patch

applied from the factory. Separate this bolts for
reuse.

4. Remove transmission pan bolts (2).

5. Remove transmission oil pan (1).

ProCarManuals.com

6. Remove oil filter (1) from valve body. It is held in

place by two screws.
7. Remove valve body bolts-to-case (1).

CAUTION: The overdrive and underdrive accumu-

lators and springs may fall out when removing the
valve body.

8. Carefully remove valve body assembly (1) from the

ProCarManuals.com

transmission.

DISASSEMBLY
Note: If the valve body is being reconditioned or replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick Learn Pro-
cedure using the scan tool (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
1. Remove manual shaft seal.
2. Remove manual shaft screw (1).

3. Remove Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (1)

and manual shaft (2).

4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1)

from valve body.
ProCarManuals.com
5. Remove valve body stiffener plate (1).

6. Invert valve body assembly and remove transfer

plate-to-valve body screws (1).
ProCarManuals.com
7. Remove transfer/separator plate (1) from valve
body (2)

8. Remove separator plate-to-transfer plate screws

(2).
ProCarManuals.com
9. Remove separator plate (1) from transfer plate (2).

10. Remove the oil screen (1) from the transfer plate.
ProCarManuals.com

11. Remove thermal valve (1) from transfer plate.

ProCarManuals.com

Ball Check Location

1 - (#4) BALL CHECK LOCATION

2 - (#2) BALL CHECK LOCATION
3 - (#5) BALL CHECK LOCATION
4 - (#3) BALL CHECK LOCATION

12. Remove valve body check balls (1-4). Note their location for assembly ease.

13. Remove 2/4 accumulator assembly (1-5).

14. Remove dual retainer plate (2) from valve body.
Use special tool 6301 (1) to remove plate (2).

15. Remove regulator valve spring retainer (2).

ProCarManuals.com
16. Remove remaining retainers (1, 2).
ProCarManuals.com

Valve Body Assembly

1 - VALVE BODY
2 - T/C REGULATOR VALVE
3 - L/R SWITCH VALVE
4 - CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
5 - MANUAL VALVE
6 - CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH VALVE
7 - SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
8 - REGULATOR VALVE

17. Remove all valves and springs.

18. Cleanliness through entire disassembly and assembly of the valve body cannot be overemphasized. When dis-
assembling, each part should be washed in a suitable solvent, then dried by compressed air. Do not wipe
parts with shop towels. All mating surfaces in the valve body are accurately machined; therefore, careful han-
dling of all parts must be exercised to avoid nicks or burrs.

ASSEMBLY
Note: If the valve body assembly is being reconditioned or replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick
Learn Procedure using the scan tool. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANS-
MISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
ProCarManuals.com

Valve Body Assembly

1 - VALVE BODY
2 - T/C REGULATOR VALVE
3 - L/R SWITCH VALVE
4 - CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
5 - MANUAL VALVE
6 - CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH VALVE
7 - SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
8 - REGULATOR VALVE

1. Install all valves and springs as shown.

2. Install regulator valve spring retainer (2).

3. Install dual retainer plate (2) using Tool 6301 (1).

ProCarManuals.com
4. Verify that all retainers (1, 2) are installed as
shown. Retainers should be flush or below valve
body surface.

5. Install 2/4 Accumulator components (1-5) as

shown. Torque 2/4 Accumulator retainer plate to 5
ProCarManuals.com

N·m (45 in. lbs.).

ProCarManuals.com

Ball Check Location

1 - (#4) BALL CHECK LOCATION

2 - (#2) BALL CHECK LOCATION
3 - (#5) BALL CHECK LOCATION
4 - (#3) BALL CHECK LOCATION

6. Install check balls into position as shown. If necessary, secure them with petrolatum or transmission assembly
gel for assembly ease.

7. Install thermal valve (1) to the transfer plate.

8. Install the oil screen (1) to the transfer plate.

9. Install separator plate (1) to transfer plate (2).

ProCarManuals.com
10. Install the two separator plate-to-transfer plate
screws (2).

11. Install the transfer plate (1) to the valve body (2).
ProCarManuals.com
12. Install the transfer plate-to-valve body screws (1)
and torque to 5 N·m (45 in. lbs.).

13. Install the stiffener plate (1).

ProCarManuals.com

14. Install the solenoid/pressure switch assembly (1)

and screws to the transfer plate and torque to 5.5
N·m (50 in. lbs.).

15. Install the manual shaft/rooster comb (3) and

transmission range sensor (1) to the valve body.
ProCarManuals.com

16. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1)

and torque to 5 N·m (45 in. lbs.).
17. Install manual shaft seal.
INSTALLATION
1. Install valve body into position and start bolts (1).
Torque valve body to transmission case bolts (1) to
12 N·m (105 in. lbs.) torque.

2. Install transmission oil filter (1).

ProCarManuals.com
Note: Before installing the oil pan bolt in the bolt
hole (5) located between the torque converter
clutch on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits , it
will be necessary to replentish the sealing patch
on the bolt using Mopar Lock & Seal Adhesive.
ProCarManuals.com

3. Make sure oil pan (1) and case rail are clean and
dry. Install an 1/8” bead of RTV to the transmission
oil pan and install to case. Tighten bolts (2) to 20
N·m (14.5 ft. lbs.).
4. Lower vehicle and connect the TRS connector.
5. Connect solenoid/pressure switch assembly con-
nector.
6. Lower vehicle.
7. Fill transmission with ATF+4, Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid. Verify proper fluid level. (Refer to 21 -
TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE/FLUID -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)

Note: If the valve body has been reconditioned or

replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick
Learn Procedure. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELEC-
TRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
ProCarManuals.com

F-150 3.5L Ecoboost Front Cover Torque Sequence
No ratings yet
F-150 3.5L Ecoboost Front Cover Torque Sequence
2 pages
Mazda Gf4a El Gf4eat Atsg Automatic Transmission Service Group
No ratings yet
Mazda Gf4a El Gf4eat Atsg Automatic Transmission Service Group
112 pages
Steering System Service Manual
No ratings yet
Steering System Service Manual
36 pages
2006 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
100% (1)
2006 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
322 pages
Tài Liệu Số 8W D8Lf1
No ratings yet
Tài Liệu Số 8W D8Lf1
69 pages
2000 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
67% (3)
2000 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
275 pages
Heavy Duty Truck Systems 7th Edition Sean Bennett - Ebook PDF Instant Download
100% (5)
Heavy Duty Truck Systems 7th Edition Sean Bennett - Ebook PDF Instant Download
60 pages
NAG 1 - 42RLE 2005 300 Hemi Trans
No ratings yet
NAG 1 - 42RLE 2005 300 Hemi Trans
836 pages
2001 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents PDF
No ratings yet
2001 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents PDF
218 pages
Transmission
No ratings yet
Transmission
18 pages
2004 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
100% (3)
2004 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
316 pages
w164 ML Class Users Manual 2006
No ratings yet
w164 ML Class Users Manual 2006
539 pages
Power Semiconductor Drives Course File
100% (1)
Power Semiconductor Drives Course File
164 pages
SEAT Ibiza SC Trophy Technical Manual
100% (1)
SEAT Ibiza SC Trophy Technical Manual
27 pages
Folding Top: 2015.0 F-TYPE (X152), 501-18
No ratings yet
Folding Top: 2015.0 F-TYPE (X152), 501-18
368 pages
Freelander
No ratings yet
Freelander
36 pages
Operation and Maintenance Manual For Models
No ratings yet
Operation and Maintenance Manual For Models
33 pages
Critical Wear Areas and Vacuum Test Locations: GM 10L and Ford 10R Series
No ratings yet
Critical Wear Areas and Vacuum Test Locations: GM 10L and Ford 10R Series
1 page
Mobil Lubricants Product Guide
67% (3)
Mobil Lubricants Product Guide
23 pages
300 Ton LTM 1225-A Liebherr
0% (2)
300 Ton LTM 1225-A Liebherr
21 pages
6MT Manual Trans & Diff SUBARU
No ratings yet
6MT Manual Trans & Diff SUBARU
130 pages
Atsg 722.6 Service Manual: Quick Links
No ratings yet
Atsg 722.6 Service Manual: Quick Links
45 pages
04-2 Seyi-Sag SLG Se Sel e
No ratings yet
04-2 Seyi-Sag SLG Se Sel e
13 pages
Maserati Ghibli Digital Catalogue EN
No ratings yet
Maserati Ghibli Digital Catalogue EN
33 pages
Honda BRV Brochure
0% (1)
Honda BRV Brochure
10 pages
VB5100TV
No ratings yet
VB5100TV
30 pages
Automatic Transmission: Section
No ratings yet
Automatic Transmission: Section
344 pages
zf8hp45 70 Rukovodstvo Manual
No ratings yet
zf8hp45 70 Rukovodstvo Manual
122 pages
ASE Automobile Study Guide 2024
No ratings yet
ASE Automobile Study Guide 2024
83 pages
John
100% (1)
John
62 pages
300C Restraints Service Manual
No ratings yet
300C Restraints Service Manual
131 pages
Fusibles Ford Ranger 1991
100% (1)
Fusibles Ford Ranger 1991
6 pages
Tiptronic Diagnose
50% (2)
Tiptronic Diagnose
33 pages
Transmission A604 PDF
No ratings yet
Transmission A604 PDF
138 pages
w221 Fuse Box Location Engine Interior Trunk Dash
No ratings yet
w221 Fuse Box Location Engine Interior Trunk Dash
6 pages
722.9 7g Tronic Automatic Transmission Problems and Solutions - MB Medic
No ratings yet
722.9 7g Tronic Automatic Transmission Problems and Solutions - MB Medic
8 pages
095 1 PDF
No ratings yet
095 1 PDF
80 pages
THM 4T80-E Service Manual
No ratings yet
THM 4T80-E Service Manual
113 pages
993 - Volume 3 - Transmission Automatic
No ratings yet
993 - Volume 3 - Transmission Automatic
104 pages
N13 Manual PDF
No ratings yet
N13 Manual PDF
238 pages
2009 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents PDF
No ratings yet
2009 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents PDF
235 pages
DSG 02e
100% (4)
DSG 02e
58 pages
Divgi TorqTransfer Systems IPO Note Axis Capital PDF
No ratings yet
Divgi TorqTransfer Systems IPO Note Axis Capital PDF
12 pages
2020 Transit Order Guide
100% (4)
2020 Transit Order Guide
43 pages
Mitchell Auto Trans Diagnosis 2 A240 PDF
100% (1)
Mitchell Auto Trans Diagnosis 2 A240 PDF
42 pages
DIGITRONIC AEB DI60 3 4 Cyl
No ratings yet
DIGITRONIC AEB DI60 3 4 Cyl
5 pages
Auto Trans Removal
100% (1)
Auto Trans Removal
12 pages
Technical Service Information: VOLKSWAGEN/AUDI 01M/01N/01P
100% (1)
Technical Service Information: VOLKSWAGEN/AUDI 01M/01N/01P
18 pages
A604 Transmission Codes
No ratings yet
A604 Transmission Codes
12 pages
KDSS Instructions Prado - 4runner
No ratings yet
KDSS Instructions Prado - 4runner
1 page
Attention: A245E & A246E Product Bulletin A245E & A246E Product Bulletin
80% (5)
Attention: A245E & A246E Product Bulletin A245E & A246E Product Bulletin
2 pages
Mitsubishi Magna TE-TJ 96-04 V6 3.0 3.5
50% (4)
Mitsubishi Magna TE-TJ 96-04 V6 3.0 3.5
3 pages
AF33-5 Park - Engine Running
100% (1)
AF33-5 Park - Engine Running
4 pages
Falcon (BF) 2006-08 - Identification Codes
No ratings yet
Falcon (BF) 2006-08 - Identification Codes
6 pages
Seal Aftermarket Products: An Easy Fix For A Self-Inflicted Failure
No ratings yet
Seal Aftermarket Products: An Easy Fix For A Self-Inflicted Failure
69 pages
2007 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
100% (2)
2007 ATRA Seminar Manual Contents
272 pages
Amg Remove - Install Camshaft Adjusters
No ratings yet
Amg Remove - Install Camshaft Adjusters
5 pages
Iron Duke Build
No ratings yet
Iron Duke Build
6 pages
OEM Ford 7.3 Litre Diesel OBD II Diagnostics
80% (10)
OEM Ford 7.3 Litre Diesel OBD II Diagnostics
26 pages
42RE Valve Body
No ratings yet
42RE Valve Body
4 pages
Diagnosis and Testing: Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Electronic Shift
100% (1)
Diagnosis and Testing: Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Electronic Shift
38 pages
9G Tronic Mercedes
No ratings yet
9G Tronic Mercedes
6 pages
M156/M157/M176/M177 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM: M1545692 (NA) M1545685 (EU) Image Transfer
100% (1)
M156/M157/M176/M177 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM: M1545692 (NA) M1545685 (EU) Image Transfer
2 pages
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
100% (6)
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
126 pages
Cruze 2012 Manual SECTION 0
No ratings yet
Cruze 2012 Manual SECTION 0
12 pages
Types of Clutches
No ratings yet
Types of Clutches
18 pages
Transfert Case - Getrag 760
No ratings yet
Transfert Case - Getrag 760
47 pages
Warn Service Manual
100% (1)
Warn Service Manual
16 pages
Press Information 6DCT250
No ratings yet
Press Information 6DCT250
2 pages
LMV Eng1
50% (2)
LMV Eng1
47 pages
5R110 Additional Info 6.15A.2018
100% (1)
5R110 Additional Info 6.15A.2018
8 pages
501 ssp466 en
100% (1)
501 ssp466 en
52 pages
G35 & 350Z Rev2 Clutch Bracket Instructions
100% (1)
G35 & 350Z Rev2 Clutch Bracket Instructions
33 pages
722.9 Transmission Performance Package - Blackboost Usa
No ratings yet
722.9 Transmission Performance Package - Blackboost Usa
2 pages
6HP26 ZF Transmissions With Mechatronics
100% (4)
6HP26 ZF Transmissions With Mechatronics
66 pages
06srt10 Part
No ratings yet
06srt10 Part
194 pages
r170 Adjust Wheel Bearing Play
No ratings yet
r170 Adjust Wheel Bearing Play
4 pages
The NAG1 (5-Speed) Automatic Transmission
100% (1)
The NAG1 (5-Speed) Automatic Transmission
4 pages
W56 Transmission Rebuild Manual: Table of Content
No ratings yet
W56 Transmission Rebuild Manual: Table of Content
2 pages
2005 Diagnostic Parameters: 4T45E Transmission
No ratings yet
2005 Diagnostic Parameters: 4T45E Transmission
8 pages
Adaptation and Adjust Steering Assist VW
100% (1)
Adaptation and Adjust Steering Assist VW
9 pages
34 COROLLA AURIS Steering
No ratings yet
34 COROLLA AURIS Steering
1 page
BF0080 PDF
No ratings yet
BF0080 PDF
1 page
Technical Service Bulletin: Aftermarket Air Filter Can Cause Shift and Driveability Problems
No ratings yet
Technical Service Bulletin: Aftermarket Air Filter Can Cause Shift and Driveability Problems
1 page
Allisson 4000MH Transmission Owners Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Allisson 4000MH Transmission Owners Manual PDF
65 pages
Bus Driveline Technology 88038 Friedrichshafen Germany Phone +49 7541 77-0 Fax +49 7541 77-908000
No ratings yet
Bus Driveline Technology 88038 Friedrichshafen Germany Phone +49 7541 77-0 Fax +49 7541 77-908000
32 pages
Warning
No ratings yet
Warning
268 pages
Ravigneaux Design
No ratings yet
Ravigneaux Design
11 pages
A760E-F-H VBL Interactive PDF
No ratings yet
A760E-F-H VBL Interactive PDF
1 page
CVT VS TIPTRONIC (Engines Comparisons)
No ratings yet
CVT VS TIPTRONIC (Engines Comparisons)
7 pages
A750E/F Series: Toyota /lexus
No ratings yet
A750E/F Series: Toyota /lexus
1 page
17 Metric Tonne 18.7 Short Ton Payload - 8.0 M 10.5 Yd Capacity
No ratings yet
17 Metric Tonne 18.7 Short Ton Payload - 8.0 M 10.5 Yd Capacity
2 pages
Critical Wear Areas & Vacuum Test Locations: Upper Valve Body - 46RE Shown
No ratings yet
Critical Wear Areas & Vacuum Test Locations: Upper Valve Body - 46RE Shown
4 pages
Dodge Ram Truck Transmission Adjustment
No ratings yet
Dodge Ram Truck Transmission Adjustment
6 pages
Freio Content PDF
No ratings yet
Freio Content PDF
16 pages
SM 25
No ratings yet
SM 25
17 pages
How To Service Your Transmission Shift Pins
No ratings yet
How To Service Your Transmission Shift Pins
7 pages
Codigos Mercedes
No ratings yet
Codigos Mercedes
8 pages
06 GA6HP26Z Auto Trans Color
No ratings yet
06 GA6HP26Z Auto Trans Color
48 pages
NQR 87-80-190 CREW - ARK0953 - v03
No ratings yet
NQR 87-80-190 CREW - ARK0953 - v03
4 pages
3CXC
No ratings yet
3CXC
8 pages
6T40 Gen III - Start Stop
100% (1)
6T40 Gen III - Start Stop
3 pages
Lepelletier
No ratings yet
Lepelletier
4 pages
DI45
No ratings yet
DI45
5 pages
Fjernstart Fyr Volvo
No ratings yet
Fjernstart Fyr Volvo
22 pages
Intake Port Shutoff, Function
No ratings yet
Intake Port Shutoff, Function
2 pages
4L80E 97-Up
No ratings yet
4L80E 97-Up
1 page
Rolls Royce Phantom World Specification 2012
No ratings yet
Rolls Royce Phantom World Specification 2012
1 page
Electronic Automotive Transmission Troubleshooter Nissan-Infinity Vehicles
From Everand
Electronic Automotive Transmission Troubleshooter Nissan-Infinity Vehicles
Mandy Concepcion
No ratings yet